Home

6200 User Manual - Tundra Process Solutions

Contents

1. ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 101 33 Current Stream Read Write 101 34 Stream Mask Read Write 101 35 Current Month Read Write 101 36 Current Day Read Write 101 37 Current Year Read Write 101 38 Current Hour Read Write 101 39 Current Minutes Read Write 101 40 Cycle time start Month Read Write 101 41 Cycle time start Day Read Write 101 42 Cycle time start Year Read Write 101 43 Cycle time start Hour Read Write 101 44 Cycle time start Minutes Read Write 101 45 Bit Flags Transmitter Read Write 101 46 Bit Flags Transmitter Read Write 101 47 Bit Flags Stream 1 Low Read Write 101 48 Bit Flags Stream 1 High Read Write 101 49 Bit Flags Stream 2Low Read Write 101 50 Bit Flags Stream 2 High Read Write 101 51 Bit Flags Stream 3Low Read Write 101 52 Bit Flags Stream 3 High Read Write 101 53 Bit Flags Stream 4 Low Read Write 101 54 Bit Flags Stream 4 High Read Write 101 55 Bit Flags Stream 5 Low Read Write 101 56 Bit Flags Stream 5 High Read Write 101 57 New Data Flag Read Write 101 58 Cal Analysis Flag Read Write 101 59 Cal Analysis Flag Read Write C 13 3 Therms Master Btu Float Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 102 0 Mole 96 Component 1 Read Write 102 1 Mole Component 2 Read Write 102 2 Mole 96 Component Read Write 102 3 Mole 96 Component 4 Read Write Page C 88 2104349 001 rev AB
2. ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 102 4 Mole Component 5 Read Write 102 5 Mole 96 Component 6 Read Write 102 6 Mole 96 Component 7 Read Write 102 7 Mole 96 Component 8 Read Write 102 8 Mole 96 Component 9 Read Write 102 9 Mole 96 Component 10 Read Write 102 10 Mole 96 Component 11 Read Write 102 11 Mole 96 Component 12 Read Write 102 12 Mole 96 Component 13 Read Write 102 13 Mole 96 Component 14 Read Write 102 14 Mole 96 Component 15 Read Write 102 15 Mole 96 Component 4 Read Write 102 16 GPM Component 1 Read Write 102 17 GPM Component 2 Read Write 102 18 GPM Component 3 Read Write 102 19 GPM Component 4 Read Write 102 20 GPM Component 5 Read Write 102 21 GPM Component 6 Read Write 102 22 GPM Component 7 Read Write 102 23 GPM Component 8 Read Write 102 24 GPM Component 9 Read Write 102 25 GPM Component 10 Read Write 102 26 GPM Component 11 Read Write 102 27 GPM Component 12 Read Write 102 28 GPM Component 13 Read Write 102 29 GPM Component 14 Read Write 102 30 GPM Component 15 Read Write 102 31 GPM Component 16 Read Write 102 32 Btu Dry Read Write 102 33 Btu Saturated Read Write 102 34 Specific Gravity Read Write 102 35 Compressibility Read Write 102 36 Wobbe Index Read Write 102 37 Total Un normalized mole Read Write 2104349 001 rev AB
3. E 3 34 G4 EX MAINTENANCE ciones hora ea E ouo ea eter thu ena es po ERI erano 4 1 4 1 Lure 4 1 4 1 1 Maintenance SU pport asteroidene etatens 4 4 4 1 2 How to Use This 4 4 4 1 3 Cleanliness 4 4 4 1 4 Front Mounted 01 10 4 4 4 1 5 Returning Parts for 0040 4 4 4 2 Backing Up Configuration 4 1 4 2 1 Step by Step Instructions esses 4 2 4 3 Restoring Configuration Files 022 4 2 4 31 Step by Step 4 2 4 4 Performing Warm BOOLs Geert 4 2 44 1 Hardware Warm 1 04 00001 mener 4 2 442 Software Warm 02 00 eene 4 3 4 5 Performing BOOt ur see egent 4 4 4 5 1 Hardware Cold 4 4 4 5 2 Software Cold 4 5 4 6 Changing the 4 EX Clock uersu Dae eei eheu eu jaaa 4 6 4 6 1 Clock Change Not Crossing an Hour 4 6 4 6
4. Register Description Type Access Note 13 X Bit Operation X Register 1 Register Read Write 4 14 0 Bit Operation 1 Register 2 Register Read Write 4 14 1 Bit Operation 2 Register 2 Register Read Write 4 14 2 Bit Operation 3 Register 2 Register Read Write 4 14 X Bit Operation X Register 2 Register Read Write 4 15 0 Compare Operation 1 Result Bool Read Only 5 15 1 Compare Operation 2 Result Bool Read Only 5 15 2 Compare Operation 3 Result Bool Read Only 5 15 X Compare Operation X Result Bool Read Only 5 16 0 Compare Operation 1 Operation Uint16 Read Write 5 16 1 Compare Operation 2 Operation Uint16 Read Write 5 16 2 Compare Operation 3 Operation Uint16 Read Write 5 16 X Compare Operation X Operation Uint16 Read Write 5 17 0 Compare Operation 1 Register 1 Register Read Write 5 17 1 Compare Operation 2 Register 1 Register Read Write 5 17 2 Compare Operation 3 Register 1 Register Read Write 5 17 X Compare Operation X Register 1 Register Read Write 5 18 0 Compare Operation 1 Register 2 Register Read Write 5 18 1 Compare Operation 2 Register 2 Register Read Write 5 18 2 Compare Operation 3 Register 2 Register Read Write 5 18 X Compare Operation X Register 2 Register Read Write 5 19 0 Array Operation 1 Result Float Read Only 6 19 1 Array Operation 2 Result Float Read Only 6 19 2 Array Operation 3 Result F
5. REGISTER DESCRIPTION TYPE ACCESS NOTE 202 8 XMV 9 Device Enable Byte Read Write 3 202 X XMV X 1 Device Enable Byte Read Write 3 203 0 XMV 1 Scan Trigger Byte Read Only 4 203 1 XMV 2 Scan Trigger Byte Read Only 4 203 2 XMV 3 Scan Trigger Byte Read Only 4 203 3 XMV 4 Scan Trigger Byte Read Only 4 203 4 XMV 5 Scan Trigger Byte Read Only 4 203 5 XMV 6 Scan Trigger Byte Read Only 4 203 6 XMV 7 Scan Trigger Byte Read Only 4 203 7 XMV 8 Scan Trigger Byte Read Only 4 203 8 XMV 9 Scan Trigger Byte Read Only 4 203 9 XMV 10 Scan Trigger Byte Read Only 4 204 0 XMV 1 Raw DP Value Float Read Write 5 204 1 XMV 1 Raw SP Value Float Read Write 5 204 2 XMV 1 Raw TF Value Float Read Write 5 204 3 XMV 2 Raw DP Value Float Read Write 5 204 4 XMV 2 Raw SP Value Float Read Write 5 204 5 XMV 2 Raw TF Value Float Read Write 5 204 6 XMV 3 Raw DP Value Float Read Write 5 204 7 XMV 3 Raw SP Value Float Read Write 5 204 8 XMV 3 Raw TF Value Float Read Write 5 204 X XMV Raw DP Value Float Read Write 5 204 X 1 XMV Raw SP Value Float Read Write 5 204 X 2 XMV Raw TF Value Float Read Write 5 205 0 XMV 1 Scaled DP Value Float Read Only 6 205 1 XMV 1 Scaled SP Value Float Read Only 6 205 2 XMV 1 Scaled TF Value Float Read Only 6 205 3 XMV 2 Scaled DP Value Float Read Only 6 205 4 XMV 2 Scaled SP Value Float Read Only 6 205 5 XMV 2 Scaled TF Value Float Read Only 6 205 6 XMV 3 Scaled DP Value Floa
6. rers 5 14 5 4 Communications 2 5 14 5 41 i a ite dee 5 14 5 4 2 Setting Up 5 16 5 4 3 Transceiver Supply Voltage 5 16 5 4 4 6270 OEU Supply Voltage 5 16 5 4 5 Transceiver Check dieci dace ede edi eder ed ned 5 7 54 6 Termination Board Supply Voltage 5 17 5 4 7 RS 232 5 18 548 RS 232 Termination Board 5 18 5 4 9 RS 232 OEU Termination Strip 2 2 7 5 19 5 4 10 RS 485 Communication 5 20 5 4 11 RS 485 Termination Board 5 21 5 4 12 RS 485 OEU Termination Strip 7770 5 22 APPENDIX DAUGHTER usikret 1 A 1 Materials Supplied in the Upgrade A 1 2 Daughter Card 1 Installation A 1 A 3 1 Upgrading the 2 A 3 2 Unit Operating Status Shut Down 3 A 3 3 Internal PCCU Connecto
7. characteristics O 2 4 Y S Y S 1 9 T To Third Party DI Digital Input Devices Dare VO Daughter Card S ys il ge PIN 2102458 2 To Third Party 2 i amp v4 Analog Devices isis PD 8 SEE SHEET 2 o EIRAGSSZSXZGE Ala 0 00 oo 04 00 aout w 110000000018 8 J3 J1 O O sn The Digital Outputs maximum I resistance of 2 50 which can switch 48V AC DC at up to 100mA The outputs isolated To Third Party AC voltage for 1 minute at 25 C RH 60 Digital Output Devices between input and output from each other as well as the control circuit by 1500Vrms A 3 6 2 Analog Points Analog Inputs The input range is 0 10 34 volts for the three 0 5V analog inputs 11 AI2 and AI3 The inputs have a low pass filter 3 dB point of 100Hz The sourcing device must be capable of driving 10K input impedance As shown below an external 250 255 OHM resistor is required across and input to convert a 0 4 20 mA signal to a 0 1 5V compatible input Page A 6 2104349 001 rev AB 24VDC 11 2 e 4 20mA Transmitter GND Alt AI2 4 AIX AIR 99990909090 J1 The analog inputs must be defined in PCCU32 EM pccu32 Entry E ini xl Operate View Window Help 1
8. 1 21 Figure 1 17 Optional Communication Enclosure 20 00 0 1 22 Figure 1 18 Solar Panel Typical mmm 1 23 Figure 1 19 RS 232 Local Communication 1 27 Figure 1 20 USB Local Communication Cable 1 27 Figure 1 21 Ethernet Communication Cable sse eene enn 1 28 Figure 1 22 Ethernet Connectivity Diagram sees eene meer nnns 1 29 Figure 2 1 Type A Installation 2 3 Figure 2 2 Type B Installation 2 4 Figure 2 3 C Installation 2 5 Figure 2 4 G4 EX EXIMY POMS eec Le ep RH eaaa SA Tan 2 6 Figure 2 5 Thermowell Installation into the Meter 2 7 Figure 226 RTD Probe Wiring rere eee a eec ite eer c dienes 28 Figure 2 7 Explosion Proof RTD 2 8 Figure 2 8 Explosion Proof RTD 1 2 9 Foure 2 9 RTD Probe Wiring tete rne teh reae ee en aber 2 10 Figure 2 10 6270 OEU Pipe Mounting 24000 2 11 Figure 2 11 6270 OEU Wall Mount Installation 2 12 Figure 2512 6270 OEU Enclosure ics pt
9. Figure 4 3 6270 OEU Configuration 4 7 1 Step by Step Instructions 1 2 3 4 5 6 Collect the data from the unit Back up the configuration files following the instructions listed previously in this chapter Verify the LL alarm battery alarm is not being displayed on the G4 EX s display This prevents any data stored in RAM from being lost when power is removed Disconnect the charging source from the charger regulator Disconnect the battery pack cable connector going to the charger regulator Remove the battery pack from the battery compartment 2104349 001 rev AB Page 4 7 7 Remove the terminal lugs from the battery and place it on the new battery Be sure to connect the red wire to the positive side and the black wire to the negative side 8 Insert the battery pack into the compartment Insert the battery pack so that its terminals are not touching any metal inside of the unit 9 Reconnect the battery pack cable connector to the charger regulator 10 Reconnect the charging source to the charger regulator 11 Monitor the LCD for normal operational reading and battery voltage 4 8 Replacing the G4 EX Board The G4 EX board is mounted inside of the G4 EX front end cap To access and remove the G4 EX board perform the following procedures Remove power from the device or insure the area is known to non hazardous befo
10. od ve oie 3 11 Figure 3 13 System Setup etate nein t 3 12 Figure 3 14 Station Setup 3 14 Figure 3 15 Security Setup Dialog 3 15 Figure 3 16 WinCCU32 Edit a Device ID Dialog 3 15 Figure 3 17 Role Administration Menu 3 16 Figure 3 18 Security Editor Dialog BOX 3 17 Figure 3 19 Roles Dialog 3 17 Figure 3 20 User Name and Password Dialog 3 18 Figure 3 21 System Setup Dialog 3 19 Figure 3 22 Send Role Based Access Control File Dialog 3 19 Figure 3 23 Totalflow TCP Setup 3 20 Figure 3 24 Login Dialog BOX ee edd eu tends 3 21 Figure 3 25 System Setup Dialog BOX 3 21 Figure 3 26 Security Log Tab odere tiere d e dm E e Rd 3 22 Figure 3 27 Credit Key License Utility seem emm emm mm 3 24 Figure 3 28 Credit Key License Utility 3 24 Figure 3 29 Application Credit Key Entry 3 25 Figure 3 30 Application Credit Verification 00 000 3 26 Figure 3 31 App Licensing Tab ne het d Reli re att edd
11. ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 7 15 C Prime Read Only 7 16 Non Flow weighted Accum AP Read Only 7 17 Minute Flow Secs Read Only 7 18 Yesterday s contract day volume SCF Read Only 7 19 Current Flow Rate scaled per chkmcf Read Only See Note 1 7 20 Last Vol Period volume scaled per chkmcf Read Only See Note 1 7 21 Accumulated Volume scaled per chkmcf Read Only See Note 1 7 22 Today s contract day volume scaled per Read Only See Note 1 chkmcf 7 23 Yesterday s contract day volume scaled Read Only See Note 1 per chkmcf 7 24 Flow Rate Hi limit scaled chkmcf Read Only See Note 1 7 25 Flow Rate Lo limit scaled per chkmcf Read Only See Note 1 7 26 Last Calc Ap Read Only 7 27 Last Calc Dp Read Only 7 28 Last Calc Tf Read Only 7 29 Last Calc Extension Read Only 7 30 Last Calc Y Exp Factor Read Only 7 31 Last Calc Fpv Read Only 7 32 Last Calc Fw Read Only Last Calc Volumetric FlowRate Qv 7 33 SCF Hour Read Only 7 34 Last Calc Hv BTU SCF Read Only 7 35 Last Calc Specific Gravity Read Only 7 36 Last Calc FIP AGA3 1992 Read Only 7 37 Last Calc Ev AGA3 1992 Read Only Last Calc Orifice diameter at Tf Inches 7 38 AGA3 1992 Read Only Last Calc Pipe diameter at Tf Inches 7 39 AGA3 1992 Read Only 7 40 Last Calc Base Density lbsm cf AGA3 Read Only 1992 Last Calc Mass Flow Rate qm m Ibsm hour AGA3 1992 Last Calc Coefficient of discharge 7 42 AGA3 1992 Read Only 7
12. unsigned long date Julian Date Time unsigned int sn Sequence Number float Acf period avg float ap period avg AP float tf period avg TEMP float ext period EXTENSION float vol period VOLUME float btu period ENERGY unsigned int ftime period FLOWTIME unsigned int ptime period TIME unsigned char aflags 3 period ALARMS unsigned char vcode Verification Code LOGRECORD C 11 9 Tube Daily Registers ARRAY DESCRIPTION USAGE 220 Daily Static Pressure Floating Point PSIA 221 Daily Diff Pressure Floating Point Inches H2O 222 Daily Temperature Floating Point Deg F 224 Daily Extension Floating Point 225 Daily Volume Floating Point MCF 226 Daily Heating Value Floating Point MBTU 227 Daily Flow time Unsigned Long seconds 228 Daily Total time Unsigned Long seconds 229 Daily Alarm bits 32 bits See note 1 251 Daily Record See note 2 C 11 9 1 Tube Daily Register Usage Notes 1 Daily Alarm Bits 0x00080000 524288 Flow rate high limit 0x00040000 262144 Flow rate low limit 0x00020000 131072 Temperature high limit 0x00010000 65536 Temperature low limit 0x00008000 32768 Static pressure high limit 0x00004000 16384 Static pressure low limit 0x00002000 8192 Acf high limit 0x00001000 4096 Acf low limit 0x00000800 2048 Zero flow 0x00000400 1024 Back flow 0x00000200 512 Remote sense DI 0x0
13. 102 14 8 Therms Slave Var Modbus Address Registers 102 C 14 9 Therms Interface Control Get Request Registers C 103 C 14 10 Therms Master Int32 Registers C 103 C 14 11 Therms Slave Stream 1 Float Registers C 103 C 14 12Therms Slave Stream 2 Float Registers 104 C 14 13Therms Slave Stream 3 Float Registers 104 C 14 14Therms Master Slave Stream 4 Float Registers 105 C 14 15Therms Master Slave Analysis Trend 106 Therms Slave Application C 107 C 15 1 Therms Slave Float C 107 C 15 2 Therms Slave String Registers sssssssseee 109 C 15 3 Therms Slave Int32 Registers C 109 C 15 4 Therms Slave Stream 1 Float Registers 109 C 15 5 Therms Slave Stream 2 Float Registers C 110 C 15 6 Therms Slave Stream 3 Float Registers C 111 C 15 7 Therms Slave Stream 4 Float Registers
14. ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 3 13 Zba Read Write 3 14 Oriface coef of expansion Read Write inches Deg F 3 15 Pipe coef of expansion Read Write inches Deg F 3 16 Barometric Pressure Read Write PSIA 3 17 F t for NX19 Read Write 3 18 F p for Fov NX19 Read Write 3 19 Fixed Analysis BTU Read Write BTU SCF 3 20 Fixed Analysis Gravity Read Write 3 21 Fixed Analysis Nitrogen Read Write mole 3 22 Fixed Analysis Carbon Dioxide Read Write mole 3 23 Fixed Analysis Hydrogen Sulfide Read Write mole 3 24 Fixed Analysis Water Read Write mole 3 25 Fixed Analysis Helium Read Write mole 3 26 Fixed Analysis Methane Read Write mole 3 27 Fixed Analysis Ethane Read Write mole 3 28 Fixed Analysis Propane Read Write mole 3 29 Fixed Analysis Normal Butane Read Write mole 3 30 Fixed Analysis Iso Butane Read Write mole 3 31 Fixed Analysis Normal Pentane Read Write mole 3 32 Fixed Analysis Iso Pentane Read Write mole 96 3 33 Fixed Analysis Normal Hexane Read Write mole 96 3 34 Fixed Analysis Normal Heptane Read Write mole 96 3 35 Fixed Analysis Normal Octane Read Write mole 96 3 36 Fixed Analysis Normal Nonane Read Write mole 96 3 37 Fixed Analysis Normal Decane Read Write mole 96 3 38 Fixed Analysis Oxygen Read Write mole 3 39 Fixed Analysis Carbon Monoxide Read Write mole 96 3 40 Fixed Analysis Hydrogen Read Write mole 96 3 41 Fixed Analysis Argon Read Write mole 96 3 42
15. COMMUNICA c ze 5 BATTERY OY COMPARTMENT a E T To Battery e C O OP GP Comm Output Ve IONS EQUIPMENT 2 2 8 1 1 2 3 Figure 2 12 6270 OEU Enclosure Step by Step Instructions Insert the battery pack into the battery compartment see Figure 2 12 with the long dimension of the battery facing outward Connect the battery pack connector to the battery connector mate that is wired to the charger regulator If the G4 EX unit is already wired to the 6270 enclosure the LCD screen should display a warm start 2 2 9 Lithium Battery Installation The following are steps for installing and verifying the connection on the lithium battery The lithium battery is disabled when shipped from the factory The user will need to connect the battery before continuing 2104349 001 rev AB Page 2 13 2 2 9 1 Step by Step Instructions 1 To connect the battery remove the front cover of the G4 EX Look for the battery connector behind and to the lower right side of the display see Figure 2 13 2 On the G4 EX board the lithium red is on top pin 1 and the black pin 4 is on the bottom It should be noted that this is a confined space As such place the ground lead of a voltmeter on bare metal such as the plate behind the display and place the p
16. C 111 C 15 8 Therms Slave Analysis Trend C 112 vii TABLE OF FIGURES Figure 1 1 Typical G4 EX Installation 1 2 Figure 1 2 Liquid Crystal Display LCD and 1 6 Figure 41 3 G4 EX EngclosUfre 1 1 an Added e aja dene e ER Ene 1 9 Figure 1 4 G4 EX Enclosure 1 9 Figure 1 5 G4 EX Enclosure Right 2 0 0 eene nennen 1 10 Figure 1 6 G4 EX Main Processor Board sssssssseeeneeeene nennen nennen nenne 1 11 Figure 1 7 G4 EX Termination 1 13 Figure 1 8 Typical DI Point 1 14 Figure 1 9 DI Connection Example ecce ttti Ete e ua e eo e ax ea Re Loc nb eee 1 15 Figure 1 10 Typical DO Point Schematics 0 00000 1 16 Figure 1 11 DO Connection 1 17 Figure 1 12 Typical Al Point Schematic eee eene 1 17 Figure 1 13 Al Example Connections 00 000010 1 18 Figure 1 14 Explosion Proof Multivariable Transducer EXIMV 1 19 Figure 1 15 Liquid Crystal Display LCD Assembly sss emen 1 20 Figure 1 16 Explosion Proof Resistive Temperature
17. ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 253 0 N2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 1 CO2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 2 H2S Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 3 H20 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 4 HE Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 5 C1 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 6 C2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 7 C3 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 8 NC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 9 IC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 10 NC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 11 IC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 12 NC6 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 13 NC7 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 14 NC8 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 15 NC9 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 16 NC10 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 17 02 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 18 CO Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 19 H2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 20 AR Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 21 AIR Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 22 C6PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 23 BTU Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 24 GF Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 25 NEOC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write C 14 14 Therms Master Slave Stream 4 Float Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 254 0 N2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 1 CO2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254
18. LI RS 232 RS 485 I O EXPANSION S i CTS RBUS aad S RXD RBUS RTD PROBE S TXD TBUS 5 S RTS TBUS EENET m S J9 i RRTS COMM1 S OPERATE COMM1 d a S i COMM2 SW SECURITY J7 S 3 GND zi S B USB CLIENT RESET TS 2 7 1 I hi J16 PWR Note P di Pinouts are shown to the outside for clarity but all of the Phoenix connectors are wired G4 6200 000000000 and attached to the inside POWER TERM BOARD 2103344 XXX CTS RBUS RXD RBUS Jumpers for RS 485 Mode Only TXD TBUS RTS TBUS RRTS COMM2 J11 Terminates RS 485 OPERATE COMM2 on COMM2 COMM2 SW GND VBATT COMM2 RS 232 RS 485 Figure 5 4 G4 EX Termination Board 6 7 Verify that there are no ot across them in the power 8 9 Correct and retest as necessary her devices that may drop and excessive voltage supply circuit to the G4 EX Correct and retest as necessary Replace the lithium battery with a known good battery using the Replacing the Lithium Battery instructions in Chapter 4 5 3 3 Charger Circuit Test If the system setup includes a battery pack solar panel or AC charging source connected to the 6270 Optional Equipment Unit OEU and the unit s battery is not
19. 1 18 1 2 5 Display Assembly niet e Pm e aide 1 20 1 2 6 Resistive Temperature Detector 1 21 1 2 7 6270 Optional Equipment Unit 1 22 1 2 6 Solar Paneli tenet ptr tee em Menu ates Mind ate 1 22 1 2 9 Lithium Battery eet deiecit 1 23 1 3 G4 EX Application Licensing 99 1 24 13 14 Credit Key USB uie d teinte es ict ries 1 25 1 4 Laptop Computer Running 2 222 0 00020 1 25 1 5 Local G4 EX 1 26 1 5 1 RS 232 Serial PCCU Cable Round Military Cable 1 26 1 5 2 PCCU32 USB Connection cece eme 1 27 1 5 3 Bluetooth 1 28 1 5 4 Network Connectivity Dynamic IP with Router 1 28 20 INSTALLATION Lae 2 1 2 1 Unpacking and Inspection 2 1 2 101 tUnpacklng diete mc idt Rt Ret ttu RU 2 1 3 0 2 1 2 Inspection ioo eet iH ee asl tre arm nee eee 2 1 2 1 3 Damaged 2 1 2 2 2 Pole Mount Installation eo ee 2 1 223 wt m isa 2 2 22 2 Renee BI 2 3 2 2 3 Type oM 2 4 2 24 Manifol
20. ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 251 19 H2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 20 AR Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 21 AIR Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 22 C6PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 23 BTU Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 24 GF Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 25 NEOC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write C 15 5 Therms Slave Stream 2 Float Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 252 0 N2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 1 CO2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 2 H2S Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 3 H20 Btu Stream Component Read Write 2524 HE Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 5 C1 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 6 C2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 7 C3 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 8 NC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 9 IC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 10 NC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 11 IC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 12 NC6 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 13 NC7 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 14 NC8 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 15 NC9 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 16 NC10 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 17 O2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 18 CO Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 19 H2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 20 AR Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 21 AIR Btu Stream Compo
21. 3 34 Table 4 1 Calibration Configurable 4 18 Table 5 41 Visual Alarm Codes t e HE rie RR HE Pee e 5 3 Table 5 2 Specifications for Solar 8 5 10 Table 5 3 RS 232 Field Wiring on the G4 EX Termination 5 18 Table 5 4 RS 485 Field Wiring on the G4 EX Termination 5 21 INTRODUCTION This manual is designed to provide an experienced flow meter technician with the requirements necessary to install set up and operate a Totalflow XFCS 6200 6201EX Organization amp Style Each of the chapters in this manual presents information in an organized and concise manner Readers are able to look at the headings and receive broad picture of the content without reading every word Also there are overviews at the beginning of each chapter that provides the user with an idea of what is in the chapter and how it fits into the overall manual Chapter Descriptions Getting Help Chapter Name Description Provides description of the G4 EX system 1 System Description One components and specifications 2 Installation Includes unpacking and detailed procedures for set up and installation Provides the user with a tutorial on how to get 3 G4 EX Startup a newly installed G4 EX system up and running 4
22. 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 41 Ary Reg Description Usage Note 15 0 SPI Start Count Intended Scans Read Write 15 1 SPI Actual Scans Read Only 15 2 SPI Port Transfers Read Only 15 3 SPI Interrupt Count Read Only 15 4 SPI Interrupt Timeouts Read Only 15 5 SPI Previous Scan Interval Read Only 15 6 SPI Shortest Scan Interval Read Write 15 7 SPI Longest Scan Interval Read Write C 9 12 IOS String Registers Ary Reg Description Usage Note 20 0 Transducer Serial Number Read Only C 9 13 IOS Daughter CardByte Registers Ary Reg Description Usage Note 100 0 DI 1 Read Only 100 1 DI 2 Read Only 100 2 DI 3 Read Only 100 3 DI 4 Read Only 100 4 DO 1 Read Write 100 5 DO 2 Read Write 100 6 DO 3 Read Write 100 7 DO 4 Read Write C 9 14 IOS Daughter Card UINT16 Registers Ary Reg Description Usage Note 101 0 Al 1 Raw Counts Read Only 101 1 AI 2 Raw Counts Read Only 101 2 AI 3 Raw Counts Read Only 101 3 AO 1 Raw Counts Read Write 101 4 PI 1 Raw Counts Read Only 101 5 PI 2 Raw Counts Read Only 101 6 PI 3 Raw Counts Read Only 101 7 PI 4 Raw Counts Read Only Page C 42 2104349 001 rev AB C 9 151OS Daughter Card UINT32 Registers Ary Reg Description Usage Note 102 0 P
23. REGISTER DESCRIPTION TYPE ACCESS NOTE 200 0 XMV 1 Modbus Address Byte Read Write 1 200 1 XMV 2 Modbus Address Byte Read Write 1 200 2 XMV 3 Modbus Address Byte Read Write 1 200 3 XMV 4 Modbus Address Byte Read Write 1 200 4 XMV 5 Modbus Address Byte Read Write 1 200 5 XMV 6 Modbus Address Byte Read Write 1 200 6 XMV 7 Modbus Address Byte Read Write 1 200 7 XMV 8 Modbus Address Byte Read Write 1 200 8 XMV 9 Modbus Address Byte Read Write 1 200 X XMV X 1 Modbus Address Byte Read Write 1 201 0 XMV 1 Modbus Register Ulnt16 Read Write 2 201 1 XMV 2 Modbus Register Ulnt16 Read Write 2 201 2 XMV 3 Modbus Register Ulnt16 Read Write 2 201 3 XMV 4 Modbus Register Ulnt16 Read Write 2 201 4 XMV 5 Modbus Register Ulnt16 Read Write 2 201 5 XMV 6 Modbus Register Ulnt16 Read Write 2 201 6 XMV 7 Modbus Register Ulnt16 Read Write 2 201 7 XMV 8 Modbus Register Ulnt16 Read Write 2 201 8 XMV 9 Modbus Register Ulnt16 Read Write 2 201 X XMV X 1 Modbus Register Ulnt16 Read Write 2 202 0 XMV 1 Device Enable Byte Read Write 3 202 1 XMV 2 Device Enable Byte Read Write 3 202 2 XMV 3 Device Enable Byte Read Write 3 202 3 XMV 4 Device Enable Byte Read Write 3 202 4 XMV 5 Device Enable Byte Read Write 3 202 5 XMV 6 Device Enable Byte Read Write 3 202 6 XMV 7 Device Enable Byte Read Write 3 202 7 XMV 8 Device Enable Byte Read Write 3 Page C 78 2104349 001 rev AB
24. an m GR 3 13 3 5 Application Licensing Credit Key sese 3 23 3 5 1 Credit Key Driver Installation 3 23 3 5 2 Access View the Credit Key with PCCU32 7 0 or 3 23 3 5 3 Adding Credits to the Credit Key by 3 25 3 5 4 Transferring Credits to the G4 EX from the Credit Key 3 26 3 5 5 Transferring Credits to the Credit Key from the G4 EX 3 27 3 6 G4 EX Gohriguratlg xs ree du kes 3 28 3 61 Contact E p b abc are 3 28 Penod semesteret 3 29 3 6 3 Volume Calculation 3 29 3 6 4 Calculated 3 29 3 6 5 Super Compressibility Calculation 3 30 3 6 6 Gonstants iced eo Ended tette idit e uttale 3 31 3 6 7 Alarm Limits 22 ce tec ql oc eee ud 3 32 3 6 8 Reset Volume o ed MA td n rette 3 33 3 7 Start Up the G4 EX iu ete tope e eg nier oer a eaa 3 33 3 721 Putting the G4 EX Orr Line c t ntc edic 3 33 3 7 2 Setting G4 EX Temperature 3 33 4 0 3 8 G4 EX Standard Displays recreo ei ovn 3 34 3 8 1
25. mE xii Safety Practices and Precautions 2 7 20 xii Safety GUuldelines ua using xiii Safety First Lu S xiii Equipment Marklngs get ee xiv Grounding the Product tede dette dba se ed xiv Operating Voltage reote ee Un aule tU ar o PEE xiv Danger From Loss of Ground enne Dale Equipment nint hardere ee xiv Fuse Replacement 222224 1 1 000000 1 0 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION er eere eene e eene eR 1 1 1 1 pe REB D 1 1 1 1 1 Capabilities aa ae nn a ee ieee ee 1 2 TEZ Functionally 1 3 1 1 3 Flow Computer Calculations sss 1 3 TEE Log Period Records ertet e ttc eti etie bad 1 4 11 57 Display RUNCORN Sc i ut 1 5 1 1 6 Display arver Aen ee Gene 1 6 1 2 G4 EX Computer 9 1 7 1 2 4 G4 EX Enclosure eR es dietus ges des 1 8 1 2 2 G4 EX Main Processor Board 1 10 12 3 G4 EX Termination 1 12 1 2 4 Explosion Proof Multivariable Transducer
26. Page 1 24 2104349 001 rev AB General applications typically provide some type of measurement control logging and or archival function General applications include Measurement AGA 7 Measurement Measurement e Coriolis Gas e Alarm System e Shutdown e Plunger PAD Controller e Pump Interface e Oil Custody Transfer Measurement IEC applications are generally custom applications provided by Totalflow at the customer s request This might include special control and or measurement algorithms required by the customer Multiple IEC applications can be instantiated with a single IEC credit CO2 NIST applications each require a CO2 NIST credit 13 1 Credit Key USB The G4 EX comes with four general credits installed in the unit If the system configuration requires more application credits they can be purchased from Totalflow s Order Entry 1 800 442 3097 Credits Standard General IEC and CO2 are maintained on the credit key Credits can be purchased and kept on the USB credit key The credit key is a secure USB Flash drive i e thumb drive It cannot be written to or read by any program other than PCCU32 7 0 or later Credits can be added to the credit key via a phone call to Technical Support or through email Again these credits are used to run the various applications available in the G4 product line Credits can be transferred between the laptop and the G4 EX I
27. See note 2 C 10 9 1 Log Period Alarm Bits 0x00080000 524288 0x00040000 262144 0x00020000 131072 1 Tube Log Period Usage Notes Flow rate high limit Flow rate low limit Temperature high limit Page C 54 2104349 001 rev AB 0x00010000 65536 Temperature low limit 0x00008000 32768 Static pressure high limit 0x00004000 16384 Static pressure low limit 0x00002000 8192 Dp high limit 0 00001000 4096 Dp low limit 0x00000800 2048 Zero flow 0x00000400 1024 Back flow 0x00000200 512 Remote sense 0x00000100 256 contact out DO 0x00000080 128 temperature channel A D over range 0x00000040 64 static pressure channel A D over range 0x00000020 32 differential pressure channel A D over range 0x00000010 16 low charger 0x00000008 8 low lithium battery 0x00000004 4 AIU analyzer data not received 0x00000002 2 NX19 methane 1 gravity 0 method 0x00000001 1 calculation error 2 Log Period Record definition typedef struct unsigned long date Julian Date Time unsigned int sn float float float float float float dp ap tf ext vol btu unsigned int ftime unsigned int ptime unsigned char aflags 3 unsigned char vcode Sequence Number period avg DP period avg AP period avg TEMP period EXTENSION period VOLUME period ENERGY period FLOWTIME period TIME
28. REGISTER DESCRIPTION TYPE ACCESS NOTE 212 0 XMV 1 DP Calibration Flags Uint16 Read Only 11 212 1 XMV 1 SP Calibration Flags Uint16 Read Only 11 212 2 XMV 1 TF Calibration Flags Uint16 Read Only 11 212 3 XMV 2 DP Calibration Flags Uint16 Read Only 11 212 4 XMV 2 SP Calibration Flags Uint16 Read Only 11 212 5 XMV 2 TF Calibration Flags Uint16 Read Only 11 212 6 XMV 3 DP Calibration Flags Uint16 Read Only 11 212 7 XMV 3 SP Calibration Flags Uint16 Read Only 11 212 8 XMV 3 TF Calibration Flags Uint16 Read Only 11 212 X XMV DP Calibration Flags Uint16 Read Only 11 212 X 1 XMV SP Calibration Flags Uint16 Read Only 11 212 X 2 TF Calibration Flags Uint16 Read Only 11 214 0 XMV 1 Description String Read Write 214 1 XMV 2 Description String Read Write 214 2 XMV 3 Description String Read Write 214 3 XMV 4 Description String Read Write 214 4 XMV 5 Description String Read Write 214 5 XMV 6 Description String Read Write 214 6 XMV 7 Description String Read Write 214 7 XMV 8 Description String Read Write 214 X XMV X 1 Description String Read Write 215 0 XMV 1 Scroll Text Lock Byte Read Write 215 1 XMV 2 Scroll Text Lock Byte Read Write 215 2 XMV 3 Scroll Text Lock Byte Read Write 215 3 XMV 4 Scroll Text Lock Byte Read Write 215 4 XMV 5 Scroll Text Lock Byte Read Write 215 5 XMV 6 Scroll Text Lock Byte Read Write 215 6 XMV 7 Scroll Text Lock Byte Read Write 215 7 XMV 8 Scroll Text Lock Byte Read Writ
29. 3 Collect data from the unit Back up the configuration files following the instructions listed previously in this chapter Verify that the LL battery alarm is not being displayed on the G4 EX LCD to be non hazardous before removing any enclosure cover Remove power from the device or insure the area is known WARNING 4 5 6 7 8 9 For further information refer to the certification drawing indicated on the device s nametag and national and local electrical codes Gain access to the rear Termination board by loosening the countersunk hex socket locking set screw in the rear end cap Use a 1 16 hex wrench to perform this task Upon completion unscrew the end cap Disconnect the power connector J16 from the board mounted connector see Figure 4 5 Gain access to the LCD assembly by loosening the countersunk hex socket locking set screw in the front end cap Use a 1 16 hex wrench to perform this task When completed unscrew the end cap After the end cap has been removed gently pull the graphic overlay plate away from the snap on standoffs Using a small flat head screw driver remove the four screws that hold the LCD board to the G4 EX device Gently disconnect the LCD board from the G4 EX board J2 connector see Figure 4 6 Lift the board from the device 10 To reinstall the LCD board repeat steps 8 through 9 in reverse order Do not over tighten screws 11 Once the
30. rev AB Page C 85 19 The MODBUS request block mentioned in note 4 above should be configured to trigger off the corresponding register in array 216 The scroll lock registers in array 217 are written by the PCCU32 calibration screen to lock the pressure DP or SP being calibrated on the XMV The ABB 2010 series XMV allows the host to write 14 bytes of text to registers 1001 1007 The XMV interface application uses this feature to scroll user programmable displays on the MODBUS request block must be configured to write the corresponding registers from array 218 to the XMV Each ABB 2010 be configured with variable number of displays The displays are scrolled one at a time on the device display If number of displays are set to zero 0 three default displays DP SP TF are provided Each display can be configured with its own display interval This is the minimum amount of time the display is scrolled The ABB 2010 display consists of 2 lines 7 characters each Each line can be up to 7 characters of text such as PSIA or a register such as 11 7 0 The display format can be specified as Width Decimal To display a floating point register with three decimal places set the format to 7 3 To display two decimal places set the format to 7 2 To display integer registers set the format to 7 0 The XMV application supports a maximum of eight 25 XMVs C 13 Therms Master Applicat
31. 1 21 TF Status Flags Read Only see note 7 1 22 PI Status Flags Read Only see note 8 1 23 Ext Status Flags Read Only see note 9 C 11 2 1 Tube 16 Bit Integer Register Usage Notes 1 Primary Element Mask 1 Orifice Square Root 2 Calculation Method Mask 2 AGA 3 1985 4 AGA 3 1992 sum of these values 6 indicates 2 and 4 are valid choices 3 Super Compressibility Method Mask 1 NX19 with FIXED FT AND FP VALUES 2 NX19 AUTO 4 NX19 GRAVITY CO2 amp N2 8 NX19 CO2 amp N2 amp C1 2048 AGA8 Gross 4096 AGA8 Detail The sum of these values 6159 indicates all of the choices listed above are valid 4 Aux Contact Select Bits 1 trip contact on low charger 2 trip contact on low 4 trip contact on Acf high 8 trip contact on Ap low 16 trip contact on Ap high 32 trip contact on Remote Sense 64 auto re open 128 trip contact on volume set point 256 trip contact on tf low 512 trip contact on tf high 1024 trip contact on flow rate low 2048 trip contact on flow rate high 16384 reverse contact logic 2104349 001 rev AB Page 65 32768 gauge pressure device C 11 3 Tube 32 Bit Integer Registers Acf Status Flags 1 low limit exceeded 2 high limit exceeded 4 N A 8 zero flow 16 N A Ap Status Flags 1 low limit exceeded 2 high limit exceeded 4 over range 8 zero flow Tf Status Flags 1 low limit exceeded 2 high limit exceeded 4 over range PI Status Flags 1 low limit exceeded 2 high l
32. 5 1 5 1 2 Visual Alarm Codes 5 1 ZNS Sleep ree REED o ctetu 5 1 5 1 4 Solar ec rete eto ice eren ete ete de ie be debeo 5 4 5 1 5 Communication da Toot 5 1 5 2 Troubleshooting Visual Alarm Codes 5 2 5 2 1 Troubleshooting a Blank LCD Screen 044400 5 4 5 2 2 Troubleshooting a Low Lithium Alarm 11 2 00004000000 5 4 5 2 3 Troubleshooting a Analog to Digital Failure Alarm AD 5 5 5 2 4 Resistive Temperature Detector RTD Continuity 5 6 5 2 5 Current Source Resistive 5 6 5 2 6 RTD Impedance 5 7 5 3 Power Troubleshooting Lauras ec dade eee 5 8 DST 5 8 5 3 2 Power Supply eene nnns 5 8 5 3 3 Charger Circuit Test eco RR ede Hee pedi He Reg 5 9 5 3 4 Solar Panel Charging System Test 5 10 5 3 5 Charging System Unit 5 12 5 36 Auxiliary Equipment Isolation 5 12 527 Sleep MOde iin ere ee eerte eo bane neat 5 13 9 3 8
33. RXD RBUS TXD TBUS RTS TBUS RRTS COMM2 OPERATE COMM2 COMM2 SW GND VBATT COMM2 RS 232 RS 485 Jumpers for RS 485 Mode Only J11 Terminates RS 485 on COMM2 Figure 4 5 Termination Board 2104349 001 rev AB Page 4 9 6 Gain access to the G4 EX board by loosening the countersunk hex socket locking set screw in the front end cap Use 1 16 hex wrench to perform this task When completed unscrew the end cap 7 After the end cap has been removed gently pull the graphic overlay plate away from the snap on standoffs 8 Using small slot head screw driver remove the four screws that hold the LCD board to the G4 EX device 9 Gently disconnect the LCD board from the G4 EX board J2 connector see Figure 4 6 Lift the board from the device Potentiometer R1 Processor Card P CONTRAST SD CARD Lithium Battery Connector Primary Component Side Figure 4 6 64 EX Board 10 After the LCD board is disengaged gently remove the lithium battery connector J5 from the G4 EX board 11 Upon removal of the lithium battery connector gently snap the board out of the device Please note that the board is still connected to the device through the cables in the back 12 Unplug the sensor connector cable J6 and the ribbon cable J1 from the G4 EX board see Figure 4 7 Remove the board from the G4 EX device Page 4 10 2104349 001
34. rev AB SENSOR 000000 0000000 Sensor Connector Secondary Component Side Figure 4 7 G4 EX Board Secondary Component Side If the user has the 2104353 503 motherboard they will need to remove the processor card from the removed motherboard _ and place it into the new one This is accomplished by pulling FYI back the attachment brackets and gently unsnapping the processor card from its housing Once completed take the processor card and snap it into the replacement motherboard Continue to step 13 13 Take the replacement G4 EX board and attach the sensor cable and the ribbon cable to their corresponding connectors Please note that both the sensor cable and ribbon cable pin caution S 1 wire are red The red edge pin 1 of the cable should plug into the outer most edge of the connector pin 1 14 Take the lithium battery cable and attach the cable to its corresponding connector J5 15 Align the mounting holes on the G4 EX board with the standoffs Once aligned snap the board into place within the device 16 Once in place line up the LCD board mounting holes to the G4 EX board Gently connect the LCD board into the G4 EX board via the J2 connector 17 Take a small slot head screwdriver and attach the LCD board to the G4 EX board using the four mounting screws 4 9 Replacing the G4 EX Termination Board The Termination board is
35. 1 16 Bit Integer 2 16 Bit Unsigned Integer 3 32 Bit Integer 4 32 Bit Unsigned Integer 5 8 Bit Byte 6 24 Character String 7 4 Byte Register app array register 5 Each Holding Register array be made persistent through a warm start If the array persistence flag is set to 1 each write operation to a register in the array causes the array data to be written to a file This can be very slow It will also increase processor usage considerably If registers in an array are being updated frequently the array should not be made persistent 6 The number of registers in each Holding Register array is limited only by available memory 7 Upto 250 Holding Register arrays can be allocated however available memory will probably be exhausted first C 5 Reports Application Registers The format for the register lists is app array register The Reports application can be instantiated in any application slot REGISTER DESCRIPTION TYPE ACCESS NOTE 0 0 6 BYTE Registers BYTE 0 0 Baud Rate BYTE Read Write 0 1 Data Bits BYTE Read Write 0 2 Parity BYTE Read Write 0 3 Stop Bits BYTE Read Write 0 4 Interface BYTE Read Write 0 5 Port Type BYTE Read Write 0 6 Trigger Byte BYTE Read Write 1 0 1 Int16 Registers 16 Bit Int 1 0 Radio Key Delay 16 Bit Int Read Write 1 1 Radio Unkey Delay 16 Bit Int Read Write 2 0 0 Int32 Registers 32 Bit Int 2 0 Timeout 32 Bit Int Read Write 3 0 1 String Registers String 3 0 Report ID S
36. 2 Disconnect the RTD from the Termination board if not already done 3 Setthe DMM to 200 mVDC 4 Select the RTD test resistance value by selecting the resistor test connection from the FCU Diagnostic kit or make one using a resistor appropriate for the unit e Substitute the RTD probe wiring by connecting either 100 OHM or 123 OHM resistor across connector terminals 3 and 4 e Connect a jumper wire between terminals 2 and 3 e Connect a jumper wire between terminals 4 and 5 5 Clip the positive lead of the DMM to the upper side of the RTD test resistor 6 Clip the negative lead of the DMM to the lower side of the RTD test resistor 7 Supply power to the unit 8 Once running the measured value across the RTD test resistor should be either e 100 OHM Resistor Min of 100mv to a maximum of 125mv e 123 OHM Resistor Min of 123mv to a maximum of 155mv 9 The RTD measurement temperature on the G4 EX display should read either e 100 OHM Resistor 31 0 F to 33 0 F e 123 OHM Resistor 140 8 F to 142 8 F 10 If either of the measured values are outside of the range remove power and replace the RTD 11 Return power and perform steps 9 and 10 again If either of the measured values are outside of range remove power and replace the main Termination board 12 Return power and perform steps 9 and 10 If either of the measured values are outside of the range remove power and replace the EXIMV 5 2 6 RTD Impe
37. 7 Next remove the Comm 1 J19 Comm 2 J20 and power J16 connectors 8 Upon completion remove the ribbon cable from the J1 connector Figure 4 9 This will enable the user to remove the Termination board from the G4 EX device Figure 4 9 Termination Board Secondary Component Side 9 Take the replacement Termination board and attach the ribbon cable to the J1 connector Please note that the ribbon cable pin 1 wire is red The red caution S edge pin 1 of the cable should plug into the outer most edge of the connector pin 1 10 Depending on the configuration that the user selected from the factory attach either the USB cable J4 Ethernet cable J7 or MMI cable J21 to their respective connection 11 Next attach the Comm 1 J19 Comm 2 J20 and power J16 connections to their respective connectors 12 Upon completion take the four socket mounting screws and attach the Termination board in the G4 EX device 4 10 Replacing the Liquid Crystal Display LCD Board The LCD board is mounted inside of the G4 EX front end cap To access and remove the display board perform the following procedures 2104349 001 rev AB Page 4 13 Do not remove the lithium battery since it provides power caution S to the RAM It is recommended that historical flow data be downloaded before accessing and removing the LCD board to prevent the potential loss of stored data 4 10 1 Step by Step Instructions 1 2
38. G4 EX Termination 5 4 Figure 5 4 G4 EX Termination 5 9 Figure 5 5 6270 OEU Charger Regulator 5 11 Figure 5 6 Current Measurement Troubleshooting 2 5 13 Figure 5 7 Communication Troubleshooting Flow Chart sse 5 15 Figure 5 8 OEU Termination nennen 5 20 LIST OF TABLES Table 1 1 Family Genealogy esee eene nennen enne nennen enne nennen 1 1 Table 1 2 Typical G4 EX Display 1 5 Table 1 3 Default Annunciator Locations 20 00000 1 6 Table 1 4 G4 EX Status and Alarm Description 00 eee 1 7 Table 1 5 G4 EX Main Processor Board 1 11 Table 1 6 Explosion Proof EXIMV 22 1 19 Table 1 7 Standard RTD 1 21 Table 1 8 Standard 5 1 21 Table 3 1 Configurable Calculation 3 29 T ble 3 2 Analysis Data i ie eet tede re dd assent dd Reda 3 30 Table 3 3 Gas Orifice 3 31 Table 3 4 Alarm Limits rei t tt 3 32 Table 3 5 G4 EX Displayed
39. Reload Shutdown Flash Reset Device Download Flash start Flash upload tfCold tfData Download Windows CE Download ISaGRAF Runtime Configuration Files O Restore tfCold tfData Flash PackageR aw 2104159 007EX exfc T otalflow exe X m ISaGRAF Runtime Connection fSerial usB x conz Y Start Stop Close Help Ready Not Connected to Device Login user A 3 4 Select the ExFC radio button to designate that the G4 EX is the device that will receive the new Flash Next select the Update radio button A 3 2 Unit Operating Status Shut Down Instructions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Collect data from the unit Back up all of the configuration and data files While in PCCU32 click the Save and Restore Utility icon from the main window toolbar The Save and Restore Utility window will display Within the Save and Restore Utility click the Save Station Files button When the Save Station Files dialog box displays verify the default name and path for the files Click the OK button This will save the tfData drive files When finished saving the station files a new dialog box will offer the option to Restore the Station Files to the tfCold drive Select No Remove power externally from the unit A 3 3 Internal PCCU Connector Disassembly If Installed Remove power from the device or insure the area is known to WARNI
40. Upon completion unscrew the end cap 5 Disconnect the power connector J16 from the board mounted connector see Figure 4 5 J13 Jumper Jumper Pin1 to Pin 2 for DOUT Jumper Pin 2 to Pin 3 for AI2 Jumpers for RS 485 Mode Only Als DIs DOs If this is the last board on the bus or if it is the only board jumper J9 Pin 1 to Pin 2 AI DO2 DI PI DO AI2 There are a pair of jumper wires required for RS 485 only wire J19 Pin 9 to Pin 7 and Wire Pin 8 to Pin 6 on the terminating board J12 Jumper Jumper Pin1 to Pin 2 for AI 4 For all intermediate boards Jumper J9 Pin 2 Jumper Pin 2 to Pin 3 for DOUT2 92 62 to Pin 3 RETTET Terminates RS 485 on COMM1 ei COMMI RS 232 RS 485 EXPANSION S 2 5 o z RTD PROBE SE TXD TBUS S 18 RTS TBUS ETHERNET J2 S 22 RRIS comm S HE 1 X OPERATE COMM1 S E i COMM2 SW SECURITY S 2 G4 GND S HE VBATT USB CLIENT 2 RESET Q J21 3 IS 1 J16 PWR Note E d Pinouts are shown to the outside for clarity but all of the Phoenix connectors are wired G4 and attached to the inside BOARD 7 2103344 CTS RBUS
41. the user is disconnected from the device and asked to re login under the following circumstances e security was not enabled on the connected port before the security file is downloaded user is not defined in the new security file user has different access rights in the new security file Page 3 20 2104349 001 rev AB Login for Rhe Based Access Control x This device requires a secure login for Role Based Access Control please enter a user name and password to continue User name EC OK Password Cancel Save as default user for Role Based Access Control Figure 3 24 Login Dialog Box System Setup E X Setup Directory Paths Misc Communications Toolbar Buttons PCCU Connect Method 7 Corinect Serial port TCPAP ActiveSync NGC Bluetooth 7 Disconnect Connection parameters 1 3 mm ONGC Operate Level 1 2 Security Code Entry PCCU Com Port vj Monitor Terminal Initial Baud 2400 Vi Calibrate Collect Max Baud 3600 21 File Transfer wi Valve Control Stop Bits 2 z Remote Protocol Remote Communications Timeout 3000 A TFModbus Retry Limit v 32 Bit X Series Loader ONGC Startup Wizard V Laptop File Utilities IV Show Comm Stats on Status Bar Archive Utiities zl Auto Connect None C Entry C Collect Initial Bonnect
42. 108 0 N A 108 1 Current Stream 1 Time Read Write 108 2 Current Stream 2 Time Read Write 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 95 ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 108 3 Current Stream 3 Time Read Write 108 4 Current Stream 4 Time Read Write 108 5 Elapsed Stream 1 Time Read Write 108 6 Elapsed Stream 2 Time Read Write 108 7 Elapsed Stream 3 Time Read Write 108 8 Elapsed Stream 4 Time Read Write C 13 10 Therms Master Slave Data Trigger Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 109 0 Slave Data Send Trigger Read Write Note For succeeding s aves the register offset for each slave slavenum 1 Index Example The index register for the slave data trigger for slave 2 1 1 0 C 13 11 Therms Master Current Stream Float Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 110 0 N2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 1 CO2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 2 H2S Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 3 H20 Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 4 HE Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 5 C1 Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 6 C2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 7 C3 Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 8 NC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 9 IC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 10 NC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 11 IC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 12 NC6 Btu S
43. 2 Forward Clock Change Crossing an Hourly Boundary 4 6 4 6 3 Backward Clock Change Crossing an Hourly Boundary 4 6 4 7 Replacing the G4 EX Battery enne 4 6 4 7 1 Step by Step Instructions sssssssssssseeeemeeeen nens 4 7 4 8 Replacing the 4 8 4 8 1 Step by Step Instructions 00 00010 4 9 4 9 Replacing the G4 Termination Board 4 11 4 9 1 Step by Step Instructions 4 12 4 10 Replacing the Liquid Crystal Display LCD 4 13 4 10 1 Step by Step 4 14 4 11 Replacing the Lithium Battery ease 4 14 4 11 1 Step by Step 2 422 4 15 4 12 Replacing the Transducer 4 15 4 12 1 Step by Step 4 16 413 Calibration eee 4 18 4 13 1 Required Test 4 18 4 13 2 foe 4 19 4 13 3
44. 3 17 F t for NX19 Read Write 3 18 F p for Fov NX19 Read Write 3 19 Fixed Analysis BTU Read Write BTU SCF 3 20 Fixed Analysis Gravity Read Write 3 21 Fixed Analysis Nitrogen Read Write mole 96 3 22 Fixed Analysis Carbon Dioxide Read Write mole 96 3 23 Fixed Analysis Hydrogen Sulfide Read Write mole 96 3 24 Fixed Analysis Water Read Write mole 96 3 25 Fixed Analysis Helium Read Write mole 96 3 26 Fixed Analysis Methane Read Write mole 96 3 27 Fixed Analysis Ethane Read Write mole 96 3 28 Fixed Analysis Propane Read Write mole 96 3 29 Fixed Analysis Normal Butane Read Write mole 96 3 30 Fixed Analysis Iso Butane Read Write mole 96 3 31 Fixed Analysis Normal Pentane Read Write mole 96 3 32 Fixed Analysis Iso Pentane Read Write mole 96 3 33 Fixed Analysis Normal Hexane Read Write mole 96 3 34 Fixed Analysis Normal Heptane Read Write mole 96 Page C 50 2104349 001 rev AB ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 3 35 Fixed Analysis Normal Octane Read Write mole 3 36 Fixed Analysis Normal Nonane Read Write mole 3 37 Fixed Analysis Normal Decane Read Write mole 3 38 Fixed Analysis Oxygen Read Write mole 3 39 Fixed Analysis Carbon Monoxide Read Write mole 3 40 Fixed Analysis Hydrogen Read Write mole 3 41 Fixed Analysis Argon Read Write mole 3 42 Fixed 2 Content Read Write ppm 3 43 Fixe
45. 3 64 Live Analysis Carbon Monoxide Read Write mole Accumulator 3 65 Live Analysis Hydrogen Accumulator Read Write mole 96 3 66 Live Analysis Argon Accumulator Read Write mole 96 3 67 Log Site Code in Event Log 3 68 Valve Control Accumulated Volume Read Write MCF 3 69 Aux Contact 1 Volume Setpoint Read Write MCF 3 70 Aux Contact 2 Volume Setpoint Read Write MCF 3 71 current contract day accumulated energy Read Only MBTU 3 72 yesterdays contract day accumulated Read Only MBTU energy Page C 68 2104349 001 rev AB ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 3 73 Current Energy rate Read Only MBTU HR 3 74 Month Accum Volume Read Only MCF 3 75 Month Accum Volume Not Reset by Read Only MCF Reset Vol 3 76 Month Accum Energy Read Only MMBTU Month Accum Energy Not Reset by 3 77 Read Only MMBTU Reset Vol 3 78 Fixed AP value Read Write 3 79 Current SCF flow Read Only 3 80 Previous Month Accumulated Volume Read Only Previous Month Accumulated Volume 3 81 Read Only not affected by reset volume command 3 82 Previous Month Energy Read Only Previous Month Energy not affected by 3 83 reset volume command Read Only C 11 4 1 Tube Floating Point Register Notes 1 Static pressure values in PSIA PSIG depending on gauge pressure device selection See Tube Byte Register 0 55 2 Flow Rate Limits units depend on Flow rate volume scale flag
46. 43 Last Calc Reynolds Number Factor Fr Read Only 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 59 ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE AGA3 1985 Last Calc Pressure Base Factor Fpb 7 44 AGA3 1985 Read Only Last Calc Temperature Base Factor Ftb 7 45 AGA3 1985 Read Only Last Calc Flowing Temperature Factor RAR Ftf AGA3 1985 DES Last Calc Specific Gravity Factor Fg 7 47 AGA3 1985 Read Only Last Calc Orifice Thermal Expansion 542 Factor AGA3 1985 pead Only 7 49 Last Calcultate AGA3 1992 Zb Read Only 7 50 Last Calcultate 1992 71 Read Only 7 51 DP ACF Percent High for Day Read Only 7 52 DP ACF Percent Low for Day Read Only C 10 13 1 AGA 3 Float Register Usage Notes 1 These vary based on Vol Flow Rate unit selection See 0 42 C 10 14 AGA 3 String Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 8 0 Rate Unit String Note 1 8 1 Volume Unit String starting at MCF Note 1 8 2 Volume Unit String starting at SCF Note 1 C 10 14 1 AGA 3 String Register Usage Notes 1 These vary based on Vol Flow Rate unit selection See 0 42 C 10 15 AGA 3 Int32 Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 9 0 Tube Current Alarm Bits Read Only See note 1 1 Tube Alarm Bits 0x00080000 524288 0x00040000 262144 0x00020000 131072 0x00010000 65536 0x00008000 32768 0x00004000 16384 0x00002000 8192 0x00001000 4096 Flow rate
47. 8 Pre Purge Selection Read Write 115 9 Normal Status Read Write 115 10 Fault Status Read Write 115 11 Carrier Bottle Low 3072 Read Write 115 12 Calibration Bottle Low 3073 Read Write 115 13 Manually Update Response Factors Read Write 115 14 Auto Update Response Factors Selection Read Write 115 15 Disable Stream Switching Read Write 115 16 Transmitter Current Warning Read Write 115 17 Transmitter Current Fault 3078 Read Write 115 18 Transmitter Initial Warning Read Write 115 19 Transmitter Initial Fault Read Write 115 20 Stream 1 Current Warning Read Write 115 21 Stream 1 Current Warning Read Write 115 22 Stream 1 Current Warning Read Write 115 23 Stream 1 Current Warning Read Write 115 24 Stream 1 Current Fault 3085 Read Write 115 25 Stream 2 Current Fault 3086 Read Write 115 26 Stream 3 Current Fault 3087 Read Write 115 27 Stream 4 Current Fault 3088 Read Write C 14 2 Therms Status Float Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 116 0 Ground Ref 7200 Read Write 116 1 Power Battery Voltage 7201 Read Write 116 2 Mandrel Temp 7202 Read Write 116 3 Carrier Press 7203 Read Write 116 4 Aux Press 7204 Read Write 116 5 Al 6 Spare 7205 Read Write 116 6 Ambient Temp 7206 Read Write 116 7 Voltage Ref 7207 Read Write 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 99 C 14 3 Therms Stream SN Int32 Registers ARR
48. Begin a new flow file daily record Zero total volume accumulator and log the event with an accumulator value before zeroing out the accumulator Since the G4 EX volume calculations are made each vol TIP calc period any changes that are made during the period would effect the volume calculations such as changing the orifice plate size and be introduced into the calculations To avoid introduced errors it is recommended that the Reset Volume command be used This command forces the G4 EX to perform volume calculations for the elapsed time since a previous volume calculation was made A new partial period volume is added to the volume accumulator This is logged as an event before it is reset to zero 0 3 7 Start Up the G4 EX 3 7 1 Putting the G4 EX On Line To avoid calibration shift carefully follow these 3 7 1 1 1 2 3 4 instructions Step by Step Instructions Open both the bypass valves and close the vent to the atmosphere valve This stabilizes the pressure on both sides of the cell Begin to slowly open the high side orifice tap valve from the meter run Begin to slowly open the low side valve Once both the high and low sides are completely open close both bypass valves 3 7 2 Setting G4 EX Temperature Calculation The G4 EX temperature calculations can be set to the following conditions RTD Installed This uses the RTD temperature input and stores the RTD temperature unless the
49. Bias as a calibration method select Bias from the Calibration drop down menu To change click in the Bias parameter field The RTD Bias dialog box will display This allows the user to enter a new value The RTD s temperature will always be biased by this value however the RTD Installed box on the Setup tab must be checked for the RTD temperature and bias to be used If the bias needs to be negative enter a minus sign before the value The current temperature value under the Tf heading will increase or decrease to reflect the effect of the bias The bias does not effect the Fixed Temperature that is specified on the Setup tab The user can select Sp Dp etc in the drop down Calibration window to return to the selected Calibration screen 4 17 Changing the Orifice Plate Use one of the following procedures when changing the orifice plate 4 17 1 Taking Meter Run Out of Service Simplex Fitting 1 Take the meter run out of service 2 Replace the physical orifice plate 3 If the user wants to end the current log record and begin a new record with the new orifice size as stated in API21 1 they need to first move into Entry mode within PCCU32 Next select the preferred measurement tube and then click on the Commands tab Change the value for the Reset Log Period to Yes This forces a new record to be written based on the old orifice plate size Additionally if the user wants to simultaneously zero the accumulated volume they ca
50. Closed Plunger Arriving Blow Valve Plunger Arrived AfterFlow 8 Enab le OMINIDA IM O Disabled Manual 9 Polari Enabled ity Low Alarm High Alarm 10 Optio Disabled Enabled 11 Algor ithm Priority Round Robin C 9 6200EX IOS Application Registers Usage and notes are specific to the G4 EX IOS application Format for the register list is array register The application number depends on where the application C 9 1 IOS UINT32 Registers was instantiated Ary Reg Description Usage Note 0 10 DP Raw A D Counts Read Only 0 11 SP Raw A D Counts Read Only 0 12 TF Raw A D Counts Read Only 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 35 Ary Reg Description Usage Note 0 13 Ambient Temperature Raw A D Counts Read Only 0 14 Transducer Temperature Raw A D Counts Read Only 0 20 Transducer Model Number Read Only 0 21 Factory Date Read Only 0 100 Current Pulse Count Read Write 0 104 Previous Pulse Count Read Write 0 108 Total Pulse Count Read Write 0 120 Raw Pulse Counter Read Write C 9 2 5 UINT16 Registers Ary Reg Description Usage Note 1 0 DP Calibration Flag Read Write 1 1 AP Calibration Flag Read Write 1 3 AI 1 Calibration Flag Read Write 1 4 AI 2 Calibration F
51. Code DAYRECORD C 10 11 Tube Event Registers ARRAY DESCRIPTION USAGE 252 Event Log Record See note 1 C 10 11 1 Tube Event Register Usage Notes 1 Tube Event Log Record definition typedef struct unsigned long date Julian Date Time unsigned char flags Event Flags unsigned int sn Sequence Number unsigned int code Event Code unsigned char oldval 4 Previous Value unsigned char newval 4 Current Value unsigned char vcode Verification Code EVTRECORD C 10 12 AGA 3 Tube Registers The following register tables describe registers unique to AGA 3 measurement tubes ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 6 0 1985 Static Factor Select Bits Read Write See note 1 6 1 Misc Select Bits Read Write See note 2 6 2 Vol Flow Rate unit selection for volume Read Write See note 3 6 3 E Flow Rate unit selection for flow Read Write See note 4 6 4 Auto Fb Calc Read Write for AGA 3 1985 6 5 id Dp Check with pressure applied to Read Write C 10 12 1 AGA 3 Byte Register Usage Notes 1 AGA 3 1985 Static Factor Select Bits 0x01 1 l UseFpb 0 02 2 Use Fto 0 04 4 Use 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 57 0x08 8 Use Fb 0x10 16 Use Fws Faux well stream 0x20 32 Static Pressure Tap is Upstream 0x40 64 Supports switchable characteristics this bit not writable 2 AGA 3 Misc Se
52. Compressibility Method 0 19 with FIXED FT AND FP VALUES 1 NX19 AUTO 2 NX19 GRAVITY CO2 amp N2 3 NX19 CO2 amp N2 amp C1 11 AGA 8 Gross 12 AGA 8 Detail Characteristics Type This was used in Totalflow old database format This does not apply to X series DB2 format Live Analysis Configuration flags OZUSE FIXED ANALYSIS 1 USE LIVE ANALYSIS FROM AIU 2 USE LIVE ANALYSIS FROM OTHER PROTOCOL 16 USE FIXED ANALYSIS ON ERROR USE FIXED ANALYSIS ON ERROR may be added to selections 1 or 2 Flow rate Volume scale flags O MCF for volumes SCF HR for flow rates 1 MCF for volumes MCF DAY for flow rates 2 for volume MCF HR for flow rates 3 MMCF for volumes MMCF DAY for flow rates Aux Contact 1 amp 2 select bits low byte 1 trip contact on low charger 2 trip contact on Dp low 4 trip contact on Dp high 8 trip contact on Ap low 16 trip contact on Ap high 32 trip contact on remote sense 64 auto re open 128 trip contact on volume set point These registers can also be set from 16 bit integer registers 1 10 and 1 11 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 47 C 10 2 Tube 16 Bit Integer Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 10 Primary Element Mask Read Only indicates primary element type see note 1 14 Calc Method Mask Read Only indicates calculation methods supported see note 2 1 2 Calc Units Mask Read Only not used 1 3 Report Un
53. Config flags Read Write live analysis configuration see note 7 Page C 44 2104349 001 rev AB ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE Read Write live analysis configuration 0 17 BTU Config flags see note 7 0 48 Nitrogen Config flags Read Write live analysis configuration see note 7 0 19 Carbon Dioxide Config flags Read Write live analysis configuration see note 7 0 20 Hydrogen Sulfide Config flags Read Write live analysis configuration see note 7 0 21 Water Config flags Read Write live analysis configuration see note 7 0 22 Helium Config flags Read Write live analysis configuration see note 7 0 23 Methane Config flags Read Write live analysis configuration see note 7 0 24 Ethane Config flags Read Write live analysis configuration see note 7 0 25 Propane Config flags Read Write live analysis configuration see note 7 0 26 Normal Butane Config flags Read Write live analysis configuration see note 7 0 27 Iso Butane Config flags Read Write live analysis configuration see note 7 0 28 Normal Pentane Config flags Read Write live analysis configuration see note 7 0 29 Iso Pentane Config flags Read Write live analysis configuration see note 7 0 30 Normal Hexane Config flags Read Write live analysis configuration see note 7 0 31 Normal Heptane Config flags Read Write live analysis configuration see note 7 0 32
54. Descriptor String Read Write 12 25 2 Bit Operation 3 Descriptor String Read Write 12 25 X Bit Operation X Descriptor String Read Write 12 26 0 Compare Operation 1 Descriptor String Read Write 12 26 1 Compare Operation 2 Descriptor String Read Write 12 26 2 Compare Operation 3 Descriptor String Read Write 12 26 X Compare Operation X Descriptor String Read Write 12 27 0 Array Operation 1 Descriptor String Read Write 12 27 1 Array Operation 2 Descriptor String Read Write 12 27 2 Array Operation 3 Descriptor String Read Write 12 27 X Array Operation X Descriptor String Read Write 12 28 0 Select Operation 1 Descriptor String Read Write 12 28 1 Select Operation 2 Descriptor String Read Write 12 28 2 Select Operation 3 Descriptor String Read Write 12 28 X Select Operation X Descriptor String Read Write 12 29 0 Select Operation 1 Switch Register Read Write 13 29 1 Select Operation 2 Switch Register Read Write 13 29 2 Select Operation 3 Switch Register Read Write 13 29 X Select Operation X Switch Register Read Write 13 30 0 Select Operation 1 Input 1 Register Read Write 13 30 1 Select Operation 2 Input 1 Register Read Write 13 30 2 Select Operation 3 Input 1 Register Read Write 13 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 17 Register Description Type Access Note 30 X Sel
55. Enabled If the administrator name and or password are lost or forgotten it will be necessary to use TfLoader to delete TfCold and TfData and then cold start the device to gain access This will reset the device to the default factory configuration e Enable by Security Switch If the administrator name and or password are lost or forgotten RBAC may be disabled using the legacy security switch By setting the switch to the Off position a user may log in and reconfigure the security access This will not result in the loss of any data ETO PR 17 Operate View Window Help r p m 2 gs ex T Archi Ses o mm Ej CX 88 Om Ot Dee TOTALFLOW amp Communications Totalflow TCP Totalflow USB MMI Serial COMO TF Remote COMI Cei rer 5 2 amp 1 0 Interface amp Display Holding Registers amp Operations Disable Enable by Security Switch Figure 3 23 Totalflow TCP Setup Tab User Login When the user tries to connect to an enabled port on G4 device they first asked to login see Figure 3 24 The user can elect to save the user name password as default credentials to be used for subsequent logins To change or disable the default credentials select the menu item Operate gt Setup gt System Setup see Figure 3 25 After a security file is sent to a Totalflow G4 device
56. FYI s perform calculations based on the new orifice plate diameter for part of the period after the log was reset Page 4 30 2104349 001 rev AB 5 0 TROUBLESHOOTING 5 1 Overview To serve as an aid in troubleshooting the G4 EX the following chapter will provide guidelines for the various subsystems within the device The chapter contains troubleshooting flowchart see Figure 5 1 As the user follows the logic in this flowchart they will be directed to specific test instructions that are found in this chapter or may be directed to the Power Troubleshooting section or the Communication Troubleshooting flowchart see Figure 5 7 In addition to the flowchart this chapter contains step by step procedures for troubleshooting the G4 EX with or without an installed radio communication unit 5 1 1 Troubleshooting Support If troubleshooting instructions do not lead to a resolution and assistance is required the user can contact the Totalflow Service department USA 800 442 3097 International 001 918 338 4880 5 1 2 Visual Alarm Codes As noted in Chapter 1 the unit s LCD annunciator displays many different status indicators that are related to device operations This section contains information on those codes that reflect errors or provide information that is useful in troubleshooting the device Alarm codes indicate that an operational problem exists The user is informed of operational problems and operat
57. G4 EX Provides instructions on how to remove and Maintenance replace major modules Provides a description of the G4 EX front 5 Troubleshooting panel error messages and provides a troubleshooting chart on how to correct most problems Instructions for the installation of the I O Apdx A I O Daughter Card daughter card Apdx 4 20 Milliamp Provides in depth information regarding the di Transmitters powering of 4 20mA transmitter Apdx C ES Modbus Provides a listing of all valid Modbus registers Register Maps Totalflow takes pride in the ongoing support provided to customers When purchasing a product users receive documentation which should answer their questions however Totalflow Technical Support provides an 800 number as an added source of information If requiring assistance call USA 800 442 3097 International 001 918 338 4888 Before Calling Know the Totalflow model and serial number Serial numbers be found on a plate located on each unit xi Key Symbols FYI 2 e Be prepared to give the customer service representative a detailed description of the problem e Note any alarms or messages as they appear e Prepare a written description of the problem e Know the software version board and optional part numbers The following symbols are used frequently in the manual These are intended to catch the eye and draw attention to important information 1 a Intended to dra
58. LCD board is reinstalled apply power to the G4 EX step 5 and verify that the information displayed on the LCD is correct 12 Adjust the contrast potentiometer R1 for optimum display To adjust the display contrast use an extra small TIP screwdriver to turn the potentiometer R1 completely clockwise After completing this turn the screw back counter clockwise until the screen is readable 13 Replace the graphic overlay plate that was removed earlier 4 11 Replacing the Lithium Battery Do not remove power to the unit Loss of power to the unit caution e will initiate a cold start All data and configuration files will be lost Page 4 14 2104349 001 rev AB 4 11 1 Step by Step Instructions 1 Collect data from the unit 2 Back up the configuration files following the instructions listed previously in this chapter 3 Gain access to the G4 EX board by loosening the countersunk hex socket locking set screw in the front end cap Use a 1 16 hex wrench to perform this task When completed unscrew the end cap Remove power from the device or insure the area is known to be non hazardous before removing any enclosure cover For further WARNING information refer to the certification drawing indicated on the 5 device s nametag and national and local electrical codes 4 After the end cap has been removed gently pull the graphic overlay plate away from the snap on standoffs 5 Upon completion gently remov
59. Lead Operation 2 Description String Read Write 12 37 2 Lead Operation 3 Description String Read Write 12 37 X Lead Operation X Description String Read Write 12 38 0 Lead Operation 1 Interval Uint32 Read Write 15 38 1 Lead Operation 2 Interval Uint32 Read Write 15 38 2 Lead Operation 3 Interval Uint32 Read Write 15 38 X Lead Operation X Interval Uint32 Read Write 15 39 0 Lead Operation 1 Input Register Register Read Write 15 Page C 18 2104349 001 rev AB Register Description Type Access Note 39 1 Lead Operation 2 Input Register Register Read Write 15 39 2 Lead Operation 3 Input Register Register Read Write 15 39 X Lead Operation X Input Register Register Read Write 15 40 0 Lead Operation 1 Output Float Read Write 15 40 1 Lead Operation 2 Output Float Read Write 15 40 2 Lead Operation 3 Output Float Read Write 15 40 X Lead Operation X Output Float Read Write 15 41 0 Queue Operation 1 Descriptor String Read Write 12 41 1 Queue Operation 2 Descriptor String Read Write 12 41 2 Queue Operation 3 Descriptor String Read Write 12 41 X Queue Operation X Descriptor String Read Write 12 42 0 Queue Operation 1 Interval Uint32 Read Write 16 42 1 Queue Operation 2 Interval Uint32 Read Write 16 42 2 Queue Operation 3 Interval Uint32 Read Write 16 42 X Que
60. Log period Read Write seconds 21 Julian timestamp of most recent AIU Read Write see note 1 download 2 2 1 de Ne Read Write see note 1 2 3 Julian timestamp of prev day period Read Only see note 1 2 4 Total slip seconds since boot Read Only 2 5 Julian timestamp of last slip seconds Read Only 2 6 Thread loop time ms Read Only 2 7 Thread Min loop time ms Read Only 2 8 Thread Max loop time ms Read Only 1 C 10 3 1 Tube 32 Bit Integer Register Notes Julian time is number of seconds since midnight 1 1 1970 C 10 4 Tube Floating Point Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 3 0 Current AP cal checks Read Write psi see note 1 2104349 001 rev AB Page 49 ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 3 1 AP High Limit Read Write psi see note 1 3 2 AP Low Limit Read Write psi see note 1 3 3 Current Temp Deg F 3 4 Fixed Temp Deg F 3 5 Temp High Limit Deg F 3 6 Temp Low Limit Deg F 3 7 Flow Rate High Limit Read Write see note 2 3 8 Flow Rate Low Limit Read Write see note 2 3 9 Null Read Only 3 10 Null Read Only 3 11 Fixed F b AGA 3 1985 Read Write 3 12 Fixed Cd AGA 3 1992 Read Write 3 13 Zba Read Write 3 14 Oriface coef of expansion Read Write inches Deg F 3 15 Pipe coef of expansion Read Write inches Deg F 3 16 Barometric Pressure Read Write PSIA
61. NC10 Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 17 O2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 18 CO Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 19 H2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 20 AR Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 21 AIR Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 22 C6PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 23 BTU Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 24 GF Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 25 SGF Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 26 CPCV Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 27 VISCOSITY Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 28 DENSITY Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 29 FT Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 30 FP Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 31 C7PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 32 C8PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 33 22 Read Write 100 34 H2OBIAS Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 35 EOAXMAP Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 36 NEOC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 37 C3PRIME Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 38 C4PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 39 SATBTU Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 40 Z Btu Stream Component Read Write Page 108 2104349 001 rev AB ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 100 41 WOBBE Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 42 STREAM NUMBER Read Wri
62. RTD fails Additionally it then uses and logs the Fixed GF value Use Fixed TF This uses and stores the fixed temperature 2104349 001 rev AB Page 3 33 3 8 G4 EX Standard Displays 3 8 1 Program Display The single tube G4 EX comes from the factory with a set of default displays see Table 3 5 By default each display item remains on the display for five seconds The user has the ability to change this default to zero item not displayed or any value from 1 to 255 seconds The user is also able to change the engineering units and data format for display purposes Further instructions on programming the display system can be found in the PCCU32 help files All display items and item groups are user programmable and may be displayed by user defined parameters Table 3 5 G4 EX Displayed Items Description Format Note MM DD YY DATE TIME 24 hour clock HH MM SS YEST DP LO NN PERCENT Yesterday s percent DP low limit percent time below DP low setpoint YEST DP HI NN PERCENT Yesterday 5 high limit percent time below DP high set point FLOWRATE NNNNNN N SCF HR Current flow rate programmable SCF or MCF or MMCF Total accumulated volume programmable SCF ACCUM VOL NNNNNN NN MCF or MCE or MMCF BATTERY NN N VOLTS Battery voltage volts DIFF PRESS NNN N IN H2O Differential pressure inches 2 STATIC PRESSURE NNN N PSIA Static pressure static PSIA FLOW TEMP NN N DEG F Flowing
63. Read Write Block X 109 X Enable Alarm Flags of Alarm at Exception Byte Read Write Block X 110 X Alarm Input Register of Alarm at Exception Register Read Write Block X 111 X ae Threshold of Alarm at Exception Block Register Read Write 112 X Alarm Output Value of Alarm at Exception Register Read Write Block X 113 X Trigger Type of Alarm at Exception Block X Byte Read Write 114 X Trigger Reference of Alarm at Exception Register Read Write Block X 115 X Reset Alarm Logic of Alarm at Exception Byte Read Write Block X 116 X Filter Type of Alarm at Exception Block X Byte Read Write 117 X Filter Threshold of Alarm at Exception Block X Float Read Write 118 X Filter Units of Alarm at Exception Block X Byte Read Write 119 X Log Type of Alarm at Exception Block X Byte Read Write 120 0 Current Alarm Log Record Position Ulnt32 Read Write 120 1 Number of Alarm Logs Ulnt32 Read Write 120 2 CPU Load Hold Off Timer Ulnt32 Read 121 X m Description of Alarm at Exception Block String Read Write 122 X Current State of Alarm at Exception Block X Byte Read Only 123 X Alarm Severity of Alarm at Exception Block X Byte Read Write 124 0 Faults All RAMS Ulnt Read Only 124 1 Warnings All RAMS Ulnt Read Only 124 2 Faults This RAM App Ulnt Read Only 124 3 Warnings This RAM App Ulnt Read Only 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 9 REGISTER DESCRIPTION TYPE ACCESS NOT
64. Remote Shutdown DI R W 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 33 C 8 2 4 Boolean Registers x 3 x 8 Bits C 8 3 Safety Controller Register Notes Array size 10 x 0 size 1 Ary Reg Description Usage Note 3 0 Safety State Read 3 1 Reset Safety State Read 3 2 Safety Reset Button R W 3 3 Cal Hold Read 3 4 Power Low Alarm Read 3 5 Power High Alarm Read 3 6 Safety State Output Read 3 7 Remote Shutdown Value R W C 8 2 5 Floating Point Registers x 4 x Ary Reg Description Usage Note 4 0 Power Value R W 4 1 Power Low Setpoint R W 4 2 Power High Setpoint R W C 8 2 6 Ulong x 5 x 32 Bits Ary Reg Description Usage Note 5 0 9 Fail Timestamp 1 10 Read 5 10 Reset Timer Read 5 11 Reset Limit R W 5 12 Reset Timestamp Read 5 13 Well Open Delay Timer Read 5 14 Well Open Delay Limit R W 2 Array size varies with Al count x 0 size 1 3 Array size varies with DI count x 0 size 1 4 Array size varies with Well count x 0 size 1 5 Value will automatically be set by set Application number 30 x 6 Fail Reason None 0 Plunger Failed to Arrive 1 Power Low 2 DI x 3 Al x LOW 4 Page C 34 2104349 001 rev AB None Al x HIGH REMOTE DISABLE RESET 7 State FAIL Closing Valve Valve
65. SATBTU Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 40 Z Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 41 WOBBE Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 42 STREAM NUMBER Read Write 110 43 STREAM TIME Read Write C 13 12 Therms Master Slave Var Integer Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 111 0 Slave Steam ld Read Write Note For succeeding slaves the register offset for each slave slavenum 1 Index Example Index register for slave stream ID for slave 2 1 1 0 Stream Id Bits Bit 0 No Yes 0 1 Send stream 1 to this slave Bit 1 No Yes 0 1 Send stream 2 to this slave Bit 2 No Yes 0 1 Send stream 3 to this slave 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 97 Bit 3 No Yes 0 1 Send stream 4 to this slave C 13 13 Therms Master Stream Time String Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 112 0 Current Stream 1 Time String formatted Read 112 1 Current Stream 2Time String formatted Read 112 2 Current Stream 3 Time String formatted Read 112 3 Current Stream 4 Time String formatted Read C 13 14 Therms Master Slave Var Integer Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 113 0 Slave Data Send Status Read Write Note For succeeding slaves the register offset for each slave slavenum 1 Index Index register for slave data send status for slave 2 1 1 0 C 14 Therms Display Registers 114 0 Analyzer Alarm string b
66. TO COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT Figure 1 17 Optional Communication Enclosure 1 2 8 Solar Panel solar panel can be configured in the system to provide charging source for the battery DIV 1 installations would require that the solar panel and battery pack be Page 1 22 2104349 001 rev AB installed in a General Purpose or DIV 2 area Typically the solar panel would be connected through charger regulator that is located in the 6270 OEU Depending upon power charging requirements the unit may be configured for 5 watt 10 watt 20 watt or 30 watt solar panel The panel is designed to be mounted on 2 inch extension pipe Solar Panel Mounting Bracket Figure 1 18 Solar Panel Typical Installation 1 2 9 Lithium Battery The following information displays the technical information regarding the lithium battery housed within the G4 EX When the G4 EX is in storage it is recommended that the caution lithium battery be disabled unplugged from J5 connector to prevent power drainage Not doing so can cause the battery to lose power within six months 2104349 001 rev AB Page 1 23 Technical Data Nominal Capacity 2 mA to 2V ARAN Rated Voltage 3 6 V Wires AWG 24 Enclosure UL 94V2 Mounting Hook and Loop Fastner Operating Temperature Range 55 C to 85 C 67 F to 185 F 1 3 G4 EX A
67. Table 1 Index 4 Read Write 101 4 Components Table 1 Index 5 Read Write 101 5 Components Table 1 Index 6 Read Write 101 6 Components Table 1 Index 7 Read Write 101 7 Components Table 1 Index 8 Read Write 101 8 Components Table 1 Index 9 Read Write 101 9 Components Table 1 Index 10 Read Write 101 10 Components Table 1 Index 11 Read Write 101 11 Components Table 1 Index 12 Read Write 101 12 Components Table 1 Index 13 Read Write 101 13 Components Table 1 Index 14 Read Write 101 14 Components Table 1 Index 15 Read Write 101 15 Components Table 1 Index 16 Read Write 101 16 Components Table 2 Index 1 Read Write 101 17 Components Table 2 Index 2 Read Write 101 18 Components Table 2 Index 3 Read Write 101 19 Components Table 2 Index 4 Read Write 101 20 Components Table 2 Index 5 Read Write 101 21 Components Table 2 Index 6 Read Write 101 22 Components Table 2 Index 7 Read Write 101 23 Components Table 2 Index 8 Read Write 101 24 Components Table 2 Index 9 Read Write 101 25 Components Table 2 Index 10 Read Write 101 26 Components Table 2 Index 11 Read Write 101 27 Components Table 2 Index 12 Read Write 101 28 Components Table 2 Index 13 Read Write 101 29 Components Table 2 Index 14 Read Write 101 30 Components Table 2 Index 15 Read Write 101 31 Components Table 2 Index 16 Read Write 101 32 Analysis time Read Write 2104349 001 rev AB Page 87
68. Terminal Calibrate Collect File Transfer Valve Control Remote Protocol Remote Communications TFModbus 32 Bit X Series Loader NGC Startup Wizard Laptop File Utilities Archive Utilities vi O K O K K 6 S L1 IS S IS I Show Comm Stats on Status Bar Use Packet Protocol with X Series G3 lt lt lt Auto Connect None C Entry Collect Initial Connect Use default Role Based Access Control credentials Default Role Based Access Control Usemame Default Role Based Access Control Password Close Help Figure 3 5 System Setup Bluetooth Select a Bluetooth Device x ExFC DDUAN 0 b ce 1 26 66 ExFC Test 0 b ce 1 26 a6 Select Search Again Searching Bg Figure 3 6 Select a Bluetooth Device Dialog Box 8 The user can close out of the System Setup dialog box and press the Connect button PCCU32 will attempt to pair with the selected Bluetooth supported Totalflow device and establish communication with it 9 It should be noted that if the Bluetooth adapter plugged into the computer is one that is not supported the user will receive a different screen in the System Setup dialog box see Figure 3 7 At this point the user must use Page 3 6 2104349 001 rev AB their Windows software that came with the Bluetooth adapter and set up a pair connection to the preferred Totalflow Bluetooth
69. Utilities No Remote Protocol No Monitor No Save and Restore No Access Communication Ports No Access Flow Measurement Access si V m Configuration COMO Enable by Security Switch v USB1 Enable by Security Switch v COMI Disable z Bluetooth Enable by Security Switch COMZ Disable x Network Ports Enable New Open Save As Close Help Figure 3 18 Security Editor Dialog Box Read RBAC security files are supported by G4 and NGC devices The user is given the ability to select the device type that the security file is specifically intended for For each role it is possible to set the access level for each function that is listed The Entry View function sets the highest selectable level and has the options of None Basic Advanced or Expert Other functions have either a Yes No option or a No Access Read Only Read Write option If an existing role definition does not provide the proper capabilities a new one can be created by clicking the Browse button next to the Role drop down list This brings up the Roles dialog box see Figure 3 19 Ix Copy Rename Delete Default Cancel Figure 3 19 Roles Dialog Box 2104349 001 rev AB Page 3 17 Role Definition Default roles are automatically installed with PCCUS2 These default roles are as follows e Administrator e Expert e Advanced e Basic e File Admin Th
70. Write 1 2 0 Holding Array 3 Register 1 Programmable Read Write 1 2 1 Holding Array 3 Register 2 Programmable Read Write 1 2 2 Holding Array 3 Register 3 Programmable Read Write 1 2 X Holding Array 3 Register X Programmable Read Write 1 X 0 Holding Array X Register 1 Programmable Read Write 1 X 1 Holding Array X Register 2 Programmable Read Write 1 2104349 001 rev AB Page 11 REGISTER DESCRIPTION TYPE ACCESS NOTE X 2 Holding Array X Register 3 Programmable Read Write 1 X X Holding Array X Register X Programmable Read Write 1 100 0 Holding Array 1 Register 0 Description String Read Write 100 1 Holding Array 1 Register 1 Description String Read Write 100 X Holding Array 1 Register X Description String Read Write 101 0 Holding Array 2 Register 0 Description String Read Write 101 1 Holding Array 2 Register 1 Description String Read Write 101 X Holding Array 2 Register X Description String Read Write 10 0 Holding Array Register 0 Description String Read Write 10 X 1 Holding Array X Register 1 Description String Read Write 10 X X Holding Array X Register X Description String Read Write 251 0 Array 1 Descriptor Flag Byte Read Only 2 251 1 Array 2 Descriptor Flag Byte Read Only 2 251 2 Array 3 Descriptor Flag Byte Read Only 2 251 X Array X Des
71. XFC 6200EX 20200000009 POWER TERM ses ner A BOARD oe 2103344 XXX J11 Terminates RS 485 on COMM2 Secondary Component Side Primary Component Side Figure 1 7 G4 EX Termination Board 1 2 3 1 On Board I O G4 EX Termination board provides similar base I O as earlier XSeries models but with a reduced number due to enclosure restrictions This includes e 1 User Al e 1 User DO e 1 User DI Interface for I O daughter card 3 Al 1 AO 4 DI NAMUR rated and 4 DO 2104349 001 rev AB Page 1 13 1 2 3 2 Digital Input The G4 EX provides one digital pulse input as a means to monitor external equipment When connecting or disconnecting any wires to the G4 EX CAUTION boards the user should remove all power sources and insure that they are grounded properly The digital input reads an external contact This is primarily used as status input to read external equipment The contact must be closed to be considered The condition is recorded in the log period alarms and can trigger the action of the G4 EX s digital voltage output OFF is defined as an open contact Selectable de bounce can be enabled or disabled within PCCU32 See the PCCU32 help files for additional information DI Electrical Specifications e Open Circuit Voltage 5 VDC Internally pulled up to 5 VDC Nom e Short Circuit Leakage Current 395 uA typical e Input Capacitance 0 1 ufd typical e Maximum Allowable
72. an Alarm page The constants can be compared against variables in the device to generate an alarm 3 Number cry outs that were not acknowledged by the host 4 Number of alarms that have not been sent and or alarms that have been sent and not acknowledged by the host 5 Number of alarms in the last successful cry out Successful meaning that the cry out was acknowledged by the host 6 Resetthe number of alarms last reported counter Page C 10 2104349 001 rev AB 7 Primarily used when polling for alarms or Alarm by Exception Setting to 1 will cause the alarms to be cleared each time the device is polled for alarms 8 Alarm cry out is enabled by selecting the port on which alarms will be broadcast Selections are 0 Disabled 1 COM1 2 COM2 9 The time in minutes between cry outs 10 Set to 1 when it is time to cry out 11 Cry out checks the Data Carrier Detect DCD line to see if the communications channel is quiet before it initiates a cry out This keeps it from transmitting when the host is trying to communicate with the unit Some communication equipment may not support DCD and with nothing connected to the DCD terminal the DCD input might float to a true state keeping cry out from transmitting alarms Setting this register to 1 will instruct cry out to ignore DCD 12 If the user corrects the situation that is generating an alarm the user can then set this register to 1 to clear the alarm so that it will
73. and associated hardware 2 2 3 2 Materials Not Supplied e One 2 x 40 pipe e Standard 3 or 5 valve manifold e Stainless steel tubing Page 2 4 2104349 001 rev AB 2 2 3 3 Step by Step Instructions To install the G4 EX it is recommended that two people perform the installation One to hold the unit in position and FYI W the other to install and tighten the mounting brackets N The method of installation must be consistent with the user s company policy 1 Attach the pole mount bracket to the top of the 2 pipe with the U bolts Use the provided hex nuts flat washers and spring lock washers to tighten the pole mount bracket to the 2 pipe MA Position the mounting bracket high enough on the pipe to FYI 2 allow slope from the externally mounted manifold to the tap NT valves 2 Position the provided back clamp on the pole mount bracket and align the mounting holes between the two pieces 3 Upon alignment take the G4 EX and its attached transducer and set it within the recessed groove on the back clamp 4 Once the G4 EX and its transducer have been properly positioned attach the device to the brackets using the provided U bolt Use the hex nuts flat washers and spring lock washers to tighten the device to the mounting brackets see Figure 2 3 Back Clamp Pole Mount Bracket Figure 2 3 Type C Installation Configuration 2 24 Manifold Input Lines The follow
74. cable is required to connect the host computer to the meter s client connector see Figure 1 20 Connecting the PCCU cable to the meter causes an annunciator in the LCD to display an upper case letter L for local connect 244 The G4 EX meter must be ordered to include USB FYI z communication capability A change over kit may be purchased to adapt the G4 to serial capability r Client Host Figure 1 20 USB Local Communication Cable 2104349 001 rev AB Page 1 27 1 5 3 Bluetooth Connectivity With the latest iteration of the G4 EX device the user now has the option of performing local connecting using Bluetooth functionality This option can be accessed through PCCU32 1 5 4 Network Connectivity Dynamic IP with Router When the user elects to operate the G4 EX in network environment using an Ethernet is practical solution PCCU32 communication with the meter over an Ethernet connection TCP IP requires the use of a hub switch or router along with the appropriate cabling see Figure 1 22 Ethernet local communication in a remote area may also be utilized FYI E lt Ethernet option is only available by removing the end Q cap on the G4 EX device A j gt lt gt y 1 21 Ethernet Communication Cable Page 1 28 2104349 001 rev AB Computer 1 Computer 2 Hub Switch or Router A i A D TN NS Figure
75. checks are used by the WinCCU editor for calibration adjustment Enter a low mid low mid mid high and high value During normal operation of the G4 EX the display provides continuous DP readouts however during this procedure the G4 EX is placed in a temporary Hold mode 4 13 4 1 Step by Step Instructions 1 Enter the Calibration menu s Check screen This places the G4 EX on HOLD Select the preferred measurement tube from the tree view 2 Select DP from the Calibration drop down menu to the left of the Pressure Marker table 3 Click on Enter Pressure Check Value and select Continuous to update the current reading 4 Verify that the vent valve is closed see Figure 4 12 5 Open both the high and low equalizer valves 2104349 001 rev AB Page 4 21 6 Close both the downstream and upstream tap valves 7 Open the atmospheric vent valve 8 Enter a pressure marker for differential pressure 0 0 Click the OK button 9 Close the high side equalizer valve and verify that the low side is vented to atmosphere 10 Connect Calibration Standard to the calibration test port 11 Pressure to the next preferred verification pressure 12 When the current reading stabilizes enter the pressure value from the calibration source Click the OK button 13 Repeat steps 11 through 12 for each pressure check value 14 When all the differential pressure markers have been set determine if calibration is required If
76. from summer to FYI E winter Keep this in mind when installing the solar panel to make sure there are no obstructions during the entire year 7 Do not connect the other end of the cable to the 6270 OEU until the main battery pack has been connected and the user has been instructed to do so 8 Remove the hole plug from the OEU and install the cord connector 9 Remove the nut sealing ring and grommet from the cord connector Slide the nut sealing ring and grommet over the end of the cable and insert the cable through the body of the cord connector Leave enough of the cable on the outside of the unit to allow the cable to dip below the level of the access hole This provides a path for moisture to run away from the unit to the lowest point of the cable 10 On the inside of the enclosure allow enough cable to comfortably extend to the input terminals on the charger regulator see Figure 2 14 11 Slide the nut sealing ring and grommet to the cord connector on the side of the unit and tighten 12 Before making connections to the charger regulator trim the wire ends back uU 13 Verify that the main battery pack is connected 14 Loosen the securing screws on the charger regulator insert the wire and then retighten Connect the solar panel lead to the terminal and the wire to the terminal 15 Following the connection of the solar panel power cable secure the cable to the 2 extension and mounti
77. high limit Flow rate low limit Temperature high limit Temperature low limit Static pressure high limit Static pressure low limit Dp high limit Dp low limit Page C 60 2104349 001 rev AB 0x00000800 0x00000400 0x00000200 0x00000100 0x00000080 0x00000040 0x00000020 0x00000010 0x00000008 0x00000004 0x00000002 0x00000001 2048 Zero flow 1024 Back flow 512 Remote sense DI 256 contact out DO 128 temperature channel A D over range 64 static pressure channel A D over range 32 differential pressure channel A D over range 16 low charger 8 low lithium battery 4 AIU analyzer data not received 2 NX19 methane 1 gravity 0 method 1 calculation error C 11 AGA 7 Tube Application Register Tube measurement applications share several common data items The items listed under this heading are common to all tube measurement applications Usage and notes are specific to AGA 7 tube applications Format for register list is array register description Application number depends on the order of application instantiation C 11 1 Tube Byte Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 0 0 Contract Hour Read Write 0 23 0 1 Reset Volume Command Write 0 2 Reset Log Period Command Write 0 3 Calibration Hold Mode Read Write 0 4 AP ACF TF Over Range Flags Read Only 0 5 Tube Database Rev Read Only Read Write used
78. is pressed 15 Writing a register xx xx xxxx to the Locate Register will cause the display system to search all files displays for the requested register If it is located the display containing the register is locked on the display Used by the Calibrate screen to lock the point being calibrated 16 Allows the display to timeout and resume normal scrolling activity if the operator leaves the display locked for an extended period of time 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 7 17 Annunciator Values are determined by the App Type Enumerations See the System App documentation for an enumeration list 18 These are common enunciators that are used for represented values i e Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Open True Closed False Off On No 5 Veg C 3 Alarm System Application Registers Open Closed True False On Off Yes No Format for the register list is appff arrayft registertt The Alarm System application can be instantiated in any application slot Low order array numbers are used for the BTU application since the BTU application is derived from a Rams application Refer BTU Application register document REGISTER DESCRIPTION TYPE ACCESS NOTE 100 0 XX Alarm Records Structure Read Write 1A 101 0 XX Exception Blocks Structure Read Write 1B 102 0 XX Float Registers User settable value Structure Read Write 1C 1
79. less than one 1 hour the user should wait until the current hour has progressed far enough to make a change that does not cross an hour boundary 4 7 Replacing the G4 EX Battery Pack This chapter presents the procedures for removal and installation of the G4 EX battery pack that is located within the 6270 OEU To access the battery pack open the door see Figure 4 3 The battery pack is located in the upper portion of the chamber To extend the lift of the battery pack fully charge the TIP battery prior to installation A system using solar panels may not fully charge the battery Additionally a fast charge Page 4 6 2104349 001 rev AB which the solar panel cannot provide improves the life of the battery battery quick charge will remove buildup the battery much more effectively than trickle charge battery slowly drained by low light conditions on solar charged system or setting in storage will be less likely to recover than battery pack that was quickly discharged from short Store batteries cool environment for less drainage To G4 EX JI 6 Fin 2 To Solar Panel To Soler Panel To G4 EX J16 Fin 1 ae BATTERY TO COMMUN COMPARTMENT BRACKET MHS S p To battery COMMUNICATIONS Ge GP Comm Output Ve CATIONS EQUIPMENT
80. mounted inside of the G4 EX back end cap To access and remove the display board perform the following procedures 2104349 001 rev AB Page 4 11 Rear Cap Term Board Ribbon Cable Note The single red wire on the cable goes to Pin 1 of both connectors Stand off 4 places MMI Connector Figure 4 8 G4 EX Back End Exploded View 4 9 1 Step by Step Instructions 1 Collect data from the unit 2 Back up the configuration files following the instructions listed previously in this chapter 3 Verify that the LL battery alarm is not being displayed on the G4 EX LCD be non hazardous before removing any enclosure cover For further information refer to the certification drawing indicated on the device s nametag and national and local electrical codes Remove power from the device or insure the area is known to WARNING 4 Gain access to the rear Termination board by loosening the countersunk hex socket locking set screw in the rear end cap Use a 1 16 hex wrench to perform this task Upon completion unscrew the end cap 5 Upon unscrewing the end cap the user will see the Termination board see Figure 4 5 Using a 74 socket wrench unscrew the four socket mounting screws that hold the Termination board in place Page 4 12 2104349 001 rev AB 6 Depending on the configuration that the user selected from the factory remove either the USB cable J4 Ethernet cable J7 or MMI cable J21
81. no calibration is required return the manifold to service before exiting Calibration mode E E For additional information regarding Differential Pressure FYI 9 Calibration Checks see the PCCU32 help files 4 13 5 Calibrating Static Pressure SP A three or five point pressure method is used to calibrate the G4 EX static pressure cell These different pressures are applied to the cell from a known traceable source The resultant pressure values are entered into the G4 EX using 32 software When performing the following procedures wait for the G4 EX display to stabilize If the G4 EX is not in Calibration mode the display will not necessarily match applied cell pressures The G4 EX uses an absolute static pressure SP cell Absolute pressure measures the pressure referenced to a vacuum or sealed chamber This is different than a gauge cell which measures the pressure referenced to the atmosphere always measures the true pressure relative to a vacuum or sealed chamber As such when vented it measures true barometric pressure 9 Since the static pressure cell is an absolute device it N For other points of calibration add the reading of PSI and barometric pressure to arrive at PSIA Upon completion enter this reading 4 13 5 1 Absolute Versus Gauge It is recommended that the initial calibration point be at vented conditions When this is done the barometric reading in PSI should be used as the
82. not cry out at the next scheduled cry out time This command however causes the system to scan immediately for alarms and if there was another existing alarm condition it will cry out immediately instead of waiting for the next scheduled cry out time The amount of time left before the next scheduled cry out as specified by the cry out frequency 14 Used to append Rams alarms to be transmitted to an existing remote alarm record 15 Report Mode Poll 1 Cry Out 0 16 Acknowledge All Alarms any value sets this byte X the specific alarm log to get X the alarm number 0 255 X the alarm number 0 255 Returns 0 filled structure if already acknowledged X arbitrary value Returns all un acknowledged alarm logs C 4 Holding Registers Format for the register list is app array registter The Holding Registers application can be instantiated in any application slot REGISTER DESCRIPTION TYPE ACCESS NOTE 0 0 Holding Array 1 Register 1 Programmable Read Write 1 0 1 Holding Array 1 Register 2 Programmable Read Write 1 0 2 Holding Array 1 Register 3 Programmable Read Write 1 0 X Holding Array 1 Register X Programmable Read Write 1 1 0 Holding Array 2 Register 1 Programmable Read Write 1 1 1 Holding Array 2 Register 2 Programmable Read Write 1 1 2 Holding Array 2 Register 3 Programmable Read Write 1 1 X Holding Array 2 Register X Programmable Read
83. or 0006 mA These numbers translate to about 003 bbl 3 thousandths of a barrel or about one half fluid ounce B 3 Example 2 If the 4 20 mA transmitter cannot drive full range 20 mA through the 250 OHM resistor the user may want to reduce the value of the resistor For this example the following will drop it to 125 OHM or half A 4 20 mA current would now be converted to a 5 2 5 VDC voltage range Again during field calibration the user would have the 4 mA current represent 10bbls per hour and the 20 mA signal represent 100bbls per hour The voltage conversion using the 125 OHM resistor would be as follows 5 VDC 10bbls hour 2 5 VDC 1000bbls hour The A Ds full range is still 0 5 VDC however the user is only using about half of its range capability Just like the resistor value the ability to resolve barrels of fluid per hour has been cut in half The overall accuracy remains unchanged but the user can only resolve about 0 006bbls 6 thousandths of a barrel or about one fluid ounce B 4 Conclusion If the 4 20 mA transmitter that is being used cannot drive a full 20 mA through the 250 OHM resistor the user can reduce the resistive value However as the resistive value is reduced resolution not overall accuracy will be reduced proportionally If the user drops the resistive value by half 250 OHMs to 125 OHMs the resolution will be reduced by half To reduce the resistive value of an onboard resistor the user
84. period ALARMS I Verification Code LOGRECORD C 10 10 Tube Daily Registers ARRAY DESCRIPTION USAGE 220 Daily Static Pressure Floating Point PSIA 221 Daily Diff Pressure Floating Point Inches 2 222 Daily Temperature Floating Point Deg F 224 Daily Extension Floating Point 225 Daily Volume Floating Point MCF 226 Daily Heating Value Floating Point MBTU 227 Daily Flow time Unsigned Long seconds 228 Daily Total time Unsigned Long seconds 229 Daily Alarm bits 32 bits See note 1 250 Log Period Archive Record 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 55 ARRAY DESCRIPTION USAGE 251 Daily Record See note 2 252 Event Log C 10 10 1 Tube Daily Register Usage Notes 1 Daily Alarm Bits 0x00080000 524288 0x00040000 262144 0x00020000 131072 0x00010000 65536 0x00008000 32768 0x00004000 16384 0x00002000 0x00001000 0x00000800 0x00000400 0x00000200 0x00000100 0x00000080 0x00000040 0x00000020 0x00000010 0x00000008 0x00000004 0x00000002 0x00000001 1024 Back flow 512 Remote sense DI 256 contact out DO 128 temperature channel A D over range 64 static pressure channel A D over range 32 differential pressure channel A D over range 16 low charger 8 low lithium battery Flow rate high limit Flow rate low limit Temperature high limit Temperature low limit Static pressure high limit Static press
85. the RS 232 PCCU cable with the round military connector one end and serial port connector on the other The second method involves the local connection being made using a USB cable The third method utilizes the standard onboard Bluetooth wireless connection These methods are discussed below 1 5 Local G4 EX Connectors 1 5 1 RS 232 Serial PCCU Cable Round Military Cable be non hazardous before removing any enclosure cover For further information refer to the certification drawing indicated on the device s nametag and National and Local Electrical Codes Remove power from device or insure the area is known to WARNING The local connection serial military connector requires an RS 232 serial port on the host computer generally a laptop A PCCU cable is required to connect the host computer to the meter s round military connector see Figure 1 19 Connecting the PCCU cable to the meter will cause the annunciator in the LCD to display an upper case letter L for local connect The G4 EX meter must be ordered to include serial FYI 5 communication capability change over kit may be gt purchased to adapt the G4 to USB capability Page 1 26 2104349 001 rev AB Military Em Pin Connector R amp 232 Figure 1 19 RS 232 Local Communication Cable 1 5 2 PCCU32 USB Connection The local USB connection requires use of a USB cable connected to the host computer generally a laptop A USB PCCU
86. the same ID that the user entered earlier within the meter setup 6 7 Upon finishing click the Close button System Setup Setup Directory Paths Misc Communications C Serial port PCCU Connect Method TEPAP Connection parameters Network ID or IP 10 127 174 219 C ActiveSync NGC C Bluetooth Level 1 2 Security Code 0000 IV Show Comm Stats on Status Bar M Toolbar Buttons M Connect MI Disconnect NGC Operate M Entry Monitor Terminal Calibrate Collect File Transfer Valve Control Remote Protocol Remote Communications Ivi TFModbus iv 32 Bit X Series Loader CINGC Startup Wizard M Laptop File Utilities Ivi Archive Utilities K K SS KK K K 3j Auto Connect None C Entry Collect C Initial Connect Use default Role Based Access Control credentials Default Role Based amp ccess Control Usemame Detault Role Based Access Control Password 8 Exit PCCU32 and the local connection 9 With the Ethernet cabling installed connecting to the meter is no different than when using the PCCU cable or military connector Click on the Connect to Totalflow icon in the PCCU32 toolbar To connect and move directly to Entry mode click on Entry instead of the Connect icon 0 Close Help Figure 3 10 System Setup Window If the user has several meters on their network they
87. time the software will actually read the device default values that are programmed at the factory These preset values are based on the type of product that the user has ordered and programmed for the most widely used configuration Depending on the programming device that is being used the following are minimum required entries Specific information required to complete each step is discussed in the PCCU32 help files Date Time The G4 EX date and time should be set before other tube parameters are entered This insures that events are properly dated and time tagged Attention should be given that the date and time are set correctly and should agree with the collection equipment PCCU32 or WinCCU can be used to update the date and time of the device Page 3 12 2104349 001 rev AB Description Format Note Date MM DD YY Must enter 2 digits each Time HH MM SS 24 hour clock 3 4 2 Station ID The station identifier code should uniquely identify one G4 EX from that of any others Description Format Note Station ID XXXXXXXXXX 10 digit alphanumeric 3 4 3 Location The location field can hold up to 24 alphanumeric characters to describe its location An example would be the lease name county name or road number Description Format Note Station ID XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 24 digit alphanumeric There are additional fields stored in WinCCU for uniquely Ej i
88. to ensure they have entered that code in PCCU32 s System Setup Screen see Figure 3 1 However if the meter has been cold started the security code will be reset to factory default and historical data will be lost System Setup NCC X Setup Directory Paths Mise Communications Toolbar Buttons PCCU Connect Method vi Connect Serial port C TEPAP C ActiveSync NGC Bluetooth Disconnect Connection parameters 115812 Secuty Code p m perate PCEU Com Port Monitor 2 Terminal Initial Baud 2400 7 Calibrate v Collect Max Baud 9600 vi File Transfer Stop Bits P gf MI Valve Control 2 X MI Remote Protocol Timeout ms 3000 Fen Retry Limit lp I 32 Bit X Series Loader ONGC Startup Wizard T NS v Laptop File Utiliti Show Comm Stats on Status Bar 2 pes 3 Auto Connect f None C Entry C Collect Initial Connect Use default Role Based Access Control credentials Default Role Based Access Control Username Default Role Based Access Control Password Close Help Figure 3 1 System Setup Screen Page 3 2 2104349 001 rev AB 4 The Local Connect screen displays six buttons From the button selections click Entry Setup to move to the Station Setup screen Links within the PCCU32 tree view will move the user to screens for setup and daily operations 3 3 2 Connecting To Local USB Port If the use
89. two people Aly perform the installation One to hold the unit in position and FYI 2 the other to install and tighten the mounting brackets N The method of installation must be consistent with the user s company policy 1 Attach the pole mount bracket to the top of the 2 pipe with the U bolts Use the provided hex nuts flat washers and spring lock washers to tighten the pole mount bracket to the 2 pipe 2104349 001 rev AB Page 2 3 Position the mounting bracket high enough on the pipe to FYI 5 allow slope from the externally mounted manifold to the tap valves 2 Remove the lower two hex screws hex nuts flat washers and spring lock washers from the transducer s attached mounting brackets 3 With the associated hardware removed align the transducer s bottom mounting holes with those on the pole mount bracket 4 Upon alignment replace the hex screws hex nuts flat washers and spring lock washers through their respective mounting holes on the mounting brackets and into the pole mount bracket Upon completion tighten see Figure 2 2 PG gt x 1 Figure 2 2 Installation Configuration sas It should be noted that if this is the type of installation FYI kj configuration that the user has received from the factory Q there may be additional parts within the provided mounting kit assembly that are not used 2 2 3 Type C 2 2 3 1 Materials Supplied e G4 EX mounting kit assembly
90. usage Fuse Replacement Fuses used on G4 EX model electronic boards are surface mount and field repair should not be attempted Most fuses automatically reset themselves but if a known problem exists the board should be sent in for repair or replacement 1 0 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1 1 Overview WARNING XFC 6200 6201EX G4 EX is a next generation solution for the pre existing generation 3 XFC6200 6201EX The G4 EX now incorporates the same 32 bit technology currently used by the G4 XSeries products By using 32 bit technology Windows CE OS and memory capabilities the G4 EX is a versatile product offering for production automation and DIV 1 custody measurement projects Along with this new functionality the hardware capabilities will also be expanded to meet the demands of targeted market applications in production automation and natural gas distribution These hardware features will be utilized to enhance the system integration capabilities with existing Totalflow products as well as existing third party control SCADA systems Additionally the use of Bluetooth technology for local MMI connectivity is poised to enhance the product for multi tube and Class 1 DIV 1 application where this type of user interface is an advantage The G4 EX offers an explosion proof product for differential orifice or linear pulse metering and automation systems The G4 EX is an accurate and reliable gas flow computer with the ca
91. 0 2101691 050 10 00 2101691 095 Table 1 8 Standard Thermowells Thread Diameter U Length Base Part Number 2 through 10 1622305 1 2 through 10 1622302 2104349 001 rev AB Page 1 21 Thread Diameter U Length Base Part Number 3 4 2 through 10 1622300 1 2 7 6270 Optional Equipment Unit OEU The G4 EX unit is designed to be located in DIV 1 Hazardous areas therefore many features and requirements of the unit are housed separate enclosure that is located in DIV 2 or General Purpose areas Space is provided inside the enclosure to house variety of remote communication devices transceiver cellular phone battery changing source and additional I O see Figure 1 17 The battery compartment shelf houses various optional battery packs that are available for the OEU from eight 8 ampere hours up to 26 ampere hours Installation of the battery is discussed later in the manual The 6270 OEU system with battery and solar panel is rated WARNING for Class I Division 2 locations only or can be installed in non hazardous locations To G4 EX Fin2 DOOR Solar Panel To Soler Panel To G4 EX Fin 1 ae c zz eim BATTERY COMPARTMENT gt E 20 To Battery E 2 71 O OP GP Comm Output i
92. 0 Using the supplied Wiring Interconnect drawings wire the RTD probe at the wiring block see Figure 2 9 2104349 001 rev AB Page 2 9 11 Following local codes run the RTD wiring to the G4 EX unit CUSTOMER CONNECTION WHT CUSTOMER CONNECTION WHT RE WHT W CUSTOMER i CONNECTION RED CUSTOMER CONNECTION WIRING i INTERCONNECT VIEW LOOKING IN H AD Figure 2 9 RTD Probe Wiring 12 Inside of the G4 EX enclosure disconnect power from the Termination board Remove the connection from J16 13 Remove the connector plug from the RTD connection J8 to begin field wiring 14 Using the supplied wiring instructions make the field connections to the connector plug Re insert into the J8 board connector 15 Restore power to the unit 2 2 7 6270 Optional Equipment Unit OEU Installation If the 6270 OEU enclosure is used it may be configured to include other options including but not limited to a battery pack to provide power to the G4 EX communication equipment and solar panel charger Following local codes for installation this unit would normally be located in a DIV 2 or General Purpose area The unit may be mounted on a 2 pipe or mounted on flat surface such as a wall The battery and solar panel are packed and shipped separately from the 6270 OEU Before installation inspect all power cables wh
93. 0 VDC of the aforementioned 10 to 30 VDC to operate the transmitter There is a good chance that 5 VDC will not be enough to properly operate the transmitter at its maximum output of 20 mA Example Voltage dropped across the load resistor at the maximum loop current E IxR 20 mA x 250 OHM 5 VDC The figure below shows a 4 20 mA loop being powered by a 12 VDC source This could be a solar panel with battery backup If the battery has been discharged to 12 volts then only 7 volts would remain to operate the transmitter This may not be enough to fully operate the transmitter at higher loop currents Assume 20ma 4 20ma VCC gt Transmitter Al 250Q 5VDC 7VDC 12VDC remaining to source operate Transmitter CAUTION The following discussion does not pertain to 1 5 VDC transmitters Totalflow flow meters employ 250 OHM resistor to convert the 4 20 mA transmitter current loop to a 1 5 VDC signal In some meters this conversion is made by attaching a 250 OHM resistor across the 4 20 mA input pins see the next figure schematic A Some meters use a small three pin jumper to select an onboard 250 OHM resistor see the next figure schematic B Still other meters employ an electronic switch to select the 250 OHM resistor see the next figure schematic C In the figures VCC represents the voltage source used to power the transmitter In many instances VCC could be tied to the meters VBAT With a
94. 0000100 256 contact out DO 0x00000080 128 temperature channel A D over range 0x00000040 64 static pressure channel A D over range 0x00000020 32 differential pressure channel A D over range Page C 72 2104349 001 rev AB 1 0x00000010 16 0x00000008 0x00000004 0x00000002 0x00000001 Daily Record definition typedef struct unsigned long date unsigned int sn unsigned int event unsigned int firstlog unsigned int lastlog unsigned char c hr float ext float vol float btu unsigned long ftime unsigned long btime unsigned long ptime unsigned char aflags 3 float ap float minap float maxap float aplpct float aphpct float Acf float minAcf float maxAcf float Acflpct float Acfhpct float tf float mintf float maxtf float tflpct float tfhpct unsigned char vcode low charger 8 low lithium battery 4 AIU analyzer data not received 2 NX19 methane 1 gravity 0 method 1 calculation error Julian Date Time Sequence Number Last Event Log Seq Num First Log Period Seq Num Last Log Period Seq Num Contract Hour Daily Extension Daily Volume Daily Energy Daily Flowtime Daily Back flowtime 0 for AGA 7 period TIME period ALARMS Daily Avg AP Daily Minimum AP Daily Maximum AP Daily AP LO per cent Daily AP HI per cent Dail
95. 03 0 Report Counter Byte Read Only 3 103 1 Current Number of Alarms Byte Read Only 4 103 2 Alarms Last Reported Byte Read Only 5 103 3 Alarm Reset Byte Write Only 6 103 4 Auto Clear Byte Read Write 7 103 5 Cry Out Enable Byte Read Write 8 103 6 Cry Out Frequency Byte Read Write 9 103 7 Cry Out Now Byte Read Only 10 103 8 Ignore DCD Byte Read Write 11 103 9 Clear Cry Out Timer Byte Write Only 103 10 Clear Logged Alarms Byte Write Only 12 103 11 Cry Out Timer Byte Read Write 13 103 12 Log Mode Byte Read Write 103 13 Hold Frequency In Minutes Byte Read Write 103 14 Number of Exception Blocks Byte Read Write 103 15 Alarms Enabled Byte Read Write 103 16 Change Alarms Exception Register Apps Byte Read Write 103 17 Insert a New Exception Block Byte Read Write 103 18 Delete an Exception Block Byte Read Write 103 19 Repote Mode Byte Read Write 15 103 20 Aknowledge all Byte Read Write 16 Page C 8 2104349 001 rev AB REGISTER DESCRIPTION TYPE ACCESS NOTE 103 21 Number Logged Alarms Not acknowledge Byte Read 103 22 CPU Load Time Trigger Byte Read 103 23 Last Alarm Code Byte Read 104 0 Get Alarms Report Structure Read Only 1 105 0 Get All Alarm Logs Structure Read Only 106 X Get Specific Alarm Log Structure Read Only 17 107 X Alarm Type of Alarm at Exception Block X Byte Read Only 108 X User s Alarm Code of Alarm at Exception Ulnt
96. 05 15 NC9 Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 16 NC10 Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 17 02 Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 18 CO Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 19 H2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 20 AR Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 21 AIR Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 22 C6PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 23 BTU Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 24 GF Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 25 SGF Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 26 CPCV Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 27 VISCOSITY Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 28 DENSITY Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 29 FT Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 30 FP Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 31 C7PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 32 C8PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 33 H2OCONTENT Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 34 H2OBIAS Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 35 EOAXMAP Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 36 NEOC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 93 ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 105 37 C3PRIME Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 38 CAPLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 39 SATBTU Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 40 Z Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 41 WOBBE Btu
97. 1 22 Ethernet Connectivity Diagram 2104349 001 rev AB Page 1 29 2 0 INSTALLATION This chapter provides the user with the information for installation and setup of the G4 EX By the time the user has finished the chapter they will have the G4 EX unpacked installed field wired and ready for operation For safe and trouble free installation follow all instructions and advisories Read through this chapter before beginning the installation This will give the user the ability to plan their specific xj installation Additionally before beginning refer to the 9 wiring diagrams delivered with the G4 EX The user store these drawing under the Drawing tab in the back of the manual 2 1 Unpacking and Inspection 2 1 1 Unpacking The G4 EX RTD are shipped in specially designed shipping carton which contains the unit mounting brackets parts list and wiring and interconnect diagrams The solar panel and the battery pack with applicable hardware are shipped separate carton Carefully remove the items from each carton 2 1 2 Inspection e Inspect the shipping carton for damage If the shipping carton is damaged keep it until the contents have been inspected for damage e Inspect the unit s exterior for dents chipped paint etc e Inspect the LCD window for breakage e Visually inspect the electronic boards cables and EXIMV for damage 2 1 3 Damaged Components If any components have been da
98. 103 25 SGF Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 26 CPCV Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 27 VISCOSITY Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 28 DENSITY Btu Stream Component Read Write Page C 90 2104349 001 rev AB ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 103 29 FT Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 30 FP Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 31 C7PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 32 C8PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 33 H2OCONTENT Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 34 H2OBIAS Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 35 EOAXMAP Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 36 NEOC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 37 C3PRIME Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 38 C4PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 39 SATBTU Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 40 Z Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 41 WOBBE Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 42 STREAM NUMBER Read Write 103 43 STREAM TIME Read Write C 13 5 Therms Master Stream 2 Float Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 104 0 N2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 1 CO2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 2 H2S Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 3 H20 Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 4 HE Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 5 C1 Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 6 C2 Btu Strea
99. 12 5 Open both the high and low equalizer valves 6 Close both the downstream and upstream tap valves 7 Open the atmospheric vent valve 8 Click on the Low Cal Point button Verify the current reading is continuously updated 9 When the current reading stabilizes click the OK button otherwise enter a different value and click the OK button 10 When the previous reading was accepted notice that the 100 Cal Point button becomes activated To select press Enter 11 Connect the Calibration Standard to the calibration test port 12 Close the high side equalizer valve and verify that the low side is vented to atmosphere 13 Pressure to 100 of the transducer range 100 of target value Page 4 24 2104349 001 rev AB 14 When the current reading stabilizes accept the target value already showing in the window otherwise enter the pressure value from the calibration source Click the OK button 15 Again notice that the next Cal Point is activated To select press Enter 16 Pressure the transducer to the next target value as shown in the Calibration window 17 When the current reading stabilizes accept the target value already showing in the window otherwise enter the pressure value from calibration source Click the OK button 18 Repeat steps 15 through 17 until all calibration ports have been entered 19 Upon completion of the DP calibration new calibration markers should be set 20
100. 17 8V 5 3 4 Solar Panel Charging System Test If the system setup includes a solar panel charger connected to the 6270 Optional Equipment Unit OEU and is not supplying the required voltage and current to the G4 EX unit the user may need to test the solar panel The following instructions contain the steps required to test the solar panel 5 3 4 1 Required Equipment Digital MultiMeter with 0 20 VDC range e Required resistors for testing specific panels as listed in Table 5 2 In continuous low sunlight conditions the unit may not gt supply the required voltage The solar panel should be 9 positioned so that it receives the most sunlight Do not place a shaded area 5 3 4 2 Step by Step Instructions 1 Measure the solar panel voltage at the charger regulator Use a DMM connecting the and leads to the and solar panel wires Loaded voltage should be greater than or equal to the specification listed in Table 5 2 If the solar panel is not above the minimum replace the solar panel and continue to step 2 2 Check the solar panel angle and direction In the northern hemisphere the panel should face due south In southern hemispheres the panel should face due north Page 5 10 2104349 001 rev AB 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Check the solar panel for any physical damage or obstructions to sunlight Sunlight obstructions prevent the solar panel from receiving enough sunlight to cha
101. 19 AUTO 2 NX19 GRAVITY CO2 amp N2 3 NX19 CO2 amp N2 amp C1 11 AGA 8 Gross 12 AGA 8 Detail 2 Characteristics Type This was used in Totalflow old database format This does not apply to X series DB2 format 3 Live Analysis Configuration flags O USE FIXED ANALYSIS 1 USE LIVE ANALYSIS FROM AIU 2 USE LIVE ANALYSIS FROM OTHER PROTOCOL 16 USE FIXED ANALYSIS ON ERROR USE FIXED ANALYSIS ON ERROR may be added to selections 1 or 2 4 Flow rate Volume scale flags bit encoded flags 5 Bits 0 1 rates times 6 0 1 day 2 N A 3 7 Bits 2 4 corrected volume rate quantity units 8 0 scf 4 8 cscf 12 mscf 9 16 dmscf 20 cmscf 28 mmscf 10 Bits 5 7 uncorrected volume rate quantity units 11 0 acf 32 dacf 64 cacf 96 macf 12 128 dmacf 160 cmacf 224 mmacf 13 5 Aux Contact 1 amp 2 select bits low byte 1 trip contact on low charger 2 trip contact on ACF low 4 trip contact on ACF high 8 trip contact on Ap low 16 trip contact on Ap high 32 trip contact on remote sense 64 auto re open 128 trip contact on volume set point These registers can also be set from 16 bit integer registers 1 10 and 1 11 C 11 2 Tube 16 Bit Integer Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 10 Primary Element Mask Read Only indicates primary element type see note 1 Read Only indicates calculation Cale Method Mask methods supported see note 2 1 2
102. 2 Bit Loader When using this utility to back up files the user should also download the files to the tfCold drive in the event of a cold start 4 2 1 Step by Step Instructions 1 Collect the data from the unit 2 While in PCCU32 click the Save and Restore Utility icon in the main window toolbar 3 When the Save and Restore window displays click the Save Station Files button The Save Station Files dialog box will display 4 When the Save Station Files dialog box displays verify the default name and path for the files Click the OK button This will save the tfData drive files 5 When finished saving the station files a new dialog box offers the user the option to Restore the Station Files to the tfCold drive If the user selects Yes the station files will be downloaded to the tfCold drive 4 3 Restoring Configuration Files The Restore function enables the user to download configuration files to the G4 EX If prior to performing maintenance the Save Configuration Files was used these files were downloaded to the laptop s hard drive or disk The Restore function downloads these files into the G4 EX s tfCold drive This safeguards the data and allows the user to restart the unit without the obstacle of reconfiguring the G4 EX should any problem arise 4 3 1 Step by Step Instruction 1 While the user is in PCCU32 click the Save and Restore Utility icon on the window s main toolbar 2 When the Save and Restore window di
103. 2 H2S Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 3 H20 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 4 HE Btu Stream Component Read Write 2104349 001 rev AB Page 105 ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 254 5 C1 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 6 C2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 7 C3 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 8 NC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 9 IC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 10 NC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 11 IC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 12 NC6 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 13 NC7 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 14 NC8 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 15 NC9 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 16 NC10 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 17 O2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 18 CO Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 19 H2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 20 AR Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 21 AIR Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 22 C6PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 23 BTU Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 24 GF Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 25 NEOC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write C 14 15 Therms Master Slave Analysis Trend File ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 255 0 N2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 1 CO2 Btu Stream Component
104. 2 PID Operation 3 Setpoint Float Read Write 21 71 X PID Operation X Setpoint Float Read Write 21 72 0 PID Operation 1 Dead Band Float Read Write 21 72 1 PID Operation 2 Dead Band Float Read Write 21 72 2 PID Operation 2 Dead Band Float Read Write 21 72 X PID Operation X Dead Band Float Read Write 21 73 0 PID Operation 1 Proportional Gain Float Read Write 21 Page C 22 2104349 001 rev AB Register Description Type Access Note 73 1 PID Operation 2 Proportional Gain Float Read Write 21 73 2 PID Operation 2 Proportional Gain Float Read Write 21 73 X PID Operation X Proportional Gain Float Read Write 21 74 0 PID Operation 1 Integral Reset Float Read Write 21 74 1 PID Operation 2 Integral Reset Float Read Write 21 74 2 PID Operation 3 Integral Reset Float Read Write 21 74 X PID Operation X Integral Reset Float Read Write 21 75 0 PID Operation 1 Derivative Rate Float Read Write 21 75 1 PID Operation 2 Derivative Rate Float Read Write 21 75 2 PID Operation 3 Derivative Rate Float Read Write 21 75 X PID Operation X Derivative Rate Float Read Write 21 76 0 PID Operation 1 Mode Uchar Read Write 21 76 1 PID Operation 2 Mode Uchar Read Write 21 76 2 PID Operation 3 Mode Uchar Read Write 21 76 X PID Operation X Mode Uchar Read Write 21 77 0 PID Operation 1 Action Uchar Rea
105. 203 is always O The MODBUS request blocks mentioned in note 5 should be configured to trigger off the corresponding register in array 203 A MODBUS request block should be configured to read DP SP and TF from the XMV and store the data into the corresponding registers in array 204 The status of the scan request should be written to array 218 When the status written by the protocol is 0 SUCCESS the raw data is scaled and moved to array 205 When the status written by the protocol is 0 SUCCESS the raw data is scaled and moved to array 205 Measurement applications should source their inputs from array 205 The MODBUS request block for each XMV scan request should be configured to write the communication status to these status registers When the comm status written is 0 SUCCESS the raw data registers array 204 are processed scaled and written to the corresponding scaled data registers array 205 Device Static Pressure type If the XMV is an ABB 2010 this register should be set to 0 Absolute If the XMV is a Rosemount 3095 this register should be set to 1 Gauge If the XMV is and ABB 2010 this register should be set to 0 Metric If the XMV is a Rosemount 3095 this register should be set to 1 English The calibration registers in array 209 should only be written by the PCCU32 calibration screen 11 Calibration Bit Flags 0x0080 Factory 0x0040 Field any thing else then in calibration sequence mode 2104349 001
106. 2101416 001 Figure 1 3 G4 EX Enclosure 2104349 001 rev AB Page 1 9 8 34 3 31 K 3 03 NPT CONDUIT ENTRY A m uL em m i gt 2 2 E A 11 25 X E 1 665 NM 18 2 80 3 285 CONDUIT ENTRY GROUNDING SCREW LEFT SIDE VIEW Figure 1 4 G4 EX Enclosure Left Side CONDUIT ENTRY TINN A 8 225 ft gate 77 11 25 1 665 OPTIONAL EXTERNAL PCCU FLAMEPROOF HOUSING 2101416 001 GROUNDING SCREW RIGHT SIDE VIEW Figure 1 5 G4 EX Enclosure Right Side Page 1 10 2104349 001 rev AB 1 2 2 G4 EX Main Processor Board The G4 EX main processor board is mounted inside the front end cap directly behind the display assembly see Figure 1 6 User applicable connections on this board consist of the following e USD J3 e Contrast Display Potentiometer R1 e LCD Display Connector J2 e Lithium Battery Connector J5 e Engine Card Connector XA1 e Sensor Interface Connector J6 e Termination Board Connector J1 The G4 EX transducer assembly utilizes a small electronic A board that contains the factory characterization data This FYI 9 allows the main electronics the sensor assembly to be individually field replaceable in the event of failures Installation and or maintenance of electric compone
107. 2104349 001 rev AB XSeries 6200 6201EX Flow Computer User s Manual DTOTALLLOW PAED ED Intellectual Property amp Copyright Notice 2011 by ABB Inc Totalflow Owner Bartlesville Oklahoma 74006 U S A All rights reserved Any and all derivatives of including translations thereof shall remain the sole property of the Owner regardless of any circumstances The original US English version of this manual shall be deemed the only valid version Translated versions in any other language shall be maintained as accurately as possible Should any discrepancies exist the US English version will be considered final Notice This publication is for information only The contents are subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment representation warranty or guarantee of any method product or device by Owner Inquiries regarding this manual should be addressed to ABB Inc Totalflow Products Technical Communications 7051 Industrial Blvd Bartlesville Oklahoma 74006 U S A TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION Ree XI Organization amp Style sss nennen nennen nnne xi Chapter Descriptions oe ree ec oh iene eia dt ve TY eX al Eee edv Xi Getting anti ER xi Before Calig ronm raua meae eines xi Key SYMDOIS
108. 27 2104349 001 rev AB Page 3 23 Credit Key License Utility Key Credits OK reat Amount Do Phone update Help d Load TF Serial Credit Key Serial Figure 3 27 Credit Key License Utility 5 The number of credits will display This is the same dialog box that the user would use to add more TIP credits to the credit key Credit Key License Utility x Key Credits Do Phone Update Hydrocarbon DP 2 SAP Serial ns Credit Key Serial 12 Figure 3 28 Credit Key License Utility Status Page 3 24 2104349 001 rev AB 3 5 3 Adding Credits to the Credit Key by Telephone The user may have ordered the credit key from Totalflow with specified number of the various credits however the user may need to add more or different credits in the future 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Open PCCU32 version 7 0 or later but do not connect to the unit Go to the Credit Key License Utility Operate gt File Utilities gt Credit Key License Utility Insert the credit key into an available USB port Select Do Phone Update see Figure 3 28 The user is then asked to call Totalflow Order Entry Insure that the credit key is plugged in Upon connection with Totalflow Order Entry representative click the OK button The representative will ask the user to read the five 5 encrypted codes that appear directly bene
109. 2OCONTENT Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 34 H2OBIAS Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 35 EOAXMAP Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 36 NEOC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 37 C3PRIME Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 38 CAPLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 39 SATBTU Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 40 Z Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 41 WOBBE Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 42 STREAM NUMBER Read Write 104 43 STREAM TIME Read Write C 13 6 Therms Master Stream 3 Float Register ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 105 0 N2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 1 CO2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 2 H2S Btu Stream Component Read Write Page C 92 2104349 001 rev AB ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 105 3 H20 Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 4 HE Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 5 C1 Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 6 C2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 7 C3 Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 8 NC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 9 IC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 10 NC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 11 IC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 12 NC6 Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 13 NC7 Btu Stream Component Read Write 105 14 NC8 Btu Stream Component Read Write 1
110. 3 C 5 1 Reports Register C 14 C 6 Operations Application Registers C 14 C 6 1 Operations Application Register Notes C 24 Communication Application C 28 C 7 1 Communication Application Register C 30 C 8 Safety Controller Application C 32 CEI lt EIER etr I PRU HIER M Ed C 32 7 6 2 General Registers io oed tdem ies C 33 C 8 3 Safety Controller Register 0404040000 C 34 C 9 6200EX IOS Application Registers C 35 C 9 1 IOS UINT32 Registers ssssssssssse eene C 35 C 9 2 JOS UINT16 R69lslers oett etti ber tunt C 36 9 3 Byte Registersuu grads san C 36 C 9 4 JOS Float Reglsters de idit nein ntm mds C 37 C 9 5 OS AI Struct and Calibration Point C 39 C 9 6 lOS Term Board Raw Counts Registers 16 C 41 C 9 7 Engine EEProm Registers 16 Bytes per page Strings C 41 C 9 8 Term Board FE Ram Registers 64 Byte
111. 32 version 7 05 5 or later with the G4 EX After browsing to the folder that contains the Totalflow inf click the Next button 2104349 001 rev AB Page 3 3 Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps pou install software for USB Device If your hardware came with an installation CD 4 or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do Install the software automatically Recommended Install from a list or specific location Advanced Click Next to continue lt Back Cancel Figure 3 3 Specific Location Selection Window Found New Hardware Wizard Please choose your search and installation options Search for the best driver in these locations Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed Search removable media floppy CD ROM IV Include this location in the search C 4PCCU605 7 search I will choose the driver to install Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware lt Back Cancel Figure 3 4 Specify Location for USB Driver Totalflow inf Page 34 2104349 001 rev AB 4 5 At this point the user may receive Microsoft message that warns that the Totalflow USB driver has not
112. 512M 1G Comm Ports e 6 Ports Available Dedicated PCCU MMI RS 232 or USB 2 Onboard User Programmable RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 Ports e USB Client NOTE A special cable is required and the user must check with Totalflow for a list of drivers to support Client peripherals e Ethernet Bluetooth Standard on the Main Electronics Board Analog Inputs 1 0 10 VDC Digital Inputs 1 State Change or Pulse to 20 kHz operating at a 50 duty cycle with Selectable De bounce enabled 100 Hz Digital Outputs 1 FETs sink 2 5 Amp Max Open Drain PTC with 1500 W Transient protection I O Module Interface Optional plug in I O daughter card with 12 I O 3 Al 1 AO 4 DI and 4 DO LCD Interface Dedicated interface for Liquid Crystal Display LCD Security Switch On Off Bi level on board Security See Chapter 3 for details I O Scan Rate 1 time per second Time Base Stability t 7 5 ppm parts per million Pulse Input Bandwidth Up to 20 KHz Linear flow meter only 1 2 3 G4 EX Termination Board The G4 EX Termination board can be accessed by removing the rear end cap see Figure 1 7 All user connections should be routed through the cable entry hubs and should adhere to local codes Located on the Termination board the user will find connectors for two 2 communication ports RS 232 RS 422 or RS 485 software selectable The user should also note that there is
113. 53 21 AIR Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 22 C6PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 23 BTU Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 24 GF Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 25 NEOC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write C 15 7 Therms Slave Stream 4 Float Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 254 0 N2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 111 ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 254 1 CO2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 2 H2S Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 3 H20 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 4 HE Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 5 C1 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 6 C2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 7 C3 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 8 NC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 9 IC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 10 NC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 11 IC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 12 NC6 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 13 NC7 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 14 NC8 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 15 NC9 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 16 NC10 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 17 02 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 18 CO Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 19 H2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 20 AR Btu Stre
114. 8 54 2 Pulse Operation 4 Trigger Flags Byte Read Only 18 54 X Pulse Operation X Trigger Flags Byte Read Only 18 55 0 Pulse Operation 1 Output Float Read Write 18 55 1 Pulse Operation 2 Output Float Read Write 18 55 2 Pulse Operation 4 Output Float Read Write 18 55 X Pulse Operation X Output Float Read Write 18 56 0 Limit Operation 1 Descriptor String Read Write 12 Page C 20 2104349 001 rev AB Register Description Type Access Note 56 1 Limit Operation 2 Descriptor String Read Write 12 56 2 Limit Operation 3 Descriptor String Read Write 12 56 X Limit Operation X Descriptor String Read Write 12 57 0 Limit Operation 1 High Limit Float Read Write 19 57 1 Limit Operation 2 High Limit Float Read Write 19 57 2 Limit Operation 3 High Limit Float Read Write 19 57 X Limit Operation X High Limit Float Read Write 19 58 0 Limit Operation 1 Low Limit Float Read Write 19 58 1 Limit Operation 2 Low Limit Float Read Write 19 58 2 Limit Operation 3 Low Limit Float Read Write 19 58 X Limit Operation X Low Limit Float Read Write 19 59 0 Limit Operation 1 Velocity Float Read Write 19 59 1 Limit Operation 2 Velocity Float Read Write 19 59 2 Limit Operation 3 Velocity Float Read Write 19 59 X Limit Operation X Velocity Float Read Write 19 60 0 Limit Operation 1 Input Regis
115. 8 x Ej ml Oe 9 e 8 CHAMBER2 amp Communications i Network USBL COMO COM io COMZ 8 1 0 Interface Auxiliary Data amp Flow Measurement Setup i Analysis Digital Outputs i Flow Adv Setup i Holding Registers H Operations R amp Trend System Analog Outputs The 0 20 48 mA analog output circuit is SINK mode only and requires the use of an external power supply AM 1 24 AID AIX 2 Wee T 208059 V 4 20ma Tranemitier AOU GND 00000000 c The analog inputs must be defined PCCU32 2104349 001 rev AB Page EM pccusz2 Entry 2 Operate View Window tX ie Uu Om a 10 72 KG CHAMBER2 z Analog Inputs Digital outputs Digital Inputs Pulse Inputs i Network USBL 1 COMD i COML E MG 7 2433 of Full Scale amp I O Interface Auxiliary 7 2434 d Data 6200EX 1 0 Card amp Flow Measurement Setup L Analysis Digital Outputs No Flow Setup Holding Registers Operations amp Trend System Ready h 3Pols 11 0 Connected to CHAMBER2 E A 3 6 3 Digital Pulse Points The DI PI inputs will accept NAMUR type sensor inputs which meet the IEC 60947 5 6 electrical characteristics The dig
116. A to D Converter absolute differential pressure A absolute static pressure or temperature readings exceed maximum counts or are D less than the minimum counts If the A to D Converter readings are within range Y AD is shaded Communication Protocols gt Transmitting Data Sending a response N lt Receiving Data Processing request N Nak Negative Acknowledgement w packet list N Ack Positive Acknowledgement of receipt request N i Waiting for ACK Waiting for response after transmission N Exception Alarm Proceeding N T ID Recognized Recognized and receiving request N Listen Cycle Flashes if this remote port is active and running Totalflow Remote T Protocol Flashes in sync with listening cycle that occurs at 1 2 or 4 second N intervals 2104349 001 rev AB Page 5 3 Indicator Description Alarm M MODBUS ASCII MODBUS ASCII protocol selected for the port assigned to this N annunciator B MODBUS RTU MODBUS RTU protocol is selected for the port assigned to this N annunciator X ID Recognized The ID has been recognized but is waiting for Sync N 5 2 1 Troubleshooting a Blank LCD Screen When the LCD is blank this means that the unit has entered S mode This indicates that the battery voltage has dropped below 10 9 VDC 5 2 1 1 Step by Step Instructions 1 Make a local connection with the G4 EX This will wake the unit up so that the user can ch
117. AY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 117 0 New Data Stream 1 Read Write 117 1 New Data Stream 2 Read Write 117 2 New Data Stream 3 Read Write 117 3 New Data Stream 4 Read Write C 14 4 Therms Master Component Xref Index Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 118 0 Components Index Xref Index 1 Read Write 118 1 Components Index Xref Index 2 Read Write 118 2 Components Index Xref Index 3 Read Write 118 3 Components Index Xref Index 4 Read Write 118 4 Components Index Xref Index 5 Read Write 118 5 Components Index Xref Index 6 Read Write 118 6 Components Index Xref Index 7 Read Write 118 7 Components Index Xref Index 8 Read Write 118 8 Components Index Xref Index 9 Read Write 118 9 Components Index Xref Index 10 Read Write 118 10 Components Index Xref Index 11 Read Write 118 11 Components Index Xref Index 12 Read Write 118 12 Components Index Xref Index 13 Read Write 118 13 Components Index Xref Index 14 Read Write 118 14 Components Index Xref Index 15 Read Write 118 15 Components Index Xref Index 16 Read Write 118 16 Components Index Xref Index 17 Read Write 118 17 Components Index Xref Index 18 Read Write 118 18 Components Index Xref Index 19 Read Write 118 19 Components Index Xref Index 20 Read Write 118 20 Components Index Xref Index 21 Read Write 118 21 Components Index Xref Index 22 Read Write 118 22 Components Index Xref Index 23 Read Write 118 23 Components Index Xref Index 24 Read Write 118 24 Components I
118. Analog Inputs tab sub menu under Onboard I O in the Calibration window 3 Select whether to perform a 3 Point 5 Point or Bias calibration Note that if a 3 Point is selected there will be 3 Target values and 3 Cal Point buttons If 5 Point is selected there will be 5 Target values and 5 Cal Point buttons Page 4 28 2104349 001 rev AB 4 Click inside the Range window and enter a range The range can be anything and represent any units percent volts etc that the user prefers Target values will be updated to reflect the new calibration range 5 Click on the Low Cal Point button and apply the voltage typically 1 volt for the low calibration point Verify the current reading on the Enter Low Calibration Value screen is stable 6 Enter the Target value for the Low Cal Point and click the OK button 7 Click on the 100 Cal Point button apply the voltage typically 5 volts that represents the full range and verify the current reading is stable 8 Enter the Target value for the 100 Cal Point and click the OK button 9 Click on the next highest Cal Point button and apply voltage representing its range Verify the current reading is stable 10 Enter the Target value for that Cal Point and click the OK button 11 Repeat Steps 9 10 for any remaining Cal Points After the last point is entered PCCU32 will automatically calibrate the 4 16 2 Calibrating RTD Temperature Bias If the user elects to use
119. Appendix X Manufacturer s specifications can often lead to confusion In some instances the manufacturer s specifications will claim to operate from 10 to 30 VDC They are not always clear that 2104349 001 rev AB Page 4 25 this 10 30 VDC must be applied across the 4 20 mA transmitter only and not across the transmitter load resistor series combination Again refer to the explanation in the appendix 4 14 2 1 Calibration 1 Connect an accurate power source capable of 1 5 volts to the Al terminals that are to be calibrated 2 In Calibration window for the AI that is being calibrated select either 3 or 5 Point calibration for the number of preferred calibration points 3 Point for low 50 and 100 values and 5 Point for low 25 50 75 and 10096 values 3 In the Current Value field place a check in the Update checkbox This causes the Al to look for the source at the terminals instead of a test value 4 Begin the calibration by starting with the first selection Low Cal Point 5 Apply one volt to the Al terminals 6 Enter a value typically zero that represents the low calibration point and represents the desired engineering units Upon completion click the OK button The current reading value on the pop up entry screens will TIP be placed in the Reading column and represent values from the previous calibration User entered values will be displayed in the Entry column 7 Move to the 10096 Cal Point
120. BRACKET Le 1 CHARGER MOUNTED TO OUTSIDE OF CABINET Figure 2 15 AC Charger Installed 2104349 001 rev AB Page 2 17 PROCESS MARKER 1 2 LOCKNUT OUTLET BOX SCREW COVER 1 2 NIPPLE X 2 CONDUIT HUB 22 De 22 GROUND WIRE GRN PROCESS MARKER 4 BREATHER DRAIN 1 2 METAL CLAD SEALING O RING TERMINAL SPACE CONNECTOR 4 5 6 7 8 9 Figure 2 16 AC Charger Outlet Box Installation Feed the AC charger s DC power lines into the enclosure see Figure 2 16 Insert the nipple through the side of the enclosure and install the removed lock nut To prevent moisture from entering the enclosure after installing the AC battery pack charger be certain the O ring side of the metal backed sealing ring is against the enclosure Loosen the terminal screws and insert the red wire into the plus array terminal and the black wire in the negative array terminal see Figure 2 17 Retighten the screws Connect the green wire to one of the grounding screws that are located on the bottom of the enclosure Pipe the conduit and associated AC wiring into the AC charger conduit box The AC charger is rated at either 120 VAC 60 Hz or 240 VAC 50 Hz Connect the 120 V hot and neutral or the two
121. Calc Units Mask Read Only not used 1 3 Report Units Mask Read Only not used Read Only indicates super 1 4 Super Comp Method Mask compressibility methods that may be selected See note 3 Read Write live analysis updates are 1 5 Live Analysis Update Interval expected in this interval expressed in seconds Page C 64 2104349 001 rev AB ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 1 6 Volume Calc period Read Write seconds Read Write number of daily records 1 7 Daily Record Capacity change to this value deletes existing database and starts new database Read Write number of log period records change to this value deletes T9 bog Cape existing database and starts new database Read Write number of event records 1 9 Event Record Capacity change to this value deletes existing database and starts new database Read Write control bits see note 4 1 10 Aux Contact 1 Select Bits 1 11 Aux Contact 2 Select Bits Read Write control bits see note 4 1 12 Fretum pune Or evene Write Canadian Event Log available 1 13 Therms Stream Id Read WriteAnalysis Stream Id 1 14 Modbus address of analyzer Read Write 1 15 Therms use fixed or last good Read Write 1 16 Daily Record Sequence Number Read Only 1 17 Log Record Sequence Number Read Only 1 18 Event Record Sequence Read Only Number 1 19 ACF Status Flags Read Only see note 5 1 20 AP Status Flags Read Only see note 6
122. Data B200EXI 0 Card amp Flow Measurement Setup Analysis Digital Outputs No Flow o Adv Setup Holding Registers E Operations Trend System Ready 2 Entry 771 Operate View Window Help CHAMBERZ 8 Communications Network USB1 COMO i COM2 I O Interface i Auxiliary Data 6200EX 1 0 Card B die Measurement Setup Analysis Digital Outputs Flow Adv Setup Holding Registers Operations amp Trend System Ready Terminal Tits 2 we ei Temi tPols 13 Errors 0 Connected to CHAMBERZ CF 9 27671 HPols 14 Errors O Connected to CHAMBER2 10 2104349 001 rev AB APPENDIX B 4 20 MILLIAMP TRANSMITTERS B 1 Powering 4 2 Milliamp Transmitters 4 20 milliamp MA transmitters are essentially variable constant current Sources They need to have sufficient voltage applied to them to insure that they will be able to drive 20 mA onto a 250 OHM load Different transmitter technologies will have different powering requirements Many 4 20 mA transmitters claim to be operational between 10 and 30 VDG but this be somewhat misleading If it is two wire line powered transmitter and itis sourcing the maximum loop current of 20 mA 5 VDC is dropped across the 250 OHM resistor Dropping 5 VDC across the load resistor only leaves 5 to 2
123. E 125 X Threshold Type of Alarm at Exception Block X Byte Read Write 126 X Threshold Constant of Alarm of at Exception Float Read Write Block X 127 0 Current Active Alarms Structure Read Only 128 0 Current Last Logged Alarm Fault SInt Read Only 128 1 Current Last Logged Alarm Warning SInt Read Only 128 2 Current First Logged Alarm Fault SInt Read Only 128 3 Current First Logged Alarm Warning SInt Read Only 129 0 Current Last Logged Alarm Fault String Read Only 129 1 Current Last Logged Alarm Warning String Read Only 129 2 Current First Logged Alarm Fault String Read Only 129 3 Current First Logged Alarm Warning String Read Only 129 4 RAMS Port Name String Write Read 130 0 Transmit Records Only Structure Read Only 14 131 X Alarm Count of currently active alarms of Uint Read Only Severity X 132 X Alarm Acknowledge Byte Read Write 18 133 X Get Alarm Acknowledge Log Record Struct Read Only 19 134 X All Alarms Not Acknowledged Pat Read Write 20 135 X All Alarms Not Acknowledged iat Read Write 20 Record 136 X End of Array Read Write 20 Struct C 3 1 Alarm System Application Register Notes These are special structures used by the Totalflow WinCCU PCCU32 applications Currently they can not be accessed via templates or ini files MAX ALARMS 255 exceptions user selectable up to 255 C RAMFLTS 16 2 Allows the user to enter floating point numbers as constants that be used when building
124. ET must be capable of sinking 8 2 mA Total impedance of the circuit must be less than 1K OHM Dry Contact i e reed switch The device must be capable of sinking 8 2 mA The total impedance when active must be less than 1K OHM Note The pulse inputs on the 2102458 001 are designed to accept relatively high speed approximately 20Khz signals Therefore if a reed switch or other mechanical device subject to bouncing contacts is used the application will require the use of a capacitor across the contact of the switching device a value of 0 1 uF should be a good starting place Active Signal Must be capable of being connected to a 1K load which is tied to a 8 2V voltage source When the output is driven high above 8 8V the load will appear at 215 OHMS connected to a 8 8V Note The active signal type input requires the use of an onboard DAC converter to adjust the trip threshold of the comparator input Example A 0 5V signal will not cause the input to transition through the NAMUR thresholds The DAC will be set to 1 35V to a value of 69 decimal or 0x45 This will make the apparent threshold as seen at the input to 2 5V The digital inputs and pulse inputs must be defined in PCCU32 2104349 001 rev AB Page A 9 2 Entry 7 Operate View Window Help T8 8 amp CHAMBER2 amp Communications i Network USBI COMA COMI COM2 klo Interface Auxiliary YO TIC
125. F 3 69 Aux Contact 1 Volume Setpoint Read Write MCF 3 70 Aux Contact 2 Volume Setpoint Read Write MCF 3 71 current contract day accumulated energy Read Only MBTU 3 72 yesterdays contract day accumulated Read Only MBTU energy 3 73 Current Energy rate Read Only MBTU HR 3 74 Month Accum Volume Read Only MCF 3 75 5 Volume Not Reset by Read Only MCF 3 76 Month Accum Energy Read Only MMBTU 3 77 2 Energy NORE Read Only MMBTU 3 78 Fixed AP value Read Write 3 79 Current SCF flow Read Only 3 80 Previous Month Accumulated Volume Read Only Her 3 82 Previous Month Energy Read Only 10 4 1 Tube Floating Point Register Notes 1 Static pressure values are in PSIA PSIG depending on gauge pressure device selection See Tube Byte Register 0 55 2 Flow Rate Limits units depend on Flow rate volume scale flags See Tube Byte Register 0 42 C 10 5 Tube Register Cross References Tube register cross references are structures containing the register access values for data used by the tube but owned by another application The following structure defines data type Register typedef struct Register Struct byte app Application byte array Register array Page C 52 2104349 001 rev AB int 16 index index into array Register ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 4 0 AP Register Read Write 4 1 DP Register Read Writ
126. Fixed H2O Content Read Write ppm 3 43 Fixed H20 Bias Read Write ppm 3 44 Live Analysis Gravity Accumulator Read Write 3 45 Live Analysis BTU Accumulator mese Tera 2104349 001 rev AB Page 67 ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 3 46 Live Analysis Nitrogen Accumulator Read Write mole 3 47 Live Analysis Carbon Dioxide Read Write mole Accumulator 3 48 Live Analysis Hydrogen Sulfide Read Write mole Accumulator 3 49 Live Analysis Water Accumulator Read Write mole 96 3 50 Live Analysis Helium Accumulator Read Write mole 96 3 51 Live Analysis Methane Accumulator Read Write mole 96 3 52 Live Analysis Ethane Accumulator Read Write mole 96 3 53 Live Analysis Propane Accumulator Read Write mole 96 3 54 Live Analysis Normal Butane Read Write mole Accumulator 3 55 Live Analysis Iso Butane Accumulator Read Write mole 96 3 56 Live Analysis Normal Pentane Read Write mole Accumulator 3 57 Live Analysis Iso Pentane Accumulator Read Write mole 96 3 58 Live Analysis Normal Hexane Read Write mole Accumulator 3 59 Live Analysis Normal Heptane Read Write mole Accumulator 3 60 Live Analysis Normal Octane Read Write mole Accumulator 3 61 Live Analysis Normal Nonane Read Write mole Accumulator 3 62 Live Analysis Normal Decane Read Write mole Accumulator 3 63 Live Analysis Oxygen Accumulator Read Write mole 96
127. H Internal 3 6414 e e On Board 26AH Internal 6713 ININ 6714 3 Board 42 Internal 6 e 42 Internal 6 1 1 1 Capabilities The G4 EX is packaged in small explosion proof cast aluminum enclosure which accommodates the processor board termination board and display The power supply charging source and radio communication applications must be housed in separate accommodations See Figure 1 1 For the G4 EX the integral multivariable transducer EXIMV is separate unit with no internal electronics and is attached to the bottom of the enclosure via threaded neck This contains the wiring for the connection to the electronics that are located in the enclosure The G4 EX defaults to the retention of daily and log period records for 40 days and the retention of 200 events These defaults can be extended limited only by the file storage spaces on the device The G4 EX may be used in conjunction with a laptop that is running PCCU32 software PCCU32 is required for initial setup and setup of the advanced features The G4 EX maintains a history of alarms as well as average differential pressure DP average static pressure SP average flowing temperature Tf accumulated volume energy and an average extension The G4 EX can be programmed to calculate flow rates and volumes in accordance with either AGA 3 AGA 7 or ISO 5167 Supercompres
128. I 1 Pulse Count Read Only 102 1 PI 2 Pulse Count Read Only 102 2 PI 3 Pulse Count Read Only 102 3 PI 4 Pulse Count Read Only 102 4 PI 1 Previous Pulse Count Read Only 102 5 PI 2 Previous Pulse Count Read Only 102 6 PI 3 Previous Pulse Count Read Only 102 7 PI 4 Previous Pulse Count Read Only 102 8 PI 1 Total Pulse Count Read Only 102 9 PI 2 Total Pulse Count Read Only 102 10 PI 3 Total Pulse Count Read Only 102 11 PI 4 Total Pulse Count Read Only C 9 16 IOS Daughter Card Float Registers Ary Reg Description Usage Note 103 0 Al 1 Input Scaled Read Only 103 1 AI 2 Input Scaled Read Only 103 2 AI 3 Input Scaled Read Only 103 3 AO 1 Output Scaled Read Only C 9 17 IOS Daughter Card FE Ram Registers A2 64 Bytes Per Page Strings Ary Reg Description Usage Note 104 x FE Ram Page x Read Only 6 0 7 8 pages and 64 bytes per page C 9 18 IOS Daughter Card FE Ram Registers A4 64 Bytes Per Page Strings Ary Reg Description Usage Note 105 x FE Ram Page x Read Only 7 X 0 7 8 pages and 64 bytes per page C 9 19 Term Board Al DO Usage e DO1 Jumper J13 1 to 2 e DO2 Jumper J12 2 to 3 e 1 Voltage Mode Jumper J12 1 to 2 4 20En Off DO2 e Al1 4 20 mA Mode Jumper J12 1 to 2 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 43 4 20 On 002 Al2 Voltage Mode Jumper J13 2 to 3 DO1 Off Al2 4 20 mA Mode Jumper J13 2 to 3 DO1 C 10 AGA 3 Measurem
129. ING 4 ON BOARD CIRCUITRY BATTERY OR POWER LOAD gt SIG I SIG 2 POSITIVE TERMINAL 24 VDC SOURCE 1 8A 28 OUTPUT CONTROL BATTERY OR POWER COMMON OR GND SOURCE TERMINAL ee Figure 1 11 DO Connection Example 1 2 3 4 Analog Input The G4 EX provides one analog input as a means of receiving data represented by continuously varying voltage current e Open circuit voltage 0 VDC e Short circuit leakage current 0 uA typical e Inputimpedance 103 5KO typical 0 to 10V e Measurable input voltage range 0 to 10 34 VDC e Maximum voltage on input 30 VDC Typical Al Point Schematic Typical Point Schematic SIG gt Overvoltage SIG TO Protection gt MEASUREMENT dei CIRCUITRY GND 2 Figure 1 12 Typical AI Point Schematic 2104349 001 rev AB Page 1 17 Al Example Connections TYPICAL 1 5 VDC ON BOARD CIRCUITRY FIELD WIRING X SIG SIG gt gt SIG TO d oe S MEASUREMENT Q Network CIRCUITRY i COMMON GND gt GND GND gt E EN TYPICAL 2 WIRE 4 20mA ON BOARD CIRCUITRY FIELD DEVICE WIRING POWER SOURCE POS TERM 4 XMTR gt SIG SIG gt FIELD DEVICE wem cum SIG TO Protection MEASUREMENT POWER SOURCE COMMON Sealy
130. N2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 1 CO2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 2 H2S Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 3 H20 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 4 HE Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 5 C1 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 6 C2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 7 C3 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 8 NC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 9 IC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 10 NC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 11 IC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 12 NC6 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 13 NC7 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 14 NC8 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 15 NC9 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 16 NC10 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 17 02 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 18 CO Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 19 H2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 20 AR Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 21 AIR Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 22 C6PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 103 ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 251 23 BTU Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 24 GF Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 25 NEOC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write C 14 12 Therms Slave Stream 2 Float Registers ARRAY REGI
131. NG be non hazardous before removing any enclosure cover For further information refer to the certification drawing indicated on the device s nametag and national and local electrical codes 2104349 001 rev AB Page A 3 1 2 3 4 Gain access to the Termination board by loosening the countersunk hex socket locking set screw in the rear end cap Use 1 16 hex wrench and then unscrew the end cap Remove the four 6 32 x 625 standoffs located at the four corners of the Termination board Gently lift the Termination board out of the unit Be careful to not disconnect the PCCU ribbon cable from the Termination board Disconnect the cable from the Termination board A 3 4 I O Daughter Card Installation Remove power from the device or insure the area is known to WARNING 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 be non hazardous before removing any enclosure cover For further information refer to the certification drawing indicated on the device s nametag and national and local electrical codes Gain access to the Termination board by loosening the countersunk hex socket locking set screw in the rear end cap Use a 1 16 hex wrench and then unscrew the end cap Remove the four existing 6 32 x 625 standoffs and washers if installed Do not misplace as they will be needed later in this procedure Install the new standoffs 6 32 x 75 and washers supplied in the kit into the four corner mounting holes i
132. Normal Octane Config flags Read Write live analysis configuration see note 7 0 33 Normal Nonane Config flags Read Write live analysis configuration see note 7 0 34 Normal Decane Config flags Read Write live analysis configuration see note 7 Read Write live analysis configuration 0 35 Oxygen Config flags see note 7 0 36 Carbon Monoxide Config flags Read Write live analysis 0 37 Hydrogen Config flags Read Write live analysis configuration see note 7 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 45 ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE Read Write live analysis configuration 0 38 Argon Config flags see note 7 0 39 Number of live components Read Write 0 40 Get release calc lock Read Write 0 41 Tube analysis stream index Read Write 0 42 Flow rate volume scale flags Read Write see note 8 0 43 Aux contact 1 re open interval Read Write 0 44 Aux contact 1 current state Read Only 0 45 Aux contact 1 manual set Read Write 0 46 Aux contact 2 re open interval Read Write 0 47 Aux contact 2 current state Read Only 0 48 Aux contact 2 manual set Read Write 0 49 Remote Sense Action Read Write 0 50 Remote Sense State Read Only 0 51 Events Available Write Canadian Event Log 0 52 Apa Contacta Select bits low Read Write see note 9 0 53 aos vener ee pits IOW Read Write see note 9 0 54 Hold tube analog inputs Read Write 0 55 n pressure absolutegauge Read W
133. OMO TF Remote COM1 Spare 2 9 10 Interface E Display Holding Registers E Operations Ready 6 Errors Connected to TOTALFLOW Figure 3 14 Station Setup Tab 0 Login 2 Turning the Security Switch 52 ON will activate the security codes The level 1 code in the above screenshot 1234 will allow data and configuration values to be read but not altered The level 2 code in the above screenshot 5678 will allow full access to read and write These security codes must be entered into PCCU32 and WinCCU32 to provide the appropriate access to the meters However WinCCU32 will always need the proper security code regardless of the position of the security switch S2 Turning the security switch Off does not allow unprotected access for a WinCCU32 operator D a Modbus access to the meters is not protected by the Q security codes FYI PCCU32 Security PCCU32 will require the appropriate security code to be entered To enter the security code the user will need to move to System Setup in PCCU32 In the provided example see Figure 3 15 the operator has been provided with read only access to the meter The security code level of 1234 per Figure 3 15 provides read only access to the meter 5678 was entered the user would have full read write access to the meter vXL Ifthe security level is breached the meter will give no FYI indication Any data that
134. Page C 89 ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 102 38 Total GPM Read Write 102 39 Ratio 1 Unused Read Write C 13 4 Therms Master Stream 1 Float Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 103 0 N2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 1 CO2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 2 H2S Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 3 H20 Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 4 HE Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 5 C1 Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 6 C2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 7 C3 Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 8 NC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 9 IC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 10 NC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 11 IC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 12 NC6 Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 13 NC7 Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 14 NC8 Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 15 NC9 Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 16 NC10 Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 17 02 Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 18 CO Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 19 H2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 20 AR Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 21 AIR Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 22 C6PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 23 BTU Btu Stream Component Read Write 103 24 GF Btu Stream Component Read Write
135. Prom Number String Read Only 0 2 Prom Description String Read Only 0 3 System Date Time String Read Write 0 4 Device ID String Read Write 0 5 Location String Read Write 0 6 Read Level Security Code String Read Write 0 7 Write Level Security Code String Read Write 0 8 Server String Write Only 0 9 Account String Read Write 0 10 Password String Read Write 0 11 Directory String Read Write 0 12 IP Address String Read Write 0 13 DNS Address String Read Write 0 14 WINS Address String Read Write 0 15 DNS Name String Read Write 0 16 Subnet Mask String Read Write 0 17 Gateway String Read Write 0 18 OS Part Revision String Read Only 0 19 Log String String Write Only 0 20 Blackfin Firmware String Read Only 0 21 Login User String Read Only 1 0 Number of App Enumerations Byte Read Only 1 1 X Application Enumerations Byte Read Only 1 2 1 X Application Descriptions String Read Only 3 0 Number of Applications Byte Read Write 3 1 X Application Table Byte Read Write 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 1 Register Description Type Access Note 4 1 X Application Names String Read Write 5 1 X Application Revisions String Read Only 6 1 X Application Parameters String Read Write 7 0 Low Charger Byte Read Only 7 1 Very Low Battery Byte Read Only 7 2 Wakeup Obsolete Byte Write Only 7 3 Security Switch Byte Read Only 7 4 System Shutdown Byt
136. RS 232 RS 485 Remote Communication ports e USB and 10Base T Ethernet port e USB or RS 232 serial may be ordered as local externally accessible Local Communication Interface port 1 1 4 Log Period Records Each record has entries that contain the following information and more e Average static pressure e Average differential pressure Page 1 4 2104349 001 rev AB e Average flow temperature e Calculated volume 1 1 4 1 Log Period Data Entries Log period data entries are made every 60 minutes by default The user may change this period to any one of the seven 7 choices 1 2 5 10 20 30 60 Choosing a log period of less than 60 minutes will result in additional records being logged As a result this requires more storage space to hold a full day s data The log period must never be less than the volume calculation period 1 1 4 2 Volume Calculation Period Entries Volume calculation period entries are made every second by default The user may change this period up to 60 minutes API 21 1 strongly suggests a volume calculation period QCP of once per second The volume calculation period should never be greater than the log period and should be evenly divisible into the log period Volume calculations are completed following the top of the current period i e top of the hour top of the minute each second 1 1 5 Display Function During operation the front panel LCD continuously scrolls t
137. RSB Static Pressure Read Only 3 2 RSB RTD Temperature Read Only 3 3 Al 1 Term Board Read Only 3 4 AI 2 Term Board Read Only 3 5 Battery Voltage Read Only 3 6 Charger Voltage Returns 0 Read Only 3 7 RSB Ambient Temperature Read Only 3 8 RSB Transducer Temperature Read Only 3 16 DP Calibration Zero Read Write 3 17 DP Calibration Point 1 Read Write 3 18 DP Calibration Point 2 Read Write 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 37 Ary Reg Description Usage Note 3 19 DP Calibration Point 3 Read Write 3 20 DP Calibration Point 4 Read Write 3 21 DP Calibration Point 5 Read Write 3 22 DP Calibration Bias Read Write 3 31 DP Calibration Done Read Write 3 32 SP Calibration Zero Read Write 3 33 SP Calibration Point 1 Read Write 3 34 SP Calibration Point 2 Read Write 3 35 SP Calibration Point 3 Read Write 3 36 SP Calibration Point 4 Read Write 3 37 SP Calibration Point 5 Read Write 3 38 SP Calibration Bias Read Write 3 47 SP Calibration Done Read Write 3 54 RTD Calibration Bias Read Write 3 64 Al 1 Calibration Zero Read Write 3 65 Al 1 Calibration Point 1 Read Write 3 66 Al 1 Calibration Point 2 Read Write 3 67 Al 1 Calibration Point Read Write 3 68 Al 1 Calibration Point 4 Read Write 3 69 AI 1 Calibration Point 5 Read Write 3 70 Al 1 Calibration Bias Read Write 3 79 Al 1 Calibration Done Read Write 3 80 AI 2 Calibration Zero Rea
138. Read Write 255 2 H2S Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 3 H20 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 4 HE Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 5 C1 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 6 C2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 7 C3 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 8 NC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 9 IC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write Page 106 2104349 001 rev AB ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 255 10 NC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 11 IC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 12 NC6 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 13 NC7 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 14 NC8 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 15 NC9 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 16 NC10 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 17 O2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 18 CO Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 19 H2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 20 AR Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 21 AIR Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 22 C6PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 23 BTU Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 24 GF Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 25 NEOC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write C 15 Therms Slave Application Registers The Therms Slave application registers allow access to the G4 EX data items Usage and notes are specific to the Therms Slave appli
139. Return the manifold to service before exiting Calibration mode 4I ho G For additional information regarding Differential Pressure FYI Q Calibration mode see PCCU32 help files 4 14 Onboard Calibration Overview The Calibration mode enables the calibration of the analog inputs analog outputs and pulse inputs 4 14 1 Hold Mode When calibrating PCCU32 will instruct the G4 EX to ignore live values for the period of time that the G4 EX is being calibrated This prevents real time G4 EX calculations from being effected during calibration During this time the G4 EX uses the last known value at the time Calibration mode was entered This is referred to as a Hold mode To exit Hold mode 1 Exit Calibration mode 2 Unplug the PCCU cable at the G4 EX connector 4 14 2 Calibrating Onboard Analog Inputs The G4 EX comes standard with two analog inputs on the G4 EX board As the user enters Calibration mode the G4 EX moves into Hold mode and displays the current values When the user selects the Update checkbox the Current Values section will display the current values continuously When different analog inputs are selected their assigned register numbers are displayed on the top of the screen Follow the instructions in the PCCU32 help files for specific software steps Generally the user will need perform the following procedures If the user intends to use a 4 20 mA transmitter on the TIP analog input please refer to
140. STER DESCRIPTION USAGE 252 0 N2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 1 CO2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 2 H2S Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 3 H20 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 4 HE Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 5 C1 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 6 C2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 7 C3 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 8 NC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 9 IC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 10 NC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 11 IC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 12 NC6 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 13 NC7 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 14 NC8 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 15 NC9 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 16 NC10 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 17 O2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 18 CO Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 19 H2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 20 AR Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 21 AIR Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 22 C6PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 23 BTU Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 24 GF Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 25 NEOC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write C 14 13 Therms Slave Stream 3 Float Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE Page 104 2104349 001 rev AB
141. Static Pressure SP Calibration 4 19 4 13 4 Differential Pressure DP Calibration 4 21 4 13 5 Calibrating Static Pressure 4 22 4 13 6 Calibrating Differential Pressure 4 24 4 14 Onboard I O Calibration 2 4 25 4 14 1 Hold Mode vunne ae KG 4 25 4 14 2 Calibrating Onboard Analog 4 25 4 14 3 Onboard Pulse and Digital 0 0 4 26 4 15 Zero 4 27 4 15 1 Static Pressure enint 4 27 415 2 iet desee has 4 27 4 16 RTD Calibration and 4 27 4 16 1 Step by Step 4 28 4 16 2 Calibrating RTD Temperature 4 29 417 Changing the Orifice Plate iere 4 29 4 17 1 Taking Meter Run Out of Service Simplex Fitting 4 29 4 17 2 Leaving Meter Run In Service Procedure Senior Fitting 4 30 5 0 TROUBLESHOOTING 5 4 5 1 SEE T 5 1 5 1 1 Troubleshooting
142. Stream Component Read Write 105 42 STREAM NUMBER Read Write 105 43 STREAM TIME Read Write C 13 7 Therms Master Stream 4 Float Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 106 0 N2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 1 CO2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 2 H2S Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 3 H20 Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 4 HE Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 5 C1 Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 6 C2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 7 C3 Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 8 NC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 9 IC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 10 NC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 11 IC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 12 NC6 Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 13 NC7 Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 14 NC8 Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 15 NC9 Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 16 NC10 Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 17 02 Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 18 CO Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 19 H2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 20 AR Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 21 AIR Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 22 C6PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 23 BTU Btu Stream Component Read Write Page C 94 2104349 001 rev AB 13 8 1 1 Stream Id Bits B
143. TD probe with 10 of cable optional lengths are 15 25 30 40 and 50 e One 1 thermowell with 34 npt threads optional threads are gt and 1 e Nylon tie wraps 2 2 5 2 Materials Not Supplied e Customer must specify thermowell U length e Teflon tape 2 2 5 3 Step by Step Instructions 1 Install the thermowell into the meter run see Figure 2 5 The power should be removed from the G4 EX before caution S performing any field wiring 2 Using snap ring pliers adjust the probe length so that it is spring loaded against the bottom of the thermowell 3 Screw the probe connector into the thermowell Figure 2 5 Thermowell Installation into the Meter Run 4 Atthe G4 EX remove the plug from the Explosion Proof RTD hub and screw the adapter bushing into the hub 5 Remove the nut from the water tight cord connector Leave the nylon sealing ring in place 6 Insert the wires through the cord connector and continue through the adaptor bushing into the enclosure see Figure 2 6 7 Screw the cord connector into the adaptor bushing and tighten 8 Inside of the G4 EX enclosure begin by disconnecting the connector plug from the RTD connection J8 to begin field wiring 2104349 001 rev AB Page 2 7 DRAIN MRE RTD SHLD fe MITE VARE OUT f WHITE WIRE BLACK WIRE BLACK WIRE QUT 2 2 6 RTD Probe Wiring 9 Using the supplied wiring in
144. Tube Register Cross 52 C 10 6 Tube String Registers 0 C 53 C 10 7 Tube Last Calculation Period Analysis Registers Floating Point C 53 C 10 8 Tube Archive Registers Read Only C 54 C 10 9 Tube Log Period Registers C 54 C 10 10 Tube Daily Registers riter re recep i C 55 C 10 11 Tube Event Registers C 57 10 12 3 Tube R6eglsters munn annens dd tiere C 57 C 10 13AGA 3 Float 58 10 14 3 String 60 C 10 15AGA 3 Int32 Registers niit edet ied iie dai in C 60 AGA 7 Tube Application Register 61 C 11 1 Tube Byte Registers 2 mun Lacie rettet C 61 C 11 2 Tube 16 Bit Integer 64 C 11 3 Tube 32 Bit Integer 66 C 11 4 Tube Floating Point 66 C 11 5 Tube Register Cross 4 69 C 11 6 Tube String Registers C 70 C 11 7 Tube Last Calculation Period Analysis Registers Floating Point C 70 C 11 8 Tube Archive Registers Re
145. Use default Role Based Access Control credentials Default Role Based Access Control Usename Default Role Based Access Control Password Figure 3 25 System Setup Dialog Box Security Log To track access to Totalflow G4 devices a security log is kept that indicates the date and time when user logs in the user name the port where the access was made and the actions taken before logout Log entries are also generated when security file is downloaded and or processed Additionally the results of applying the configurations will also be logged every time new security file is downloaded This tab is available in Advanced and Expert view modes see Figure 3 26 2104349 001 rev AB Page 3 21 TOTALFLOW amp Communications i Totalflow Totalflow USB MMI Serial COMO TF Remote COM1 Spare 2 amp LevelMaster amp Coriolis Interface I O Interface amp Flow Measurement amp SUCOR 1 amp SUCOR 2 g SUNVCONE 1 Display Holding Registers Operations PID Control 1 Analysis Trend File Trend System PID Control 2 Valve Control Station Setup Applications App Licensing Selectable Units Setup Resources System Log Se Registry 05 18 10 09 42 51 1 Register Write 10 80 0 05 18 10 09 42 51 Register Write 10 80 0 05 18 10 09 42 51 Register Write 10 80 0 05 18 10 09 43 12 Register Write 10 83 0 06 02 10 08 15 18 Registe
146. Voltage Range on Input 0 5 VDC to 15 VDC Maximum Frequency Input 100 Hz 50 duty cycle with de bounce enabled 20 kHz 50 duty cycle with de bounce disabled Input Specifications e Dry Contact form A Open Collector or Active Voltage e Minimum contact resistance to activate input 10000 e Voltage threshold to deactivate the input 3 1V referenced to GND terminal e Voltage threshold to activate the input 0 5V referenced to GND terminal e Conductor pairs must be shielded to prevent spurious signals Typical DI Point Schematic Typical Point Schem atic DI SIG XINPUT SENSE DEBOUNCE SELECT GND Figure 1 8 Typical DI Point Schematic Page 1 14 2104349 001 rev AB DI Connection Examples FIELD WARING SS SSS ON BOARD CIRCUITRY POINT CONNECTIONS x INPUT gt SENSE 7L COUPLER 5 SWITCH I I SIG gt sic gt SIG gt I I I i DEBOUNCE SELECT GND pn me mi MEE END J GND OR TYPICAL VOLTAGE INPUT FIELD 7 T ON BOARD CIRCUITRY FIELD WIRING 1 15 VDC MAX SIG sis 3 INPUT SENSE 0 5 MIN FIELD DEVICE DEBOUNCE SELECT COMMON GND GND EEE ESSERE n Figure 1 9 DI Connection Example 1 2 3 3 Digital Output The G4 EX provides one digital output 12 VDC or 24 VDC max as a means to control external equipment When conn
147. Yes No Yes Tap Type ue Yes No No Yes Temperature Base Tb 60 0000 Degrees F Yes Yes Yes Yes Viscosity 0 0103 Centipoises Yes Yes No Yes Z of Air at Base Condition 0 9996 No Yes No Yes Fixed Cd 6 No Yes No Yes Barometric Pressure 14 73 PSIA Yes Yes Yes Yes K Factor Vol of Gas Per Pulse 1 0 No No Yes No 3 6 7 Alarm Limits The user has the ability to set the G4 EX alarm limits for the parameters listed in Table 3 4 There are many purposes for setting these limits i e controlling well output or sending digital signals Table 3 4 Alarm Limits AGA 3 AGA 3 Parameter Default Value Units 1985 1992 AGA 7 ISO 5167 Configurable Dp High Limit 2047 9688 In H20 Yes Yes N A Yes DP Low Limit 0 In H20 Yes Yes N A Yes Flow Rate High Limit 1 000 000 SCF Hr Yes Yes Yes Yes Flow Rate Low Limit 0 SCF Hr Yes Yes Yes Yes RTD High Limit 420 Degrees F Yes Yes Yes Yes RTD Low Limit 0 Degrees F Yes Yes Yes Yes SP High Limit 2047 9688 PSIA Yes Yes Yes Yes In NE Vol High ACF N A Yes Yes Yes Uncorrected Vol Low ACF N A Yes Ves Yes Limit Page 3 32 2104349 001 rev AB 3 6 8 Reset Volume When the user resets the volume accumulator the G4 EX will Store time date and previous accumulated partial calc period volumes into the historical record file Zero the remaining partial calc period accumulations Complete all computations for the present flow file daily records
148. a dedicated port for RS 232 local communications This is a plug type port and will connect to an internal PCCU connector or an Explosion Proof External PCCU connector Page 1 12 2104349 001 rev AB For more information on the Explosion Proof PCCU connector see the corresponding section Additionally for the internal PCCU connector see the section under Optional Equipment in this chapter COM 1 Port Remote communication wiring for Port 1 is handled using the J19 connector and the SW1 communication switch Com 2 Port Remote communication wiring for Port 2 is handled using the J20 connector and the SW2 communication switch The XFC G4 6200 6201EX G4 EX is approved for installation WARNING in Classified Potential Hazardous Locations where an explosive atmosphere may be present Follow precautions and requirements for installation of equipment according to the certification drawing indicated on the device s nametag and National and Local Electrical Codes J6 DPI J5 DO AI2 504 Jumper Pint lo Pin 2 for DOUT Uses J12 Jumper Jumper Pin 2 to Pin 3 for Al2 Jumper Pin1 to Pin 2 for Al Jumper Pin 2 to Pin 3 for DOUT2 IO Expansion Connector J9 Terminates RS 485 Interfaces with additional VO on COMM1 mounted on an expansion board J19 COMM1 RTD Probe NO EXPANSION J2 Security Switch USB Port PCCU connector 420 COMM2 123456789 Reset Button
149. ad C 71 1159 Tube Dally C 72 C 11 10 Tube Event Registers C 73 C 11 11AGA 7 Tube Byte C 74 11 12AGA 7 Float Registers d nire m nete edle C 75 C 11 13AGA 7 String Registers emnes 77 11 14 7 Int32 Registers c conoce terere 77 XMV Interface Application C 78 C 12 1 XMV Application Register 85 Therms Master Application 86 13 1 Therms Master Btu Byte 86 C 13 2 Therms Master Btu Integer C 87 C 13 3 Therms Master Btu Float Registers C 88 C 13 4 Therms Master Stream 1 Float C 90 C 13 5 Therms Master Stream 2 Float C 91 vi C 14 C 15 C 13 6 Therms Master Stream 3 Float C 92 C 13 7 Therms M
150. ad Only SCF 7 27 Current uncorrected flow rate Read Only ACF Hour 7 28 Current contract day Read Only ACF uncorrected volume 7 29 Accumulated uncorrected Read Only ACF volume 7 30 Yesterday s uncorrected Read Only ACF volume 7 31 Corrected flow rate high limit Read Write scaled per Units scale selection see 6 4 7 32 Corrected flow rate low limit Read Write scaled per Units scale selection see 6 4 7 33 Last calculated corrected Read Only units scaled per Units scale i volume selection see 6 3 7 34 Last calculated uncorrected Read Only units scaled per Units scale volume selection see 6 2 7 35 Last flow period pulse counts Read Only counts 7 36 Last Calc Ap PSIA Read Only 7 37 Last Calc Tf Deg F Read Only 7 38 Last Calc actual volume ACF Read Only Page C 76 2104349 001 rev AB ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 7 39 Last Calc Fpv Read Only Last Calc Pressure 2540 Correction Factor Fps Read Only Last Calc Temperature fA Correction Factor Fts Read Only Last Calc heating value 7 42 BTU SCF Read Only 7 43 Last Calc Specific Gravity Read Only 744 DP ACF Percent High for Read Only Day 7 45 DP ACF Percent Low for Day Read Only C 11 13 AGA 7 String Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 8 0 Corrected Rate Units String Note 1 8 1 Corrected Volume Units String Note 1 8 2 Uncorrected Rate Units String Note 1 8 3 Uncorrec
151. ad Only mole 10 6 Last Calc Ethane Read Only mole 10 7 Last Calc Propane Read Only mole 10 8 Last Calc Normal Butane Read Only mole 10 9 Last Calc Iso Butane Read Only mole 96 10 10 Last Calc Normal Pentane Read Only mole 96 10 11 Last Calc Iso Pentane Read Only mole 96 10 12 Last Calc Normal Hexane Read Only mole 96 10 13 Last Calc Normal Heptane Read Only mole 96 10 14 Last Calc Normal Octane Read Only mole 96 10 15 Last Calc Normal Nonane Read Only mole 96 10 16 Last Calc Normal Decane Read Only mole 96 10 17 Last Calc Oxygen Read Only mole 96 10 18 Last Calc Carbon Monoxide Read Only mole 96 10 19 Last Calc Hydrogen Read Only mole 96 10 20 Last Calc Argon Read Only mole 96 10 21 Last Calc Air Read Only mole 96 10 22 Last Calc Heavy Hydrocarbons Read Only mole 96 10 23 Last Calc Heat Content 4 70 2104349 001 rev ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 10 24 Last Calc Specific Gravity Read Only C 11 8 Tube Archive Registers Read Only The following registers access historical data records or record items For all tube archive registers register value 0 refers to the most recent record 1 refers to the next most recent record 2 refers to the next oldest record The oldest record is referred to by register number MAX RECORDS 1 C 11 8 1 Tube Log Period Registers ARRAY DESCRIPTION USAGE 200 Log Period Stati
152. ad Write 15 2 1 Schedule Stop Time Uint32 Read Write 15 2 2 Schedule Cycle Interval Uint32 Read Write 15 2 3 Schedule Duration Uint32 Read Write 15 2 4 Number of Polls Uint32 Read Write 16 2 5 Number of Errors Uint32 Read Write 16 2 6 Number of Fall Behinds Uint32 Read Write 16 2 7 Number of Initializations Uint32 Read Write 16 2 8 Modbus Host Poll Loop Time Uint32 Read Write 2 9 Modbus Host Poll Loop Min Time Uint32 Read Write 2 10 Modbus Host Poll Loop Max Time Uint32 Read Write 2 11 Number of Interrupts Uint32 Read Write 2 12 Number of Received Characters Uint32 Read Write 2 13 Number of Transmitted Characters Uint32 Read Write 2 14 Port Status Uint32 Read 3 0 Modbus Directory String Read Write 17 3 1 Modem Dial String String Read Write 3 2 Modem Initialization String String Read Write 3 3 Serial Comm Port Name String Read Write 3 4 TCP IP Address String Read Write 3 5 PassThru Second Port String Read Write 4 0 Request Response Timing DO Register Read Write 19 5 0 Number of supported protocols Byte Read Only 19 5 1 X Protocol Enumerations Byte Read Only 19 6 1 X Protocol Descriptions String Read Only 19 C 7 1 Communication Application Register Notes Zz IIs Use only as directed by Totalflow support 0 5 232 1 RS 485 2 RS 422 64 Modem 0 1200 1 2400 2 4800 3 9600 4 19200 5 38400 6 57600 7 115200 Only 5 7 or 8 Data bits supporte
153. ad Write 18 Page C 84 2104349 001 rev AB REGISTER DESCRIPTION TYPE ACCESS NOTE 240 0 X XMV 6 Display X Interval Byte Read Write 16 241 0 X XMV 6 Display X Top Line String Read Write 17 242 0 X XMV 6 Display X Bottom Line String Read Write 17 243 0 X XMV 6 Display X Format String Read Write 18 244 0 X XMV 7 Display X Interval Byte Read Write 16 245 0 X XMV 7 Display X Top Line String Read Write 17 246 0 X XMV 7 Display X Bottom Line String Read Write 17 247 0 7 Display X Format String Read Write 18 248 0 X XMV 8 Display X Interval Byte Read Write 16 249 0 X XMV 8 Display X Top Line String Read Write 17 250 0 X XMV 8 Display X Bottom Line String Read Write 17 251 0 X XMV 8 Display X Format String Read Write 18 255 255 Number of XMV s Byte Read Write 19 C 12 1 XMV Application Register Notes XMV Modbus Address is the address of the Modbus slave Each Modbus operation captures 3 register values The XMV Modbus Register is the address of the first value to read The read operation will capture the three consecutive register values beginning with this register Registers in array 202 control the scan triggers in array 203 When a register in array 202 is ENABLED 1 the corresponding register in array 203 is TRIGGERED 1 When a register in array 202 is DISABLED 0 the corresponding register in array
154. ae Netware CIRCUITRY OR GND TERMINAL SELECTABLE Figure 1 13 Al Example Connections 1 2 4 Explosion Proof Multivariable Transducer EXIMV The EXIMV is an explosion proof version of the factory calibrated Smart Integral Multivariable Transducer The EXIMV is characterized over temperature so that any changes occurring in the EXIMV or in the electronics can be compensated Providing the primary measurement capability for the G4 EX see Figure 1 14 the circuitry and characterization information are stored in the raw sensor board EXIMV specifications are discussed in Table 1 6 The unit is designed to provide EMI RFI protection of the low level signals and to protect the circuitry from other environmental effects Page 1 18 2104349 001 rev AB CONNECTOR 144572 MAX 0 000 1 988 MAX Figure 1 14 Explosion Proof Multivariable Transducer EXIMV Temperature Limits Table 1 6 Explosion Proof EXIMV Specifications Compensated 20 F to 140 F 29 C to 60 Operational 40 F to 140 F 40 C to 60 Storage 40 F to 185 F 40 C to 85 Resolution 24 Bit A D conversion 0 000012 FS 0 0012 FS effective signal resolution Mounting Spec Change from perpendicular front to back around X axis lt 0 5 URL Static Pressure Accuracy Ambient Te
155. ags Read Write see note 4 0 43 Aux contact 1 re open interval Read Write 0 44 Aux contact 1 current state Read Only 0 45 Aux contact 1 manual set Read Write 0 46 Aux contact 2 re open interval Read Write 0 47 Aux contact 2 current state Read Only 0 48 Aux contact 2 manual set Read Write 0 49 Remote Sense Action Read Write 0 50 Remote Sense State Read Only 0 51 Events Available Write Canadian Event Log 0 52 Aux Contact 1 select bits low byte Read Write see note 5 0 53 Aux Contact 2 select bits low byte Read Write see note 5 0 54 Hold tube analog inputs Read Write 0 55 ae pressura Read Write 0 absolute 1 gauge oss Cam 0 57 ee of a2dfail in Read Only 0 58 Vol period complete flag Read Only 0 59 Log period complete flag Read Only 0 60 Day period complete flag Read Only 0 61 Disable tube check pointing Read Write 1 disable 0 62 2 picterols Read Write 1 stop logging 0 63 227 Read Write 1 stop logging 0 64 Log gage pressure Read Write 0 log absolute 1 log 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 63 ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE gage if gage transducer Log Dp Check with pressure mU 0 65 applied to Sp Read Write 1 stop logging 0 66 Stream source application Read Write Enable Disable Slip Second 0 67 Adjustment Read Only C 11 1 1 Tube Byte Register Usage Notes Super Compressibility Method 0 19 with FIXED FT AND FP VALUES 1 NX
156. al installation should look similar to Figure 2 11 2104349 001 rev AB Page 2 11 The enclosure mounting brackets and fastening hardware are supplied with the unit I 11 00 7 Mounting Bracket 60 16 00 17 20 Figure 2 11 6270 OEU Wall Mount Installation Step by Step Instructions 1 Using the instructions supplied with the mounting kit attach the bracket to the back of the enclosure unit 2 Prepare the wall surface for mounting and mount the enclosure to the wall 2 2 8 Battery Pack Installation If the 6270 OEU is used see Figure 2 12 and is configured to include a battery pack use the following procedures The battery is packed and shipped separately from the 6270 OEU Before installation inspect the power cables that are located inside the 6270 OEU where they terminate on the battery pack and the connector for breakage Before beginning review the procedures and the materials required for installation Page 2 12 2104349 001 rev AB To extend the life of the battery pack fully charge the POSU battery prior to installation Systems using solar panels may FYI E notfully charge the battery Charging the battery fast will remove the oxide buildup and will improve the life of the battery caution S Do not over charge the battery pack DOOR To G4 EX Fin2 Solar Panel To Soler Panel To G4 EX Jl 6 Fin 1
157. alve 11 Click on the Enter Pressure Check Value 12 Connect Calibration Standard to the calibration test port 13 Pressure to the next preferred verification pressure 14 When the current reading stabilizes enter the pressure value from the calibration source Remember to add the barometric pressure if the pressure type is Absolute Click the OK button 15 Repeat steps 11 through 14 for each pressure check value 16 When all the static pressure markers have been set determine if calibration is required If no calibration is required return the manifold to service before exiting Calibration mode D a For additional information regarding Static Pressure FYI 0 Calibration Checks see the PCCU32 help files Page 4 20 2104349 001 rev AB LOW SIDE LEFT DIFFERENTIAL HIGH SIDE RIGHT DIFFERENTIAL LOW SIDE HIGH SIDE EQUALIZER EQUALIZER VALVE V ALVE VENT TO LUN ATMOSPHERE VALVE PORT DOWNSTREAM UPSTREAM TAP VALVE TAP VALVE Figure 4 12 Calibration Diagram 4 13 4 Differential Pressure DP Calibration Checks As discussed in section 4 13 3 it is recommended that checks of the differential pressure DP be performed prior to and directly following calibration A minimum of three differential pressure markers should be set however the user may enter as many DP pressure markers as they prefer Recording too many markers may cause the G4 EX to overwrite existing older events Only the last five
158. am 1 each CD ROM with Specified Flash and Configuration Files A 2 I O Daughter Card Specifications This card expands the capabilities of the explosion proof flow computer by adding an additional 12 points of fixed analog and digital I O points Specifications for the I O daughter card are as follows e Analog Points 3 each 0 10V 10K ohm impedance analog inputs 1 each 0 20 mA SINK mode analog output e Digital Points 4 each Digital inputs pulse inputs 4 each Digital outputs optically isolated type 1A switches capable of switching 200 mA of 48 VDC or 40 VAC A 3 Installation If the unit is currently operating data must be collected from the unit and the configuration files saved prior to beginning this procedure 2104349 001 rev AB Page 1 Termination Board J21 PCCU Connector I O Daughter Card Sa A 3 1 Upgrading the Flash 1 Open PCCU32 but do not connect 2 Once PCCU32 has loaded click on the 32 Bit Loader icon on the window s main toolbar The 32 Bit Loader screen will display Page A 2 2104349 001 rev AB 5 ial xi Operate View Window Package Help igi xl E UT evi rMultiple File Package Select G BVO ATPA ALL DV8S Staaina 21 04159 007 G4 6200E US 10101342104159 007EX Package 2104159 007EX exfc z C NGC C XFC C XRC Windows CE Update
159. am Component Read Write 254 21 AIR Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 22 C6PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 23 BTU Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 24 GF Btu Stream Component Read Write 254 25 NEOC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write C 15 8 Therms Slave Analysis Trend File ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 255 0 N2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 1 CO2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 2 H2S Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 3 H20 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 4 HE Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 5 C1 Btu Stream Component Read Write Page C 112 2104349 001 rev AB ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 255 6 C2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 7 C3 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 8 NC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 9 IC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 10 NC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 11 IC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 12 NC6 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 13 NC7 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 14 NC8 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 15 NC9 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 16 NC10 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 17 O2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 18 CO Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 19 H2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 20 AR Btu Stream Component Rea
160. are e RS 232 Communications port programmable e RS 485 Communications port programmable e RS 422 Communications port programmable The radio modem may be powered one of two ways always on or switched The user s specific system set up will determine what steps are needed to power the radio modem When switching power to a radio with Inhibit Sleep mode the communication 1 port or switched power line will move to the radio s Inhibit Sleep mode input Power out will move to the radios Page 5 14 2104349 001 rev AB It is important that the user disconnect the G4 EX battery CAUTION cable from the G4 EX board START Verify unit ID Security Code and Protocol are Correct Verify jumper and terminal amp pin wiring are correct Transceiver Supply voltage Test Does Unit Respond to Host Comm Request Transceiver Supply voltage within Specs Investigate Transceiver Issues Investigate Power Supply Issues Figure 5 4 Voltage supply from unit gt 11 9 VDC Substitute Communication Test Cable Unit Respond to Host Comm Request Contact ls ls Totalfiow Communication Communication Technical RS 232 RS 485 Support RS 232 Communication Test RS 485 Communication Test Does Unit Respond Transceiver Comm Check Test Passed Figure 5 7 Communicat
161. are executed when the corresponding register in array 19 is read The registers in array 20 contain operation codes specifying the array operation to be performed The registers in arrays 21 and 22 contain the operands of the array operations The result of the operation is returned in the registers in array 19 The following operation codes are supported 1 Page C 26 2104349 001 rev AB e 14 15 16 17 18 19 70 Array Addition 71 Array Linear Average 72 Array Square Root Average 73 Array Minimum 74 Array Maximum 80 Copy Array 81 Move Array Register 255 0 contains the number of Periodic Operations It determines the size of arrays 0 through 6 and 23 Register 255 1 contains the number of Math Operations It determines the size of arrays 7 through 10 and 24 Register 255 2 contains the number of Bit Operations It determines the size of arrays 11 through 14 and 25 Register 255 3 contains the number of Compare Operations It determines the size of arrays 15 through 18 and 26 Register 255 4 contains the number of Array Operations It determines the size of arrays 19 through 22 and 27 These registers only exist if 255 5 thru 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 and 27 are set to a 1 or Yes Select Operations are executed when the corresponding register in array 32 is read The registers in array 29 contain the value that is used to
162. ased on value in App 115 17 0 Read Normal Not 0 Fault DE Stream 1 Alarm string based on value in App 115 24 0 Read Normal Not 0 Fault Stream 2 Alarm string based on value in App 115 25 0 Read Normal Not 0 Fault da Stream 3 Alarm string based on value in app 115 26 0 Read Normal Not 0 Fault Stream 4 Alarm string based on value 115 27 0 Read Normal Not 0 Fault Analyzer Mode string based on value in App 101 59 1 114 5 Hold 2 SingleCycle 4 Abort 5 Read Calibrate 6 StartUp 1146 Helium Psi string based on value in App 115 11 0 Read Normal Not 0 Low 1147 Psi string based on value in App 115 12 0 Normal Read Not 0 Low 14 1 Therms Staus Btu Integer Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 115 0 Set Next State 3061 Read Write 115 1 Auto Calibration during startup Read Write 115 2 Auto Peak Detection during startup Read Write 115 3 Auto Run after startup Read Write 115 4 Number of Calibration cycles Read Write Page C 98 2104349 001 rev AB ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 115 5 Number of Calibration cycles to Average Read Write 115 6 Low Carrier Mode Read Write 115 7 Low Power Mode Read Write 115
163. aster Stream 4 Float Registers 94 C 13 8 Therms Master Btu Var Integer C 95 C 13 9 Therms Master Btu Var Int32 95 13 10 Master Slave Data Trigger 96 C 13 11 Therms Master Current Stream Float Registers C 96 C 13 12Therms Master Slave Var Integer Registers C 97 C 13 13Therms Master Stream Time String 98 C 13 14Therms Master Slave Var Integer Registers C 98 Therms Display Registers Pe m iti ed edades 98 C 14 1 Therms Staus Btu Integer Registers 22 22 01 C 98 14 2 Therms Status Float Registers sssssse enm C 99 C 14 3 Therms Stream SN Int32 Registers 100 C 14 4 Therms Master Component Xref Index 100 C 14 5 Therms Master Btu Byte Registers 101 C 14 6 Therms Master Component Xrefed Index Registers 101 C 14 7 Therms Slave Var Modbus Address Registers
164. ath the Do Phone Update button Read them from top to bottom see Figure 3 29 Credit Key License Utility Key Credits OK xil Credit Type Amount Cancel Help COXNIST 4 Do Phone Update Update pp 28494 21253 Load 1053 525 SAP Serial 10 Credit Key Serial 12 EJ 7 En Figure 3 29 Application Credit Key Entry Screen The representative will give the user four codes to enter in the provided fields After the codes have been entered from top to bottom click the Update button see Figure 3 30 10 After the button has been clicked three more codes are displayed directly beneath the Do Phone Update button The Totalflow representative will ask the user to read the codes to verify that the credits have been properly written to the credit key 11 When completed click the Update button 2104349 001 rev AB Page 3 25 Credit Key License Utility Sj Key Credits OK Credit Amount Cancel et Help CO2 NIST 4 Hydrocarbon DP 2 Do Phone Update Upd 11470 41750 Load 35948 SAP Serial 10 Credit Key Serial 3 12 Q di Fr 1 lel x Figure 3 30 Application Credit Verification Codes 3 5 4 Transferring Credits to the G4 EX from the Credit Key Credits can be transferred to the G4 EX The user selects the type of credits and the amount of those credits t
165. auto populate Click the Send button 4 Next the user will need to locate the Totalflow TCP selection under Communications in the PCCU32 tree view see Figure 3 9 Once selected the user is taken to the Setup tab In this tab the user needs to set the Protocol parameter value to Totalflow TCP When done click the Send button 2 Entry E ini x 2 Operate View Window E TOTALFLOW E Communications Totalflow TCP Totalflow USB MMI Serial COMO TF Remote COMI Spare 2 LevelMaster Coriolis Interface 8 10 Interface E Flow Measurement SUCOR 1 SUCOR 2 H SUYCONE 1 Display Holding Registers E Operations PID Control 1 Analysis Trend File E Trend System PID Control 2 Valve Control Ready 181 ABOm OF 24407 4 Totalflow TCP otalflow TCP Response Delay G3 Translator Enable Reread Monitor Print Screen Save Send Close E Polls 24 Errors 0 Connectedto 2 3 9 Communication Setup Page 3 8 2104349 001 rev AB 5 While still in PCCU32 the user needs to click the Operate selection on the main PCCU32 toolbar From the drop down menu select Setup From the fly out menu select System Setup Within the System Setup dialog box see Figure 3 10 click the TCP IP radio button Next enter the network ID or IP address for the meter in the corresponding parameter field The network ID is
166. ay the daily flow record is the same Entry reflects averages accumulated over a 70 minute time period 15 minutes plus 55 minutes Forward Clock Change Crossing an Hourly Boundary Forces a log period entry for part of the hour that has accumulated since the last hourly entry The G4 EX then advances to the newly defined data flow record boundary and begins maintaining the balance of the day s data in a newly defined boundary Example If the present time is 4 55 pm and the clock is changed to 5 05 pm of the same day the entry reflects only a 55 minute average accumulation A new flow record is then written This period is also based on a 55 minute accumulation Backward Clock Change Crossing an Hourly Boundary Hourly entry is made for part of the hour that has accumulated since making the last hourly entry This is the same as a Forward Clock Change Crossing an Hourly Boundary The G4 EX advances to a new day s data flow record and maintains the balance of the day s data in a new record Example If the present time is 5 05 pm and the clock is changed to 4 55 pm of the same day the log period entry reflects only a five minute average accumulation A new flow record is then written This log period is based on a 60 minute accumulation A backward clock change uses two records to maintain data integrity This assures that previously recorded data is lg not overwritten FYI 2 If it is necessary to make small backward time changes of E
167. ay Annunciators Since primary function of the G4 EX is to provide complete volume and operational records it is important to indicate unusual or alarm conditions as they occur This is supported on the LCD in the Annunciator display area shown in Figure 1 2 In the G4 EX computer the status and alarm indicators are user programmable Table 1 3 identifies the default annunciator locations Please consult the PCCU32 help files for additional instructions on programming the annunciators Whenever an alarm is indicated the G4 EX records it in the appropriate log period flow record These are automatically retrieved when data is collected Visual alarms and status codes are described in Table 1 4 14 characters across Figure 1 2 Liquid Crystal Display LCD and Indicators Table 1 3 Default Annunciator Locations Annunciator Application A1 Measurement Tube 1 A2 CIM 0 A3 Valve Control 4 2 5 6 Local COMO AT System A8 TF Remote COM1 Page 1 6 2104349 001 rev AB Table 1 4 G4 EX Status and Alarm Description Indicator Description System at Low Lithium Battery Alarm When ae low lithium is displayed lithium battery voltage is not sufficient to maintain SRAM data A new lithium battery measures approximately 3 6 VDC Display Application 1 A number represents the Display Group number currently being displayed The displayed item s val
168. bration 1 72432 AI3 J1 5 6 8 Disconnect and remove power externally from the unit 9 Perform field wiring following the diagrams in Chapter 3 If the internal PCCU connector is being reinstalled field wiring must be done prior to installation DB 9 Connector to Termination Board Mounted on back pi GS DHE 0 DI2 S S DI3 Anc I O Daughter Card ats ano A20 S At26 Q 18130 llaout 1 A A 3 5 Internal PCCU Connector Reassembly If Previously Installed 1 Connect the cable from the PCCU assembly to the Termination board 2104349 001 rev AB Page 5 2 Reinstall the four mounting standoffs This will secure the Termination board to the device A 3 6 Implementation A 3 6 1 Generic Wiring Diagram This drawing does not completely illustrate the installation methods required for hazardous locations Prior to any WARNING installation Classified Hazardous Location verify the installation methods by the Control Drawing referenced on the product s name tag and national and local codes DB 9 Connector to XFCEX Board Expansion Connector J2 Mounted on Back XFCEX Board Ref The DI PI inputs will accept sensor inputs which meet the IEC 60947 5 6 electrical
169. c Pressure Floating Point PSIA 201 Log Period Diff Pressure Floating Point Inches H2O 202 Log Period Temperature Floating Point Deg F 204 Log Period Extension Floating Point 205 Log Period Volume Floating Point MCF 206 Log Period Heating Value Floating Point MMBTU 207 Log Period Flow time Unsigned Long seconds 208 Log Period Total time Unsigned Long seconds 209 Log Period Alarm bits 32 bits see note 1 250 Log Period Record See note 2 C 11 8 2 Tube Log Period Usage Notes 1 Log Period Alarm Bits 0x00080000 524288 0x00040000 262144 0x00020000 131072 Flow rate high limit Flow rate low limit Temperature high limit 0x00010000 65536 Temperature low limit 0x00008000 32768 Static pressure high limit 0x00004000 16384 Static pressure low limit 0x00002000 8192 Acf high limit 0x00001000 4096 Acf low limit 0x00000800 2048 Zero flow 0x00000400 1024 Back flow 0x00000200 512 Remote sense DI 0x00000100 256 contact out DO 0x00000080 128 temperature channel A D over range 0x00000040 64 static pressure channel A D over range 0x00000020 32 differential pressure channel A D over range 0x00000010 16 low charger 0x00000008 8 low lithium battery 0x00000004 4 analyzer data not received 0x00000002 2 NX19 methane 1 gravity 0 method 0x00000001 1 calculation error 2 2 09 Period Record definition 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 71 typedef struct
170. caled per Units scale corrected volume selection see 6 3 7 8 Accumulated corrected Read Only units scaled per Units scale volume selection see 6 3 7 9 Yesterday s corrected volume Read Only units scaled per Units scale selection see 6 3 7 10 Current uncorrected flow rate Read Only units scaled per Units scale selection see 6 2 Today s contract day Read Only units scaled per Units scale 7 11 uncorrected volume selection see 0 42 7 12 Accumulated uncorrected Read Only units scaled per Units scale volume selection see 6 2 7 13 Yesterday s uncorrected Read Only units scaled per Units scale 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 75 ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE volume selection see 6 2 7 14 Accumulated uncorrected Read Only units scaled per Units scale volume selection see 6 2 7 15 Pressure base Read Write PSIA 7 16 Temperature base Read Write Degrees F 7 17 Fixed F aux Read Write 7 18 C prime test value Read Only 7 19 Last calculated C prime Read Only 7 20 Last flow period actual Read Only ACF volume 7 21 Last flow period average Ap Read Only PSIA regardless of flow 7 22 Last flow period flow seconds Read Only seconds 7 23 Current flow rate Read Only SCF Hour 7 24 Current contract day Read Only SCF corrected volume 7 25 Accumulated corrected Read Only SCF volume 7 26 Yesterday s corrected volume Re
171. can add an external resistor across the analog input pins This places the two resistors in parallel with one another The parallel combination produces an equivalent resistance that is 2104349 001 rev AB Page B 13 less than either of the two resistors alone The value of the equivalent resistance is calculated as shown in the figure below External to Flowmeter Howmeter Onboard 250 ohm mE VCC resistor selected using 2 wire line powered 3 three pin shunt 4 20ma transmitter 1 3 External resistor added R2 across onboard resistor 250 R1 250 Ohm Tu 1 L I R1xR2 _ 250x250 62500 R1 R2 250 250 500 Equivalent Resistance 125 Ohms Page 14 2104349 001 rev AB APPENDIX C G4 EX MODBUS REGISTER MAPS Totalflow G4 devices provide access to application data by numeric tags These numeric tags consist of three values application number array number and register number These three values uniquely identify any accessible application data item These values are commonly expressed as app array register C 1 System Application Registers The format for the register list is app array register The System application is always instantiated in application slot 0 Register Description Type Access Note 0 0 Board Part Number String Read Only 0 1
172. cation Format for the register list is array register description The application number depends on the order of application instantiation Actual array numbers for the Therms Slave application are offset by 100 Low order array numbers are used for the Communication application since the LevelMaster application is derived from a Communication application Refer to the Communication Application Register section C 15 1 Therms Slave Float Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 100 0 N2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 1 CO2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 2 H2S Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 3 H20 Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 4 HE Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 5 C1 Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 6 C2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 7 C3 Btu Stream Component Read Write 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 107 ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 100 8 NC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 9 IC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 10 NC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 11 IC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 12 NC6 Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 13 NC7 Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 14 NC8 Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 15 NC9 Btu Stream Component Read Write 100 16
173. ce Type Absolute Gauge Byte Read Write 8 207 X XMV X 1 Device Type Absolute Gauge Byte Read Write 8 208 0 XMV 1 Factory Units Metric English Byte Read Write 9 208 1 XMV 2 Factory Units Metric English Byte Read Write 9 208 2 XMV 3 Factory Units Metric English Byte Read Write 9 208 3 XMV 4 Factory Units Metric English Byte Read Write 9 208 4 XMV 5 Factory Units Metric English Byte Read Write 9 208 5 XMV 6 Factory Units Metric English Byte Read Write 9 208 6 XMV 7 Factory Units Metric English Byte Read Write 9 208 7 XMV 8 Factory Units Metric English Byte Read Write 9 208 8 XMV 9 Factory Units Metric English Byte Read Write 9 208 X XMV X 1 Factory Units Metric English Byte Read Write 9 209 0 XMV 1 Zero Transducer Float Read Write 10 209 1 XMV 1 Calibration Point 1 Float Read Write 10 Page C 80 2104349 001 rev AB REGISTER DESCRIPTION TYPE ACCESS NOTE 209 2 XMV 1 Calibration Point 2 Float Read Write 10 209 3 XMV 1 Calibration Point 3 Float Read Write 10 209 4 XMV 1 Calibration Point 4 Float Read Write 10 209 5 XMV 1 Calibration Point 5 Float Read Write 10 209 6 XMV 1 Calibration Bias Float Read Write 10 209 14 XMV 1 Calibration Abort Float Write Only 10 209 15 XMV 1 Calibration Complete Float Write Only 10 209 16 XMV 2 Zero Transducer Float Read Write 10 209 17 XMV 2 Calibration Point 1 Float Read W
174. ck the OK button Input pulses are multiplied by the K Factor To have a one to one pulse count user a factor of 1 Please take into consideration that these inputs may have the de bounce enabled or disabled This feature is discussed in the PCCU32 help files and is also turned on or off within PCCU32 CAUTION 4 15 Zero Transducer 4 15 1 During the process of setting pressure markers to determine the need for a calibration of either the static pressure SP or the differential pressure DP the user may conclude that the SP or the DP pressures are out of alignment at exactly the same amount at each pressure marker linear shift When this occurs the user may either recalibrate the G4 EX or they can set the transducer to zero The preferred method is to recalibrate the G4 EX This maintains the G4 EX records in a manner that assures accountability and continuity when other measurement issues arise By using the Zero Transducer command all references to previous pressure markers are non existent eliminating the ability to adjust volumes based on previous markers Using the Zero Transducer capability assumes that the shift is linear This means that at different levels of pressure the caution gt transducer is off by exactly the same amount If this is not the case the user needs to recalibrate the transducer instead Static Pressure The SP can be zeroed without recalibrating If the SP shifts the user can enter a new barometric p
175. criptor Flag Byte Read Only 2 252 0 Holding Array 1 Description String Read Write 252 1 Holding Array 2 Description String Read Write 3 252 2 Holding Array 3 Description String Read Write 3 252 X Holding Array X Description String Read Write 3 253 0 Holding Array 1 Data Type Byte Read Write 4 253 1 Holding Array 2 Data Type Byte Read Write 4 253 2 Holding Array 3 Data Type Byte Read Write 4 253 X Holding Array X Data Type Byte Read Write 4 254 0 Holding Array 1 Persistence Byte Read Write 4 254 1 Holding Array 2 Persistence Byte Read Write 4 254 2 Holding Array 3 Persistence Byte Read Write 4 254 X Holding Array X Persistence Byte Read Write 4 255 0 Holding Array 1 Capacity Uint16 Read Write 5 255 1 Holding Array 2 Capacity Uint16 Read Write 5 255 2 Holding Array 3 Capacity Uint16 Read Write 5 255 X Holding Array X Capacity Uint16 Read Write 5 255 255 Number of Holding Arrays Uint16 Read Write 6 C 4 1 Holding Register Notes 1 The number type and size of the Holding Register arrays are user programmable Page C 12 2104349 001 rev AB Array descriptor flag indicates if the array has descriptor contained in array 252 3 Each Holding Register array can be assigned 24 character name 4 The data type of each Holding Register array is user programmable The following data types are supported 0 32 Bit Floating Point
176. ctor RTD e Input output wires The end caps have precision engineered threading and are susceptible to damage if treated roughly End caps are water tight corrosion resistant and NEMA 4X rated Unauthorized removal of the end caps are protected with a 1 16 countersunk hex head set screw on each end cap Remove power from the device or insure the area is known to be non hazardous before removing any enclosure cover For WARNING further information refer to the certification drawing indicated on the device s nametag and national and local electrical codes Do not attempt to loosen the end cap before loosening the set CAUTION screw Doing so may damage threads on the unit 1 2 1 1 Dimensions Width Unit w o External w External Height Depth PCCU PCCU US 7 87 9 50 11 25 8 34 Page 1 8 2104349 001 rev AB Width Metric 199 90 mm 241 30 mm 285 75 mm 211 84 mm 1 2 1 2 Installation and Weight W EX PCCU Pipe Mounted Direct Mounted ub Weight Connector Depth Depth US 15 65 Ibs 16 35 Ibs 9 69 8 34 Metric 5 84 kg 6 10 kg 246 13 mm 211 84 mm 9 50 7 87 CONDUIT ENTRIES NPT CONDUIT ENTRIES KR P d 01 53 i aa Go 01 84 Sey NPT CONDUIT ENTRIES 1 OPTIONAL EXTERNAL 3 76 PCCU FLAMEPROOF HOUSING
177. d 0 None 1 Even 2 Odd 1 or 2 Stop Bits 0 COMO 1 COM1 2 COM2 1 None 0 4 seconds 1 2 seconds 2 1 seconds 3 Always On Page C 30 2104349 001 rev AB 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 Time of Day 2 Time of Day Cycle 0 32 Bit Totalflow 64 32 Bit 65 16 Bit Word Swapped 66 16 Bit Modicon 68 16 Bit ROS Modulo 10000 Use only as directed by Totalflow support Used by many host protocols MODBUS Host ADP Host ETS Host Appends NULL characters to transmitted packets Prints packets received transmitted Not supported by all protocols To print packets on COMO x 0 19 1 to print on COM1 x 0 19 2 to print on COM3 x 0 19 3 To disable packet dump 0 19 0 Because of the addressing limitations of MODBUS some SCADA systems assign devices to groups To use this feature configure the device s group by setting x 1 7 The SCADA host broadcast writes the current group to x 1 8 Only devices assigned to the current group respond to their slave address Communications Schedule is used to conserve power during times of inactivity Not all protocols maintain communications statistics Some protocols scan directory for request blocks or register maps If the user prefers to share a register map across ports change the protocol directory to point to a common directory By assigning this register to a digital output an oscilloscope can be used to measure protoco
178. d button is also grayed out Calibration In order for the user to perform calibration in addition to Calibration access rights a user must also have read write access to the following applications e System e Flow measurement e subsystem Display application For calibrating wireless I Os the user must have Read Write access to the Wireless application and the Communication Ports application For calibrating the XMV the user must also have Read Write access to the XMV Interface application and the Communication Ports application Collection In order to perform a collection in addition to Collection access rights a user must also have Read access to the System application For collecting tube data the user must have Read access to the Flow Measurement application Page 3 22 2104349 001 rev AB For collecting trend data the user must have Read access to the Trend application For collecting analysis trend data the user must have Read access to the Analysis Trend application For collecting analyzer stream data the user must have Read access to the Analyzer Stream application and the Analyzer Operation application 3 5 Application Licensing Credit Key 3 5 1 Credit Key Driver Installation 3 5 1 1 Step by Step Instructions 1 Plug the USB credit key into an available USB port 2 The Windows operating system will recognize the credit key as new hardware and attempt to install the appro
179. d H20 Bias Read Write ppm 3 44 Live Analysis Gravity Accumulator Read Write 3 45 Live Analysis BTU Accumulator Read Write BTU SCF 3 46 Live Analysis Nitrogen Accumulator Read Write mole 96 3 47 AG lenge Read Write mole 3 48 42 Hydrogen Sunda Read Write mole 3 49 Live Analysis Water Accumulator Read Write mole 3 50 Live Analysis Helium Accumulator Read Write mole 3 51 Live Analysis Methane Accumulator Read Write mole 3 52 Live Analysis Ethane Accumulator Read Write mole 3 53 Live Analysis Propane Accumulator Read Write mole 3 54 Live Analysis Normal Butane Accumulator Read Write mole 3 55 Live Analysis Iso Butane Accumulator Read Write mole 3 56 2 Read Write mole 3 57 Live Analysis Iso Pentane Accumulator Read Write mole 96 3 58 2 Normal HENNE Read Write mole 3 59 M Normal Heptane Read Write mole 3 60 Live Analysis Normal Octane Accumulator Read Write mole 3 61 Fae Read Write mole 3 62 5 Poma DEANE Read Write mole 3 63 Live Analysis Oxygen Accumulator Read Write mole 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 51 ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 3 64 FA NONIUS Read Write mole 3 65 Live Analysis Hydrogen Accumulator Read Write mole 96 3 66 Live Analysis Argon Accumulator Read Write mole 96 3 67 Log Site Code in Event Log 3 68 Valve Control Accumulated Volume Read Write MC
180. d Input 2 5 2 2 5 Standard RTD Probe 2 6 2 2 6 Explosion Proof RTD Probe 2 8 2 2 7 6270 Optional Equipment Unit Installation 2 10 2 2 8 Battery Pack Installation 2 12 2 2 9 Lithium Battery Installation 2 13 2 2 10 Solar Panel Installation tet rtt s 2 14 2 2 11 AC Charging Unit 2 16 2 2 12 Uninterrupted Power Supply UPS to the G4 2 19 G4 EX START UP Luse 3 1 3 1 ONE NE RE 3 1 3 2 PCCU32 Installation and Larssen etab 3 1 3 2 1 Step by Step 000101 3 1 3 3 Establishing Local Communication 3 2 3 3 1 X Connecting to a Local Port via a RS 232 3 2 3 3 2 Connecting To Local USB eene 3 3 3 3 8 Setup of the G4 EX for Bluetooth 3 5 3 34 Setup of the G4 EX for Ethernet Connectivity 3 7 3 4 Setting Up the G4 EX 3 12 SAT DateTime i imn er e tede etd 3 12 3 452 Station Dienerin enei a a E i he o Led 3 13 343 EREE bubs 3 13 Security SYSIOM asic ones
181. d Only 15 0 X Thread Name Array String Read Only 16 0 X Thread in User Mode Float Read Only 17 0 X Thread priority UChar Read Only 18 0 X Thread Start Time Ulnt32 Read Only 19 0 X App info Data Struct Read Only 20 0 X App restart Ulnt32 Read Only 21 0 X App Update String Read Only 22 0 X App Group String Read Only C 1 1 System Application Register Notes 1 Standard instantiation slot table Application Spare Instantiation Slot 255 System App 0 IOS App XFC Display Communications App AGA3 Tube App AGAA Tube App Liquid tube App Trend App RAMS App Valve Control App Holding Registers App Therms Master App XMV App a alk 2104349 001 C 3 Application Instantiation Slot IEC App 13 Therms Slave App 14 LevelMaster App 15 Pump Interface App 16 Obsolete FS2 App 17 Operations App 18 Host Interface App 19 Selectable Units Gas Orifice Tube App 20 Selectable Units Turbine Tube App 21 Instromet Ultrasonic tube App 22 V Cone Tube App 23 TotalSonic Tube App 24 TotalSonic Interface App 25 Units Conversion App 26 Enron Aga3 Gas Orifice Tube App 27 Enron Pulse Input Tube App 28 Test App 29 Selectable units TotalSonic App 30 Pemex Selectab
182. d Write 21 77 1 PID Operation 2 Action Uchar Read Write 21 77 2 PID Operation 3 Action Uchar Read Write 21 77 PID Operation Action Uchar Read Write 21 78 0 PID Operation 1 Output Float Read Write 21 78 1 PID Operation 2 Output Float Read Write 21 78 2 PID Operation 3 Output Float Read Write 21 78 X PID Operation X Output Float Read Write 21 255 0 Number of Periodic Operations Uint16 Read Write 7 255 1 Number of Math Operations Uint16 Read Write 8 255 2 Number of Bit Operations Uint16 Read Write 9 255 3 Number of Compare Operations Uint16 Read Write 10 255 4 Number of Array Operations Uint16 Read Write 11 255 5 Enable Period Descriptors Uint16 Read Write 22 255 6 Enable Math Descriptors Uint16 Read Write 22 255 7 Enable Bit Descriptors Uint16 Read Write 22 255 8 Enable Compare Descriptors Uint16 Read Write 22 255 9 Enable Array Descriptors Uint16 Read Write 22 255 10 Number of Select Operations Uint16 Read Write 23 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 23 1 Register Description Type Access Note 255 11 Enable Select Descriptors Uint 16 Read Write 22 255 12 Number of Lag Operations Uint16 Read Write 24 255 13 Enable Lag Descriptors Uint16 Read Write 22 255 14 Number of Lead Operations Uint16 Read Write 25 255 15 Enable Lead Descriptors Uint16 Read Write 22 255 16 Number of Queue Operations Uint16 Read Write 26 255 17 Enab
183. d Write 255 21 AIR Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 22 C6PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 23 BTU Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 24 GF Btu Stream Component Read Write 255 25 NEOC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 2104349 001 rev AB Page 113 BLANK PAGE Page 114 2104349 001 rev AB
184. d Write 3 81 AI 2 Calibration Point 1 Read Write 3 82 AI 2 Calibration Point 2 Read Write 3 83 AI 2 Calibration Point 3 Read Write 3 84 AI 2 Calibration Point 4 Read Write Page 38 2104349 001 rev AB Ary Reg Description Usage Note 3 85 AI 2 Calibration Point 5 Read Write 3 86 AI 2 Calibration Bias Read Write 3 95 AI 2 Calibration Done Read Write 3 6500x IIC Port Device 1 Usage Percent Read Write See Note 1 9 4 1105 Float Register Notes 1 IIC Device numbers are dependent upon the order in which they are created Each device contains information that describe it C 9 5 IOS Al Struct and Calibration Point Registers Ary Reg Description Usage Note 4 0 DP AI Struct Read Write 1 4 1 SP AI Struct Read Write 4 2 TF Al Struct Read Write 4 3 AI Al Struct Read Write 4 4 AI 2 Al Struct Read Write 4 5 Battery Al Struct Read Write 4 6 Charger Al Struct Read Write 4 7 Ambient Temperature Al Struct Read Write 4 8 Transducer Temperature Al Struct Read Write 4 16 DP Calibration Zero Transducer Read Write 4 17 DP Calibration Point 1 Read Write 4 18 DP Calibration Point 2 Read Write 4 19 DP Calibration Point 3 Read Write 4 20 DP Calibration Point 4 Read Write 4 21 DP Calibration Point 5 Read Write 4 22 DP Calibration Point Bias Read Write 4 31 DP Calibration Point Done Read Write 4 32 AP Calibration Zero Transduc
185. d in the Optional 6270 enclosure and substitute know good battery 3 Disconnect any auxiliary equipment that draws power from the G4 EX or battery pack 4 Connect the current measurement troubleshooting cable see Figure 5 6 to a known good battery and reconnect to the charger regulator Page 5 12 2104349 001 rev AB BLACK DMM CONNECTOR 7 RED DMM CONNECTOR TO CHARGER REGULATOR TO BATTERY CABLE Figure 5 6 Current Measurement Troubleshooting Cable 5 Using a DMM connect to the troubleshooting cable and measure the average current If it is equal to or greater than 80 mA at 12 VDC disconnect the battery pack and reconnect one auxiliary item Continue to the next step 6 If the average current is equal to or greater than the specification no problem is found with the remote equipment Return to the test sequence in the Power Troubleshooting section 7 Reconnect the known good battery pack using the troubleshooting cable 8 Using the DMM connect the troubleshooting cable and measure the average current during start up If the current is higher than 33 40 mA return to the Power Troubleshooting section above and continue If the current is within acceptable limits continue to the next step 9 When the unit reaches normal operating status measure the average current If the current is higher than 26 30 mA return to the test sequence in the Power Troubleshooting section Move past the sequential testin
186. dance Test If readings from the RTD are still suspect following the RTD Probe test follow the instructions below to test the current source on the Termination board to verify that it is receiving power 5 2 6 1 Required Equipment e Ice Bath Digitial MultiMeter 2104349 001 rev AB Page 5 7 5 2 6 2 1 2 3 4 5 Step by Step Instructions Immerse RTD probe in ice bath Perform a continuity check between any two similarly colored wires Measured resistance should be 1 OHM or less Perform a continuity check between any two dissimilar colored wires Measured resistance should be approximately 100 OHMs Perform a continuity check between shield wire and any other wires Measured resistance should be in the Megohm range If any values are returned out of range the RTD probe is defective Replace the RTD 5 3 Power Troubleshooting 5 3 1 Overview This section focuses on determining what was has caused the G4 EX to lose power Generally loss of power can be attributed to only the power supply system However if the power supply system is used for powering a transceiver or other peripheral equipment problem with that equipment may drain the battery and cause the G4 EX to lose power The following procedures represent tests that the user can implement to deduce the problem that exists with the powering of the unit 5 3 2 Power Supply Test Various equipment configurations will necessitate moving to
187. dentifying the meter including fields for entering the lease Q holder producer operator and buyer These fields reside on the host computer in the ID Manager not in the G4 EX 3 4 4 Security System Currently there are three types of security that are possible e Device enforced legacy level 1 2 security e WinCCU enforced legacy security e Device and PCCU32 enforced Role Based Access security The following sections will cover these security options 3 4 4 1 Bi Level Security Data and configuration security in the G4 EX is spread across three elements the flow meter PCCU32 and WinCCU32 The G4 EX has a security switch 52 on the Termination board Password security is bi level read only security code level 1 or read write security code level 2 To establish meter security the user must have the security switch in the OFF position and locally connect with PCCU32 Enter a four digit number level 1 and level 2 security code and click Send Meter Security To establish a meter security the user must have the security switch in the OFF position and locally connect with PCCU32 1 Enter a four digit number for level 1 and level 2 security codes see Figure 3 14 and click Send 2104349 001 rev AB Page 3 13 i 2 Entry nl gt Mew Window Hel 8 x EY 18 i TOTALFLOW El Communications Totalflow TCP Totalflow USB MMI Serial C
188. directional antenna is used verify the orientation to the antennae to the master site 1 Ifa communication problem still exists and the unit has FYI 5 passed the transceiver check test contact Totalflow Technical Support for additional help 5 4 6 Termination Board Supply Voltage Test 1 Using a DMM set to Volts DC measure the power supply voltage from the OEU enclosure to J16 on the Termination board see Figure 5 4 between Pin 1 and Pin 2 Voltage should be equal to or greater than the amount specified as low voltage input in PCCU32 for this unit 9 volt minimum default is 11 9 VDC 2104349 001 rev AB Page 5 17 2 If the supplied voltage falls in the correct range return to the test sequence outlined in the Power Troubleshooting section 5 4 7 RS 232 Communication The following test procedure is directed from Figure 5 7 and will assist the user in what may be the possible cause for an indicated error message With the exception of the field wiring directly on the G4 EX Termination board all other wiring is located inside the 6270 OEU enclosure therefore two separate procedures are required for testing 5 4 8 RS 232 Termination Board Test Before performing the voltage test on the Termination board located inside the rear end cap verify that the wiring is correct see Table 5 3 Table 5 3 RS 232 Field Wiring on the G4 EX Termination Board D
189. dits 4 Supported Applications Application Credit Type Selectable Units Gas Orifice 11 General Tra Selectable Units Gas Turbine 1 General Valve Control 1 Credit Type Amount C pianie toke Alarm System 1 General Safety System Tt Genera Type Selectable Units Plunger 11 General Pad Controller 1 General Oil Custody Transfer Measurement 1 General Selectable Units VCONE 1 General Amount Se AN ees Selectable Units Coriolis 1 General zi EF Emi Device Credits Credit Type Used Surptus Deficit Generalnon removable 0 amp Genera removable 0 0 0 0 COXNMSD 0 0 Hydrocarbon DP 0 0 Close Help dose Figure 3 31 App Licensing Tab 4 Select the Transfer to Device radio button 5 From the Type drop down menu select the type of credit from the available options 6 Next select the number of credits to transfer 7 Upon completion click the Transfer button 3 5 5 Transferring Credits to the Credit Key from the G4 EX As has been mentioned before excess credits credits beyond those that are required to be fully licensed can be taken from the G4 EX and returned to the credit key to be used on other G4 devices Credits can be transferred from the G4 EX The user selects the type of credit and the amount of those credits to be transferred If the G4 EX has a surplus of credits these credits can be TIP transferred to the credit key to b
190. drive Following the reset procedures covered in this chapter perform a Cold start on the unit If the problem is not corrected continue to the next step Check the RTD wiring at the EXIMV 2104349 001 rev AB Page 5 5 10 Perform the following three procedures found next in this chapter e RTD Continuity Test RTD Resistive Test RTD Impedance Test 11 Contact Totalflow to repair or replace the EXIMV 5 2 4 Resistive Temperature Detector RTD Continuity Test Should the readings from the RTD be suspect follow the instructions below to test the RTD probe 5 2 4 1 Required Equipment e Digital MultiMeter DMM with alligator clip leads 5 2 4 2 Step by Step Instructions 1 Begin by disconnecting power and communications from the EXIMV 2 Disconnect the RTD from the EXIMV 3 Perform continuity test of the wires leading to the probe Set DMM to 200 OHM or Continuity Audio 4 Check the continuity of the first wire pair typically red or black by connecting one lead to each wire The meter should read zero or close to Zero 5 If there is continuity move to step 7 If there is no continuity verify the wiring at the RTD head is correct 6 If the wiring at the connection head is correct the RTD is defective Replace the probe otherwise continue to the next step 7 Check the continuity of the second wire pair typically white be connecting one lead to each wire The meter should read zero or close to ze
191. e 215 8 XMV 9 Scroll Text Lock Byte Read Write 215 X XMV X 1 Scroll Text Lock Byte Read Write 216 0 XMV 1 Scroll Text Trigger Byte Read Write 12 216 1 XMV 2 Scroll Text Trigger Byte Read Write 12 216 2 XMV 3 Scroll Text Trigger Byte Read Write 12 Page C 82 2104349 001 rev AB REGISTER DESCRIPTION TYPE ACCESS NOTE 216 3 XMV 4 Scroll Text Trigger Byte Read Write 12 216 4 XMV 5 Scroll Text Trigger Byte Read Write 12 216 5 XMV 6 Scroll Text Trigger Byte Read Write 12 216 6 XMV 7 Scroll Text Trigger Byte Read Write 12 216 7 XMV 8 Scroll Text Trigger Byte Read Write 12 216 8 XMV 9 Scroll Text Trigger Byte Read Write 12 216 X XMV X 1 Scroll Text Trigger Byte Read Write 12 217 0 XMV 1 DP Scroll Lock Byte Write Only 13 217 1 XMV 1 SP Scroll Lock Byte Write Only 13 217 2 XMV 1 TF Scroll Lock Byte Write Only 13 217 3 XMV 2 DP Scroll Lock Byte Write Only 13 217 4 XMV 2 SP Scroll Lock Byte Write Only 13 217 5 XMV 2 TF Scroll Lock Byte Write Only 13 217 6 XMV 3 DP Scroll Lock Byte Write Only 13 217 7 XMV 3 SP Scroll Lock Byte Write Only 13 217 8 XMV 3 TF Scroll Lock Byte Write Only 13 217 X XMV DP Scroll Lock Byte Write Only 13 217 X 1 XMV SP Scroll Lock Byte Write Only 13 217 X 2 XMV TF Scroll Lock Byte Write Only 13 218 0 XMV 1 Scroll Text Register 1 Uint16 Read Only 14 218 1 XMV 1 Scroll Te
192. e 4 2 TF Register Read Write 4 3 PI Register Read Write 4 4 RS Register Read Write 4 5 AC 1 Register Read Write 4 6 AC 1 DI Register Read Write 4 7 AC 2 Register Read Write 4 8 AC 2 DI Register Read Write C 10 6 Tube String Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 5 0 Tube ID Read Write 54 Tube last analyis Read Only time 5 2 Read Write C 10 7 Tube Last Calculation Period Analysis Registers Floating Point ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 10 0 Last Calc Nitrogen Read Only mole 10 1 Last Calc Carbon Dioxide Read Only mole 10 2 Last Calc Hydrogen Sulfide Read Only mole 10 3 Last Calc Water Read Only mole 10 4 Last Calc Helium Read Only mole 10 5 Last Calc Methane Read Only mole 10 6 Last Calc Ethane Read Only mole 10 7 Last Calc Propane Read Only mole 10 8 Last Calc Normal Butane Read Only mole 10 9 Last Calc Iso Butane Read Only mole 96 10 10 Last Calc Normal Pentane Read Only mole 96 10 11 Last Calc Iso Pentane Read Only mole 96 10 12 Last Calc Normal Hexane Read Only mole 96 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 53 C 10 8 Tube Archive Registers Read Only The following registers access historical data records or record items For all tube archive registers register value 0 refers to the most recent record 1 refers to the next most recent record and 2 refers t
193. e registers in arrays 4 and 5 contain the operands of the operations The registers in array 6 specify where the results of the operations will be placed The following operation codes are supported No Operation R1 R2 Addition R1 R2 Subtraction R1 R2 Multiplication R1 R2 Division R1 R2 Power of sqrt R1 Square Root sin R1 Trig Sine cos R1 Trig Cosine 9 tan R1 Trig Tangent 10 ABS R1 Remove sign 1 Page C 24 2104349 001 rev AB 11 12 13 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 30 31 32 33 34 35 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 60 61 62 63 64 65 70 71 72 73 74 80 81 254 255 Log R1 Logarithm 1 R1 Reciprocal R1 R2 Modulo R1 amp R2 Bitwise AND R1 R2 Bitwise OR R1 R2 Bitwise XOR R1 R2 Bitwise Complement R1 R2 Bitwise Shift Left R1 gt gt R2 Bitwise Shift Right R1 R2 Bitwise NOT R1 amp R2 0 True if Equal to Zero R1 amp R2 0 True if Not Equal to Zero R1 R2 0 True if Equal to Zero R1 R2 0 True if Not Equal to Zero R1 R2 0 True if Equal to Zero R1 R2 0 True if Not Equal to Zero R1 R2 True if Equal R1 R2 True if Not Equal R1 R2 True if Greater than R1 gt R2 True if Greater than or equal to R1 R2 True if Less than R1 lt R2 True if Less than or e
194. e Administrator role has the highest level access rights to all functions Expert Advanced and Basic roles have decreasing levels of access rights The File Admin role has access rights of the Basic role plus minimum rights required for sending reading RBAC security files to and from G4 devices Role Creation The following instructions will walk the user through the steps for creating a new role 1 Select the row that has the corresponding access level that the user wants Upon location click the Copy button 2 A dialog box displays and asks for the name of the new role Assign name to the role The new role is then available in the Roles dialog box 3 Modify the access levels to complete the modification of the created role Tochange the name of an existing role select the cell and click the Rename button e delete an existing role click the Delete button e Default button resets the Role list to the factory defaults User Configuration When adding a new user the default role is the one that is currently displayed in the Role drop down list at the time the Add User button is clicked The following dialog box displays to set the user name and password see Figure 3 20 User Name and Password 1 x Name John Password system ca Figure 3 20 User Name and Password Dialog Box A security key is generated and displayed after the configuration is saved to a security file The Security Key
195. e Config flags Bore IIVE Analysis configuration see note 3 Read Write live analysis 0 25 Propane Config flags configuration see note 3 0 26 Normal Butane Config flags Bead Wits ie analysis configuration see note 3 0 27 Iso Butane Config flags ive analysis configuration see note 3 0 28 Normal Pentane Config flags PE live analysis configuration see note 3 0 29 Iso Pentane Config flags Read Wie neranelysis configuration see note 3 0 30 Normal Hexane Config flags live analysis configuration see note 3 Read Write live analysis 0 31 Normal Heptane Config flags configuration see note 3 0 32 Normal Octane Config flags pedum live analysis configuration see note 3 0 33 Normal Nonane Config flags live analysis configuration see note 3 0 34 Normal Decane Config flags esd wiley analysis configuration see note 3 0 35 Oxygen Config flags Read Write live analysis configuration see note 3 Page C 62 2104349 001 rev AB ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE Read Write live analysis 0 36 Carbon Monoxide Config flags configuration see note 3 0 37 Hydrogen Config flags 2 0 38 Argon Config flags sue ce 0 39 Number of live components Read Write 0 40 Get release calc lock Read Write 0 41 Tube analysis stream index Read Write 0 42 Flow rate volume scale fl
196. e Read Write 7 5 Force Watchdog Reset Byte Read Write 7 6 Throw Exception Byte Read Write 7 7 Network Connection Byte Read 7 8 MMI connection State Byte Read 7 9 Watchdog Enable Byte Read Write 7 10 Lithium Status Byte Read 7 11 Factory Configuration Byte Read 7 12 Ethernet Enable Byte Read Write 7 13 Slow Clock Mode Byte Read Write 8 0 Last 2 byte of Prom Int16 Read Only 8 1 Year Int16 Read Write 8 2 Month Int16 Read Write 8 3 Day Int16 Read Write 8 4 Hour Int16 Read Write 8 5 Minute Int16 Read Write 8 6 Second Int16 Read Write 8 7 FLASH Checksum Uint16 Read Only 9 0 System Date Time Uint32 Read Only 9 1 Available Task Memory Uint32 Read Only 9 2 Available RAM File Space Uint32 Read Only 9 3 Available Flash File Space Uint32 Read Only 9 4 Available SD Card Disk Space Uint32 Read Only 9 5 Boot Time Uint32 Read Write 9 6 Tick Count Uint32 Read Only 9 7 Enable DHCP Uint32 Read Write 9 8 Update DNS Uint32 Read Write Page C 2 2104349 001 rev AB Register Description Type Access Note 9 9 Number of Threads Uint32 Read Only 9 10 Software Date Uint32 Read Only 10 0 Current CPU usage Float Read Only 10 1 Average CPU usage Float Read Only 10 2 Radio Voltage Float Read Only 12 0 Factory Configuration String Read Only 12 1 X Application Part Numbers String Read Only 13 0 X Test Registers 14 0 X Thread Handle Array Ulnt32 Rea
197. e Solar panel mounting bracket if not already attached to the solar panel e Pipe mounting kit 2 2 10 2 Materials Not Supplied e Cable ties 4 Solar Panel Mounting Bracket U Bolts 2 Extension Pipe Solar Panel Cable 2 Coupling 6270 Optional Equipment Unit ae Figure 2 14 Solar Panel Installation 2 2 10 3 Step by Step Instructions 1 Attach the 2 pipe coupling to the top end of the 6270 OEU mounting pipe Securely tighten 2 Install the 2 pipe extension into the coupling Securely tighten 3 Check the solar panel using the Digital MultiMeter to verify polarity and output voltage Voltage varies depending on the amount of sun angle to the sun etc 4 Install the solar panel on the mounting bracket if required with the provided hardware Install the solar panel cable if required 2104349 001 rev AB Page 2 15 5 Attach the solar panel mounting plate to the top end of the 2 extension pipe with U bolts and associated mounting hardware Do not tighten the U bolts until the solar panel has been correctly oriented 6 For northern hemispheres position the solar panel facing south for southern hemispheres position the solar panel facing north For optimum charging the solar panel should not be in shadows for any portion of the day The panel should be kept clean for maximum charging sun orientation in the sky varies
198. e replaced but does not typically fail Contact Totalflow Customer Service See the Getting Help section for instructions Please note that NO wire colors are referenced Individual FYI D units may vary Voltage on the following steps may be difficult to see using a Digital MultiMeter DMM If available an oscilloscope will provide a more accurate reading To verify the WinCCU software must be continuously polling the meter 5 4 9 1 Step by Step Instructions 1 Using a oscilloscope if available measure the receiving data on the G4 EX side of the OEU Termination strip see Figure 5 8 between GND and RXD When the data is being transmitted to the G4 EX unit the voltage should vary between 5 VDC and 5 VDC When the unit is receiving data from WinCCU the voltage should vary between 5 VDC and 5 VDC This would indicate that the unit is receiving data 2104349 001 rev AB Page 5 19 2 Onthe OEU G4 EX side of the Termination strip see Figure 5 8 measure the request to send voltage between terminals GND and RTS When the G4 EX is sending communication data to WinCCU the voltage should be 5 VDC 3 On the OEU Termination strip measure the transmitting data voltage between terminals GND and TXD When the data is being transmitted from the G4 EX unit the voltage should vary between 5 VDC and 5 VDC 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 on the transceiver side of the Termination strip 5
199. e sent to a G4 device where it is then implemented i RBAC is enforced by both the device and the PCCU32 N 7 4 FYI gt interface for G4 devices Enforcement on devices is a 9 DA port by port basis When RBAC is enforced type 1 and 2 security is superseded Security File Configuration RBAC configurations can be defined and saved in a security file This mainly includes Role Definition User Configuration and Port Configuration The following instructions provide information for creating and editing a security file 1 After PCCU32 has been opened move to the Security option under the Operate menu option from the PCCU32 toolbar Select Role Based Access Control and then Role Administration from the fly out menu see Figure 3 17 Operate View Window Help Open Configuration File Laptop File Utilities Archive File Utilities Communications File Utilities d Setup L Exit E Operations Figure 3 17 Role Administration Menu Path Page 3 16 2104349 001 rev AB 2 Once the Role Administration has been selected the Security Editor dialog box displays see Figure 3 18 Security Editor xi Description Security Key n a will be generated on save Users i rRole Definition Role z S Device x Access Administrator No Entry View Mone Collection Calibration File
200. e system setup includes an AC charger connected to the 6270 OEU Optional Equipment Unit and is not supplying the required voltage to the G4 EX unit the user may need to test the AC charger The following instructions will take the user through the steps for performing this task 5 3 5 1 Step by Step Instructions 1 Check the AC charger wiring to the 6270 OEU enclosure Termination board connector Ensure that the wiring is correct 2 Check the input AC voltage to the external AC charging unit Ensure that the primary AC voltage is correct 3 Correct and retest as necessary 4 Ifthe input primary AC voltage level is correct wiring to the 6270 OEU enclosure Termination board is correct and there is no DC output from the charger replace the charger fuse 5 Correct and retest as necessary 6 Ifthe fuse is not faulty or there is no charger DC output voltage after replacing the fuse replace the AC charging unit 7 Correct and retest as necessary 5 3 6 Auxiliary Equipment Isolation Test This test will need to be performed if the battery pack output voltage is not remaining consistent and no errors were found during the previous Power Supply Solar Panel Charging System or AC Charging Circuit troubleshooting tests 5 3 6 1 Step by Step Instructions 1 Disconnect the solar panel charger or AC charger located in the Optional 6270 enclosure 2 Disconnect the battery pack cable from the charger regulator This is locate
201. e the lithium battery connector J5 from the G4 EX board 6 Once the lithium battery connector is removed snap the board out of the device Please note that the board is still connected to device through the cables in the back 7 Afterthe G4 EX board has partially been removed unplug the sensor connector cable J6 and the ribbon cable J1 from the G4 EX board This will allow the board to be completely removed from the device 8 The user will now see a manufacturing plate The lithium battery assembly is located on the back of this plate in a small battery enclosure Carefully remove the plate from the snap on standoffs 9 The lithium battery assembly is attached to the manufacturing plate by a Velcro strip Gently remove the lithium battery from the Velcro strip 10 Take the new lithium battery and attach the Velcro edge of the battery to the Velcro strip in the battery enclosure on the manufacturing plate 11 Once the lithium battery is attached to the manufacturing plate snap the plate back into the device using the appropriate standoffs 12 Take the G4 EX board and attach the sensor cable and the ribbon cable to their corresponding connectors Please note that both sensor cable and ribbon cable pin 1 caution S wire is red The red edge pin 1 of the cable should plug into the outer most edge of the connector pin 1 13 Attach the lithium battery cable to its corresponding connector 14 Align the mounting holes
202. e used on other meters If the G4 EX requires additional credits these credits can be transferred from the credit key See the previous section for the Steps on how to accomplish this To transfer application credits to the G4 EX the user needs to connect to the G4 EX unit with PCCU32 7 0 or later 1 Open PCCU32 Once open move to the top of the tree view and click on the App Licensing tab 2 Install the credit key in an available USB port 3 Click the Load button to view the available credits 2104349 001 rev AB Page 3 27 3 6 G4 EX Configuration 3 6 1 4 5 6 7 8 This screen enables the user to see the licensing status of the G4 EX as well as the available credits on the credit key The left pane shows the type and amount of the available credits on the credit key The upper right pane is for information purposes only It shows the various available applications and the type amount of credits necessary to run the application The standard credits and four general credits are free with the purchase of the G4 EX The lower right pane displays the licensing status of the G4 EX It shows what credits are in the machine what credits are being used and any surplus or deficit of credits surplus of credits is highlighted in green deficit of credits is highlighted in red Select the Transfer to Credit Key button see Figure 3 32 In the Type drop down field select the credit type from
203. ead Write 12 4 2 Enumeration Array Register Register Read Write 13 4 3 Group Scroll Control Register Register Read Write 14 4 4 Display Scroll Control Register Register Read Write 14 4 5 Locate Lock Register Register Write Only 15 5 0 Scroll Lock Timeout Uint32 Read Write 16 5 1 Scroll Lock Timer Uint32 Read Write 16 6 0 Annunciator A1 Byte Read Write 17 6 1 Annunciator A2 Byte Read Write 17 6 2 Annunciator A3 Byte Read Write 17 6 3 Annunciator A4 Byte Read Write 17 6 4 Annunciator A5 Byte Read Write 17 6 5 Annunciator A6 Byte Read Write 17 Page C 6 2104349 001 rev AB REGISTER DESCRIPTION TYPE ACCESS NOTE 6 6 Annunciator A7 Byte Read Write 17 6 7 Annunciator A8 Byte Read Write 17 7 0 Display Annunciator A1 Byte Read Write 7 1 Display Annunciator A2 Byte Read Write 7 2 Display Annunciator A3 Byte Read Write 7 3 Display Annunciator A4 Byte Read Write 7 4 Display Annunciator A5 Byte Read Write 7 5 Display Annunciator A6 Byte Read Write 7 6 Display Annunciator A7 Byte Read Write 7 7 Display Annunciator 8 Byte Read Write 8 X Common Enumerations String Read 18 C 2 1 Display Application Register Notes 1 If the number of files being written is greater than the number of files present spare files will be created If the number written is less than the number present excess files will be deleted 2 Refers to the number of displays in the curr
204. eck all alarm conditions and determine the problem 2 Check the power supply cable It must make a good secure electrical connection with the connector J16 see Figure 5 3 3 If voltage is low investigate power supply source 418 COMM1 Figure 5 3 Power Supply G4 EX Termination Board 5 2 2 Troubleshooting a Low Lithium Alarm LL When the Low Lithium alarm displays the lithium battery should be replaced immediately Failure to replace the lithium battery could result in a loss of data following a power loss Instructions for replacing the lithium battery can be found in Chapter 4 Page 5 4 2104349 001 rev AB 5 2 3 Troubleshooting Analog to Digital Failure Alarm AD The G4 EX must Measurement Tube application running to receive this error If the A to D Failure alarm is present or if the device is in Sleep mode but is still receiving minimum voltage it may be necessary to test the data link between the main electronic board and the transducer Use the following instructions to check the transducer Probable causes of receiving the A to D failure include A D Converter is over or under range DP SP or Tf Loose wiring connections Faulty RTD probe If the A to D Converter readings are within range AD is shaded 5 2 3 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Step by Step Instructions Begin by collecting data from the unit View the Event log in PCCU32 for codes see PCCU32
205. ect Operation X Input 1 Register Read Write 13 31 0 Select Operation 1 Input 2 Register Read Write 13 31 1 Select Operation 2 Input 2 Register Read Write 13 31 2 Select Operation 3 Input 2 Register Read Write 13 31 X Select Operation X Input 2 Register Read Write 13 32 0 Select Operation 1 Output Float Read Write 13 32 1 Select Operation 2 Output Float Read Write 13 32 2 Select Operation 3 Output Float Read Write 13 32 X Select Operation X Output Float Read Write 13 33 0 Lag Operation 1 Description String Read Write 12 33 1 Lag Operation 2 Description String Read Write 12 33 2 Lag Operation 3 Description String Read Write 12 33 X Lag Operation X Description String Read Write 12 34 0 Lag Operation 1 Interval Uint32 Read Write 14 34 1 Lag Operation 2 Interval Uint32 Read Write 14 34 2 Lag Operation 3 Interval Uint32 Read Write 14 34 X Lag Operation X Interval Uint32 Read Write 14 35 0 Lag Operation 1 Input Register Register Read Write 14 35 1 Lag Operation 2 Input Register Register Read Write 14 35 2 Lag Operation 3 Input Register Register Read Write 14 35 X Lag Operation X Input Register Register Read Write 14 36 0 Lag Operation 1 Output Float Read Write 14 36 1 Lag Operation 2 Output Float Read Write 14 36 2 Lag Operation 3 Output Float Read Write 14 36 X Lag Operation X Output Float Read Write 14 37 0 Lead Operation 1 Description String Read Write 12 37 1
206. ecting or disconnecting any wires to the G4 EX CAUTION boards the user should remove all power sources and ensure that they are grounded properly The digital output can be used in conjunction with a measurement tube AGA 3 AGA 7 or liquid measurement and triggered on the following measurement parameters or conditions e Differential pressure over high limit e Volume set point e Differential pressure under low limit e Flow temperature low e Static pressure over high limit 2104349 001 rev AB Page 1 15 e Flow temperature high e Static pressure under low limit e Flow rate low e Low charger voltage e Flow rate high e Remote sense is on e Trip on digital input e Custom programmable by Totalflow or user programmable with IEC 1131 programming language DO Electrical Specifications e Open circuit voltage 0 VDC e Shortcircuit leakage current 0 uA typical e Output capacitance 1000 pF typical e Maximum allowable voltage range on output 0 5 VDC to 29 4 VDC Output Specifications Open drain FET type e resistance Including PTC fuse resistance 0 10 Typical Maximum pulse current 3A for 5 seconds e Maximum continuous sink current 1 2A at 60 C or 75 at 85 C Typical DO Point Schematics Typical Point Schematic SIG 1 84 28 OUTPUT CONTROL GND Figure 1 10 Typical DO Point Schematics Page 1 16 2104349 001 rev AB DO Connection Example TYPICAL SINK OUTPUT FIELD WIR
207. en need to close the System Setup screen and connect to PCCU32 to communicate with the device 3 3 4 Setup of the G4 EX for Ethernet Connectivity To set up the G4 EX for an Ethernet connection the user must first connect locally using either the RS 232 or USB cable Using the local connection allows the user to setup the device for Ethernet connectivity Currently there are a variety of methods for completing this task The following will cover two such methods 3 3 4 1 Method One 1 Connect locally using either the RS 232 instructions or the USB instructions covered in the previous section s 2 In PCCU32 Entry mode select Communications from the tree view Upon selection click on the Network tab see Figure 3 8 2104349 001 rev AB Page 3 7 inixi Operate View Window Help E TOTALFLOW El Communications Totalflow TCP Totalflow USB MMI Serial COMO TF Remote COMI Spare COM2 El NO Interface f Display Holding Registers fl Operations Ready xl r oor Som OF uut Communications Ports eseription Network ID IP Address WINS Server Subnet Mask Network Adaptor Reread Monitor Print Screen Save Send Close Polls 8 Errors 0 Connected to Tt 7 Figure 3 8 Network Tab 3 The user will need to enter a Network ID and set the Enable DHCP parameter field value to Yes The other fields within the tab will
208. enabled device System Setup Setup Directory Paths Misc r Communications PCCU Connect Method Serial port TCPAP C ActiveSync NGC Bluetooth Connection parameters Level 1 2 Security Code 0000 Bluetooth COM COM1 gt Unknown bluetooth device or bluetooth device not plugged in If your device is plugged in please use your windowsw bluetooth software to connect to the appropriate device Then assign bluetooth serial com port and select that here IV Show Comm Stats on Status Bar M Toolbar Buttons M Connect ivi Disconnect ONGC Operate M Entry C Monitor Terminal M Calibrate M Collect M File Transfer Valve Control Remote Protocol Remote Communications ivi TFModbus 32 Bit X Series Loader NGC Startup Wizard vi Laptop File Utilities Archive Utilities sd Use Packet Protocol with X Series 3 Connect None C Entry Collect Initial Connect Use default Role Based Access Control credentials Default Role Based amp ccess Control Usemame Default Role Based Access Control Password Figure 3 7 System Setup Dialog Box Bluetooth 10 Once the pair connection has been made the user will need to assign communication port to it After this is accomplished the user can set the com port in the drop down list provided on the System Setup dialog box 11 The user will th
209. ent Tube Application Registers Tube measurement applications share several common data items The items listed under this heading are common to all tube measurement applications Usage and notes are specific to AGA 3 tube applications Format for the register list is array register description The Application number depends on the order of the application s instantiation C 10 1 AGA 3 Tube Byte Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 0 0 Contract Hour Read Write 0 23 0 1 Reset Volume Command Write 0 2 Reset Log Period Command Write 0 3 Calibration Hold Mode Read Write 0 4 AP DP TF Over Range Flags Read Only 0 5 Tube Database Rev Read Only Read Write used only for AGA 3 1985 0 6 APR 1293 Dynamic Selge other tubes or calculation methods Bits ignore this value See note 1 Read Write used only for AGA 3 1992 0 7 AGA 3 1992 Static Select Bits other tubes or calculation methods ignore this value See note 2 Read Write used only for AGA 3 1992 0 8 DOES 1998 Selge other tubes or calculation methods Bits 5 ignore this value See note 3 0 9 Volume Calc Type Read Write see note 4 0 10 Calc Units Read Only 0 11 Report Units Read Only 0 12 Super Compressibility Method Read Write see note 5 0 13 Use Square Root Average flag Read Write un Read Write see note 6 0 14 Characteristic Record Type 0 15 Use Fixed H2O Read Write for Fw calculation 0 16 Gravity
210. ent group If the number written is greater than the number present spare displays will be created If the number written is less than the number present excess displays will be deleted 3 0 2 X 0 4 are used to navigate from group to group and display to display within a group Setting display lock prevents the display from scrolling 4 Display clear causes the entire display to be refreshed 5 After making changes to the display parameters in arrays 1 through 4 display save should be written to the new parameters in the display file 6 Setting Factory Default causes the display to be set to Spare 7 O No Plot Annunciators 1 16x24 pixel 2 8x48 pixel 8 O Left to Right 1 Right to Left 9 Bit Mask Bit 0 Left Bit 1 Right Bit 2 Top Bit 3 Bottom 10 Bit Mask Bit 0 Include in Scroll List Bit 1 Allow Keypad Entry Bit 2 Validate Keypad entry Data High Data Low 11 Bit Mask Bit 0 Include in Scroll List Bit 1 Allow Keypad Entry 12 Starting Register in an array to plot Allows historical data such as last 24 hours or last 24 days to be plotted The user can also plot trend data 13 Used to show digital states such as Open Close or Running Idle Stopped 14 Normally used with Dis in Push to Read mode If x 4 3 is assigned the display will scroll from group to group while the DI is pressed If x 4 4 is assigned the display will scroll through displays within the group while the DI
211. ents Index Xrefed Index 26 Read Write 120 26 Components Index Xrefed Index 27 Read Write 120 27 Components Index Xrefed Index 28 Read Write 120 28 Components Index Xrefed Index 29 Read Write 120 29 Components Index Xrefed Index 30 Read Write 120 30 Components Index Xrefed Index 31 Read Write 120 31 Components Index Xrefed Index 32 Read Write C 14 7 Therms Slave Var Modbus Address Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 121 0 Slave Modbus Address Read Write Note For succeeding slaves the register offset for each slave slavenum 1 Index Index register for slave data trigger for slave 2 1 1 0 C 14 8 Therms Slave Var Modbus Address Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 122 0 Slave Scan Enable Read Write Page C 102 2104349 001 rev AB C 14 9 Therms Interface Control Get Request Registers Note For succeeding slaves the register offset for each slave slavenum 1 Index Index register for slave data trigger for slave 2 1 1 0 ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 123 0 Control Get Read Write C 14 10 Therms Master Int32 Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 124 0 Scan Time for 3001 Read Write 124 1 Scan Time for 7200 Read Write C 14 11 Therms Slave Stream 1 Float Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 251 0
212. er Read Write 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 39 Ary Reg Description Usage Note 4 33 AP Calibration Point 1 Read Write 4 34 AP Calibration Point 2 Read Write 4 35 AP Calibration Point 3 Read Write 4 36 AP Calibration Point 4 Read Write 4 37 AP Calibration Point 5 Read Write 4 38 AP Calibration Point Bias Read Write 4 47 AP Calibration Point Done Read Write 4 54 RTD Calibration Point Bias Read Write 4 64 Al 1 Calibration Zero Transducer Read Write 4 65 Al 1 Calibration Point 1 Read Write 4 66 Al 1 Calibration Point 2 Read Write 4 67 Al 1 Calibration Point 3 Read Write 4 68 Al 1 Calibration Point 4 Read Write 4 69 Al 1 Calibration Point 5 Read Write 4 70 Al 1 Calibration Point Bias Read Write 4 79 Al 1 Calibration Point Done Read Write 4 80 Al 2 Calibration Point Zero Read Write 4 81 Al 2 Calibration Point 1 Read Write 4 82 Al 2 Calibration Point 2 Read Write 4 83 Al 2 Calibration Point 3 Read Write 4 84 Al 2 Calibration Point 4 Read Write 4 85 Al 2 Calibration Point 5 Read Write 4 86 Al 2 Calibration Point Bias Read Write 4 95 Al 2 Calibration Point Done Read Write 1 typedef Struct AlStruct float f uint16 s float value 16 bit status C 9 5 110S Al Struct and Calibration Point Register Notes IAI Register Structure Page 40 2104349 001 rev AB AISTRUCT C 9 6 105 Term Board Raw Counts Regis
213. ere they terminate and connectors for damage Before beginning review the procedure and the materials required for installation The 6270 OEU system with battery and solar panel is rated WARNING for Class I Division 2 locations only or can be installed in non hazardous locations Page 2 10 2104349 001 rev AB 2 2 7 1 Pipe Mount Enclosure mounting brackets and fastening hardware are supplied with the unit The customer must provide a 2 pipe of suitable length see Figure 2 10 If a charging source such as a solar panel is desired this procedure may be configured to mount the solar panel on the upper portion of the pipe e 11 58 Flat and Lock Washers with Nut 1 3 Mounting Bracket 17 20 Flat and Lock Washers with Nut z 2 Mounting Pipe Mounting Bracket PU M Figure 2 10 6270 OEU Pipe Mounting Installation Step by Step Instructions Instructions assume that the user has completed the installation TIP i of the 2 pipe 1 Using the instructions supplied with the mounting kit attach the bracket to the back of the enclosure unit 2 Position the unit on the 2 mounting pipe and secure in place with two U bolts flat washers lock washers and two bolts see Figure 2 10 2 2 7 2 Wall Mount Before beginning review the procedures and the materials required for installation A typic
214. erenced as TCP IP 1 or Serial 0 C 8 Safety Controller Application Registers C 8 1 Array Types Ary Reg Type Size Description Note 0 String 25 char See individual register descriptions 1 x Unsigned byte 8 bits See individual register descriptions 2 Register Address 32 bits See individual register descriptions 3 x Boolean 8 bits See individual register descriptions 4 x Floating point 32 bits See individual register descriptions 5 x Unsigned long 32 bits See individual register descriptions 6 x Unsigned byte 8 bits Fail Reason x 1 6 7 Unsigned byte 8 bits Fail Reason Index x 1 10 0 x Register Address 32 bits AI Address x 2 11 0 x String 25 char Al Name x 2 12 0 x Floating Point 32 bits AI Value x 2 13 0 x Floating Point 32 bits AI High Limit x 2 14 0 x Floating Point 32 bits Al Low Limit x 2 15 0 x Boolean 8 bits High Alarm x 2 16 0 x Boolean 8 bits Al Low Alarm x 2 17 0 x Boolean 8 bits Reset Holdoff x 2 10 18 0 x Unsigned Integer 16 bits Al Time Limit x 2 19 0 x Unsigned Integer 16 bits Al Timer x 2 20 0 x Register Address 32 bits DI Address x 3 21 0 x String 25 char DI Name x 3 22 0 x Boolean 8 bits DI Value x 3 23 0 x Boolean 8 bits DI Polarity x 3 9 24 0 x Boolean 8 bits DI Alarm x 3 25 0 x Boolean 8 bits DI Reset Holdoff x 3 10 30 0 x Unsigned byte 8 bits Well x Application Number Pl
215. escription ABRV Description ABRV 19 COMM 1 J20 COMM 2 Pin 1 V Battery VBATT V Battery VBATT Pin 2 Ground GND Ground GND Pin 3 Switched VBATT COMM1SW Switched VBATT COMM2 SW Pin 4 Operate Comm1 Operate Comm1 Operate Comm2 Operate Comm2 Pin 5 aes Requestto RTS COMM1 Ta Requestto RRTS COMM2 Pin 6 Request to Send RTS Request to Send RTS Pin 7 Transmit Data TXD Transmit Data TXD Pin 8 Receive Data RXD Receive Data RXD Pin 9 Clear to Send CTS Clear to Send CTS When troubleshooting RS 232 mode verify the settings of TIP 0 1 SW 1 and 2 SW2 on the Termination board are configured properly see Figure 5 4 5 4 8 1 Step by Step Instructions Voltage on the following steps may be hard to see using Digital MultiMeter DMM If available an oscilloscope will provide more accurate reading To verify the WinCCU software must be continuously polling the meter Generally speaking these tests performed on the Termination board will only verify incorrect or damaged wiring If all previous testing passed and all wiring jumpers and terminations have been verified correct the board will need to be replaced Contact Totalflow Customer Service See the Getting Help section for instructions Q 1 Using an oscilloscope measure the receiving data voltage on the Termination board J19 or J20 between Page 5 18 2104349 001 rev AB COMM 1 J19 Pin 2 GND and Pin 8 RXD or COMM 2 J20 Pin 2 GND and Pi
216. eter DMM set to Volts DC measure the voltage at the relay between the relay coil terminals If the voltage reads the same as the supplied voltage 12 VDC and the transceiver is still not receiving power the relay may be incorrectly wired use normally open contacts or the relay may be bad If the relay is not receiving power continue to step 2 2 Ifthe transceiver features a Sleep mode or is continuously powered activate COMSW1 or COM2SW and using a DMM set to Volts DC measure the voltage at the next supply junction If the next junction is located on the termination strip verify the wiring is firmly connected otherwise continue to the charger relay and measure the voltage between Terminal 1 Batt and Terminal 4 Batt Voltage should be greater than or equal to 11 9 VDC for this unit If the voltage is less than 11 9 return to the test sequence outlined in the Power Troubleshooting section 5 4 5 Transceiver Check 5 4 5 1 Step by Step Instructions 1 If available use a wattmeter to check the transceiver output power Refer to the manufacturer s documentation for measuring instructions 2 If available use two hand held transceivers and verify the communication path between the master and remote sites Voice activated interface can be used if available 3 Verify that the transceiver is set to the correct frequency Refer to the manufacturer s documentation for checking the frequency instructions 4 Ifa
217. ex Xrefed Index 1 Read Write 120 1 Components Index Xrefed Index 2 Read Write 120 2 Components Index Xrefed Index 3 Read Write 120 3 Components Index Xrefed Index 4 Read Write 120 4 Components Index Xrefed Index 5 Read Write 120 5 Components Index Xrefed Index 6 Read Write 120 6 Components Index Xrefed Index 7 Read Write 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 101 ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 120 7 Components Index Xrefed Index 8 Read Write 120 8 Components Index Xrefed Index 9 Read Write 120 9 Components Index Xrefed Index 10 Read Write 120 10 Components Index Xrefed Index 11 Read Write 120 11 Components Index Xrefed Index 12 Read Write 120 12 Components Index Xrefed Index 13 Read Write 120 13 Components Index Xrefed Index 14 Read Write 120 14 Components Index Xrefed Index 15 Read Write 120 15 Components Index Xrefed Index 16 Read Write 120 16 Components Index Xrefed Index 17 Read Write 120 17 Components Index Xrefed Index 18 Read Write 120 18 Components Index Xrefed Index 19 Read Write 120 19 Components Index Xrefed Index 20 Read Write 120 20 Components Index Xrefed Index 21 Read Write 120 21 Components Index Xrefed Index 22 Read Write 120 22 Components Index Xrefed Index 23 Read Write 120 23 Components Index Xrefed Index 24 Read Write 120 24 Components Index Xrefed Index 25 Read Write 120 25 Compon
218. f a G4 EX has extra credits more than required to be fully licensed the extra credits can be downloaded to the credit key to be used on other G4 units If the G4 controller is running an unlicensed application that fact is reflected in any reports generated from that e unlicensed meter The meter will also log the fact that it is FYI 9 unlicensed in the Event Log at the top of each contract day Unlicensed applications cause the meter to connect more slowly 1 4 Laptop Computer Running PCCU32 PCCU32 software running in a laptop Windows environment offers the user the most capabilities for programming the G4 EX The Windows environment features user friendly help files and easy to follow menus If configured with the USB option the laptop computer connects via the cable directly to the connector on the side of the G4 EX Once this physical connection has been made the user may begin communicating through the software 2104349 001 rev AB Page 1 25 Remove power from device or insure the area is known to be non hazardous before removing any enclosure cover WARNING For further information refer to the certification drawing indicated on the device s nametag and National and Local Electrical Codes FYI E a Connecting to the G4 EX meters with PCCU32 requires 0 version 7 05 5 or later Making local connection to the meter may be accomplished one of three ways Traditionally local connections have been made using
219. f the operations The result of the bit operation is returned in the corresponding register in array 11 The following bit operation codes are supported 20 R1 amp R2 Bitwise AND 21 R1 R2 Bitwise OR 22 R1 R2 Bitwise XOR 23 R1 R2 Bitwise Complement 24 R1 lt lt R2 Bitwise Shift Left 25 R1 gt gt R2 Bitwise Shift Right 26 R1 R2 Bitwise NOT 30 R1 amp R2 0 True if Equal to Zero 31 R1 amp R2 0 True if Not Equal to Zero 32 R1 R2 0 True if Equal to Zero 33 R1 R2 0 True if Not Equal to Zero 34 R1 R2 O True if Equal to Zero 35 R1 R2 0 True if Not Equal to Zero Compare Operations are executed when the corresponding register in array 15 is read The registers in array 16 contain operation codes specifying the compare operation to be performed The registers in arrays 17 and 18 contain the operands of the operations The result of the compare operation is returned in the corresponding register in array 15 The following compare operation codes are supported 40 R1 R2 True if Equal 41 R1 R2 True if Not Equal 42 R1 gt R2 True if Greater than 43 R1 gt R2 True if Greater than or equal to 44 R1 R2 True if Less than 45 R1 R2 True if Less than or equal to 46 R1 0 True if Equal to zero 47 1 0 True if Not Equal to zero 48 R1 gt 0 True if Greater than zero 49 1 lt 0 True if Less than zero Array Operations
220. file is displayed with n a will be generated on save before a configuration is saved or after any modifications are made to a saved configuration The security key is logged in the Security Log every time the security file is sent to a device or the device warm boots Additionally it can be Page 3 18 2104349 001 rev AB used to verify the security file on the device is the one created by the security administrator The PC file name of the security file is saved in the security file and displayed in the Security Editor dialog title bar when the file is read from device It will also be used as default file name suggested for saving The Open button opens a security file from the PC for editing see Figure 3 18 The New button clears all users and starts editing a new security configuration with default roles and no users security files are saved with a unique extension rba by default There is also default directory that hosts these files The directory is configurable by selecting the menu item Operate gt Setup gt System Setup Figure 3 21 System Setup rd xj Setup Directory Paths Misc ID Database Path Device Config Database Path Alarm Config Database Path l Archive File Dir Path i ong Term Database Path Mainframe ASCII File Path Spreadsheet File Path Trend Config File Path Data File Path Coastal Flow CFX Output Path Figure 3 21 System Setup Dialog Box When c
221. formation refer to the certification drawing indicated on the device s nametag and national and local electrical codes Remove power from the device or insure the area is known to WARNING 10 Gain access to the G4 EX board by loosening the countersunk hex socket locking set screw in the front end cap Use 1 16 hex wrench to perform this task When completed unscrew the end cap 11 After the end cap has been removed gently pull the display overlay and graphic overlay plate away from the snap on standoffs 12 After the graphic overlay plate is off gently remove the lithium battery connector J5 from the G4 EX board 2104349 001 rev AB Page 4 17 13 Upon removal of the lithium battery connector snap the board out of the device Please note that the board is still connected to the device through the cables in the back 14 Unplug the raw sensor connector cable J6 and the ribbon cable J1 from the G4 EX board 15 Gently remove the board from the G4 EX device 16 Loosen the 2 mounting pole U bolts Rotate lower the unit a sufficient distance so that the transducer can be removed 17 Loosen the hex socket head set screws on the neck of the unit using a 3 32 hex wrench Continue until the transducer turns freely Gently turn counter clockwise until the transducer is free from the enclosure 18 Replace the transducer and raw sensor board with new repaired spare unit of the same type and pressure rati
222. g and go directly to the Remote Communications troubleshooting 5 3 7 Sleep Mode The Sleep mode is a safety feature which maintains the RAM but discontinues data measurement calculations and control functions When the G4 EX is in Sleep mode the word Sleep is displayed on the LCD If the G4 EX battery voltage falls below 11 VDC the G4 EX enters Sleep mode If the battery voltage is still below 10 9 VDC when the user disconnected locally the G4 EX returns to Sleep mode If the battery voltage is above 11 VDC the G4 EX remains awake The G4 EX has a real time clock which maintains time and date during Sleep mode and writes an event record when entering and leaving the Sleep mode Upon wake up the G4 EX performs the following functions e Stores present calculation period accumulations in the historical record e Zeroes present calculation period accumulations e Ends the current daily record and starts new daily record 2104349 001 rev AB Page 5 13 5 3 8 5 3 7 1 Step by Step Instructions 1 Connect locally to the G4 EX This should wake up the unit for the user to determine the cause 2 Check the lithium battery cable Ensure that it has good secure electrical connection to the G4 EX board 3 Ifthe lithium battery cable is securely connected check the lithium battery If voltage is low replace with another lithium battery Reset Procedures The G4 EX operating system can be reset through either a cold
223. h Limit Float Read Write 20 65 2 Scale Operation 3 Output High Limit Float Read Write 20 65 X Scale Operation X Output High Limit Float Read Write 20 66 0 Scale Operation 1 Output Low Limit Float Read Write 20 66 1 Scale Operation 2 Output Low Limit Float Read Write 20 66 2 Scale Operation 3 Output Low Limit Float Read Write 20 66 X Scale Operation X Output Low Limit Float Read Write 20 67 0 Scale Operation 1 Input Register Register Read Write 20 67 1 Scale Operation 2 Input Register Register Read Write 20 67 2 Scale Operation 3 Input Register Register Read Write 20 67 X Scale Operation X Input Register Register Read Write 20 68 0 Scale Operation 1 Output Float Read Write 20 68 1 Scale Operation 2 Output Float Read Write 20 68 2 Scale Operation 3 Output Float Read Write 20 68 X Scale Operation X Output Float Read Write 20 69 0 PID Operation 1 Descriptor String Read Write 12 69 1 PID Operation 2 Descriptor String Read Write 12 69 2 PID Operation 3 Descriptor String Read Write 12 69 X PID Operation X Descriptor String Read Write 12 70 0 PID Operation 1 Input Register Register Read Write 21 70 1 PID Operation 2 Input Register Register Read Write 21 70 2 PID Operation 3 Input Register Register Read Write 21 70 X PID Operation X Input Register Register Read Write 21 71 0 PID Operation 1 Setpoint Float Read Write 21 71 1 PID Operation 2 Setpoint Float Read Write 21 71
224. help files for more information 99 A D converter could not be read e 100 A D converter could be read again If the event code is found follow the guidelines for returning the transducer to Totalflow for repair or replacement If the event code is not found continue to the next step In the PCCU32 Entry screen monitor the readings by clicking on the I O Subsystem in the tree view and selecting Onboard and Analog Inputs Check SP DP and temperature to determine which measurement channel is causing the alarm e alarm is caused by the SP or DP channel equalize and vent the manifold If the alarm disappears the SP or DP cell is not ranged properly or the manifold may have blockage If the alarm is still present replace the transducer e If the alarm is caused by the temperature channel move to step 9 otherwise move to the next step Set the EXIMV back to Factory calibration If this corrects the alarm recalibrate the EXIMV to correct field calibration If the alarm is not corrected continue to the next step Perform a Warm start on the unit Verify that the unit is not displaying a LL Low Lithium alarm and then remove power from the unit Restore power to the unit If the A D Failure alarm is not corrected continue to the next step Perform the Save and Restore function Follow the procedure in Chapter 4 for backing up configuration files The user must ensure that they restore these files to the tfCold
225. hot wires for 240 V to the terminals of the AC charger Connect the ground wire to the green screw 10 Verify that the DC power wires are terminated properly inside the 6270 OEU cabinet and that the main battery pack plug is already connected Apply AC power to the AC charger Page 2 18 2104349 001 rev AB AC Ground Wire GRN CONDUIT FROM AC POWER SOURCE DRAIN Figure 2 17 AC Charger Inside the Conduit Enclosure 2 2 12 Uninterrupted Power Supply UPS to the G4 EX The G4 EX can be powered directly from any UPS that is supplying 9 30 VDC See Figure 2 18 for instructions on how to wire the G4 EX Termination board to a UPS Ed J5 Bel me DO 9157 215 EIE EIE JE S I O EXPANSION ol 90009 S 52 gt RID br De CLIE H ETHERNET E NI Wer XFC 6200EX POWER TERM BOARD 2103344 Figure 2 18 G4 EX to UPS 2104349 001 rev AB Page 2 19 Blank Page Page 2 20 2104349 001 rev AB 3 0 G4 EX START UP 3 1 Overview The following chapter describes the steps required to get a newly installed G4 EX system up and running Specific information required to complete each step depending on equipment choice is discussed more thoroughly in the PCCU32 help files All references in older materials to absolute pressure AP A have been converted to static pressure SP This reflects Q the difference of including baro
226. hrough the operating parameters Table 1 2 shows the typical displayed parameters however many parameters with a register address can be displayed The duration that the parameter is displayed can vary from 1 to 255 seconds default is five seconds a setting of zero seconds will set any item to Off See the Program Display section and the PCCU32 help files for additional information Table 1 2 Typical G4 EX Display Options Display DATE TIME MM DD YY HH MM SS Description Current date and time 24 hour clock YEST DP LOW YEST DP HIGH NN PERCENT NN PERCENT Yesterday s time below DP Low Set Point Yesterday s time below DP High Set Point FLOW RATE NNNNNN N SCF HR Current flow rate programmable SCF MCF or MMCF TOTAL ACCUM VOL NNNNNN NN MCF Total accumulated volume programmable SCF MCF or MMCF DIFF PRESS NNN N IN H2O Differential pressure inches H2O PRESSURE NNN N PSIA Static pressure absolute PSIA FLOW TEMP NN N DEG F Flowing temperature F YEST VOL NNNN N MCF Yesterday s volume programmable SCF MCF or MMCF PERIOD VOL NNNN N SCF Last volume calculation period volume BATTERY VOLTAGE NN N VOLTS Battery voltage as supplied by external unit M_FLOWRATE NNNNNN N SCF HR Minute average flow rate STATION ID ID of unit ORIFICE DIAMETER N NNNN INCHES Size of orifice plate 2104349 001 rev AB Page 1 5 1 1 6 4 characters high Displ
227. hru 46 Register 255 18 contains the number of Ramp Operations It determines the size of arrays 47 thru 50 Register 255 20 contains the number of Pulse Operations It determines the size of arrays 51 thru 55 Register 255 22 contains the number of Limit Operations It determines the size of the arrays 56 thru 61 Register 255 24 contains the number of Scale Operations It determines the size of the arrays 62 thru 68 Register 255 26 contains the number of PID Operations It determines the size of the arrays 69 thru 78 C 7 Communication Application Registers Format for the register list is app array register The Communications application can be instantiated in any application slot REGISTER DESCRIPTION TYPE ACCESS NOTE 0 0 Port Flags Reset Initialize Flags Byte Read Write 1 0 1 Interface Type RS 232 485 422 Byte Read Write 2 0 2 Baud Rate Byte Read Write 3 0 3 Number of Data Bits Byte Read Write 4 0 4 Parity Byte Read Write 5 0 5 Number of Stop Bits Byte Read Write 6 Page C 28 2104349 001 rev AB REGISTER DESCRIPTION TYPE ACCESS NOTE 0 6 Protocol Byte Read Write 19 0 7 Link Establishment Interval Byte Read Write 8 0 8 Wait for download timeout seconds Byte Read Write 0 9 Scheduler Mode Byte Read Write 9 0 10 Exception Retry Limit Byte Read Write 0 11 MODBUS Slave Address B
228. ie 3 27 Figure 3 32 Transfer to Credit 0 000 40 3 28 Figure 4 1 ResetButtori LOCaltlOn a i obe ct thx sees cous a ne uo 4 3 Figure 4 2 Lithium Battery eene nnne nnne 4 5 Figure 4 3 6270 OEU nennen 4 7 Figure 4 4 G4 Front End Exploded 00 000 em em emm een 48 Figure 4 5 Termination BOI zorana Rane peto etia emt dia meten PO b RA 4 9 Figure 4 6 G4 EX diced dle dace be idi ce decre ee a ie ed 4 10 Figure 4 7 G4 EX Board Secondary Component 4 11 Figure 4 8 G4 EX Back End Exploded emm emen 4 12 Figure 4 9 Termination Board Secondary Component Side 4 13 Figure 4 10 EXIMV Installation Overview seem emm emnes 4 16 Figure 4 11 G4 EX with Block 4 17 Figure 4 12 Calibration Diagraim 4 21 Figure 4 13 RTD Calibration Screen 4 28 Figure 5 1 Troubleshooting 5 2 Figure 5 2 Liquid Crystal Display and 5 3 Figure 5 3 Power Supply
229. imit exceeded 8 zero flow Ext Status Flags 1 low limit exceeded 2 high limit exceeded 8 zero flow ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 2 0 Log period Read Write seconds Julian timestamp of most recent AIU 2 1 download Read Write see note 1 2 2 pu ING Read Write see note 1 2 3 Julian timestamp of prev day period Read Only see note 1 2 4 Total slip seconds since boot Read Only 2 5 Julian timestamp of last slip seconds Read Only 2 6 Thread loop time ms Read Only 2 7 Thread Min loop time ms Read Only 2 8 Thread Max loop time ms Read Only C 11 3 1 Tube 32 Bit Integer Register Notes 1 Julian time is number of seconds since midnight 1 1 1970 C 11 4 Tube Floating Point Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 3 0 Current AP cal checks Read Write psi see note 1 3 1 AP High Limit Read Write psi see note 1 3 2 AP Low Limit Read Write psi see note 1 3 3 Current Temp Deg F 3 4 Fixed Temp Deg F 3 5 Temp High Limit Deg F 3 6 Temp Low Limit Deg F 3 7 Flow Rate High Limit Read Write see note 2 3 8 Flow Rate Low Limit Read Write see note 2 3 9 DP ACF Percent High for Day Read Only 3 10 DP ACF Percent Low for Day Read Only 3 11 Fixed F b AGA 3 1985 Read Write 3 12 Fixed Cd AGA 3 1992 Read Write Page C 66 2104349 001 rev AB
230. inaccuracy exists investigate wiring errors Transceiver Side G4 EX Side Mounting Screw Figure 5 8 OEU Termination Strip 5 4 10 RS 485 Communication Test The following RS 485 serial communication test procedure is directed from Figure 5 7 and will assist the user in what may be the possible cause for an indicated error message With the exception of the field wiring directly on the G4 EX Termination board all other wiring is located inside the 6270 OEU enclosure As such there are two separate procedures required for testing Page 5 20 2104349 001 rev AB RS 485 Termination Board Test Before performing this test on the Termination board verify that the wiring is correct Table 5 4 RS 485 Field Wiring on the G4 EX Termination Board Description ABRV Description ABRV 19 COMM 1 J20 COMM 2 Pin 1 V Battery VBATT V Battery VBATT Pin 2 Ground GND Ground GND Pin 3 Switched VBATT COMM1SW Switched VBATT COMM2 SW Pin 4 Operate Comm1 Operate Comm1 Operate Comm2 Operate Comm2 Pin 5 2 Requestto RRTS COMM1 2 Request to RRTS COMM2 Pin 6 Receive Bus TBUS Receive Bus d TBUS Pin 7 Receive Bus TBUS Receive Bus TBUS Pin 8 Receive Bus RBUS Receive Bus RBUS Pin 9 Receive Bus RBUS Receive Bus RBUS 5 4 11 1 Step by Step Instructions When troubleshooting RS 485 mode verify the settings
231. ing instructions provide the procedural steps to install the manifold The meter run manifold high and low pressures terminate in the transducer s 2104349 001 rev AB Page 2 5 EXIMV and Differential Port cells The Differential Port holes are located on the bottom of the EXIMV see Figure 2 4 2 2 4 1 Materials Not Supplied e Stainless steel tubing e Tubing fittings CAUTION A backup wrench should always be used when working with stainless steel tubing and valves This prevents the fitting from turning and or putting tension on stainless steel tubing T MMI 5 4 NPT 2101519 001 CONDUIT ENTRY 3 38 Figure 2 4 G4 EX EXIMV Ports 2 2 4 2 Step by Step Instructions 1 Install the isolation valves on the meter run 2 Install the tubing between the meter run and the XFC It should be noted that the fittings are not supplied with the unit 3 Leak check all connections TIP gt 0 Leaks in the tubing or manifold will introduce errors when calibrating the transducer EXIMV 2 2 5 Standard RTD Probe Installation The standard RTD measures flowing gas temperature and should only be used if the G4 EX is located in a General Purpose area following local codes The procedures that are presented in this section will enable the user to install the RTD into the meter run Page 2 6 2104349 001 rev AB 2 2 5 1 Optionally Supplied Materials R
232. initial point When operating in PCCU32 s Absolute mode other points of calibration are arrived at by adding the PSI reading and the barometric pressure to arrive at PSIA Once this has happened enter this reading Page 4 22 2104349 001 rev AB When operating in PCCU32 s Gauge mode readings may be entered in as read and then a barometric pressure reading is entered 4 13 5 2 Calculating PSI To convert barometric pressure measured from inches of mercury to barometric pressure PSI perform the following calculation Barometric pressure in inches of mercury x 4912 or 2 036 equals barometric pressure in PSI Step by Step Instructions 1 Enter the Calibration menu s Calibration screen This places the G4 EX in Hold Select the preferred measurement tube from the tree view 2 Select SP from the Calibration drop down box to the left of the Pressure Marker table Select 3 or 5 Point Calibration 3 Setthe Transducer SP Pressure Range in the Calibration window This should match the range reading from the tag or label attached to the transducer 4 Select the SP type Absolute or Gauge Absolute will display values with the barometric pressure TIP added in Additionally entered values will need the barometric pressure added Gauge will display values in gauge pressure Additionally entered values will need to be in gauge pressure 5 Enter the barometric pressure in the bottom window before proceeding 6 Verif
233. ins the input to the operation The result of the ramp operation is returned in the corresponding register in array 50 Pulse Operations are executed when the corresponding register in array 55 is read The registers in array 52 contain the value that is used as the pulse interval The register in array 53 contains the trigger input The result of the pulse operation is returned in the corresponding register in array 55 Limit Operations are executed when the corresponding register in array 61 is read The registers in array 60 contain the input to the operation The registers in array 57 are used as the high limit values for the input data The registers in array 58 are used as the low limit values for the input data The registers in array 59 specify the value in engineering units per second that the output is allowed to change in response to the input The result of the limit operation is returned in the corresponding register in array 61 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Scale Operations are executed when the corresponding register in array 68 is read The registers in array 67 contain the input to the operation The registers in array 63 are used as the high limit values for the input data The registers in array 64 are used as the low limit values for the input data The registers in array 65 are used as the high limit values for the output data The registers in array 66 a
234. ion Registers The Therms Master application registers allow access to the G4 EX data items Usage and notes are specific to the Therms Master application Format for the register list is array register description Application number depends on the order of application instantiation Actual array numbers for the Therms Master application are offset by 100 Low order array numbers are used for the Communication application since the G4 EX application is derived from a Communication application Refer to the Communication Application Register section C 13 1 Therms Master Btu Byte Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 100 0 Components 7001 Read trigger Read Write 100 1 Reset New Data trigger Read Write 100 2 3001 Poll status Read Write 100 3 3058 Write status Read Write 100 4 7001 Poll status Read Write 100 5 Use Index 0 15 or 16 31 Read Write 100 6 7017 Read trigger Read Write 100 7 7017 Poll status Read Write 100 8 7200 Poll status Read Write 100 9 3001 Read trigger Read Write 100 10 7200 Read trigger Read Write Page C 86 2104349 001 rev AB C 13 2 Therms Master Btu Integer Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 101 0 Components Table 1 Index 1 Read Write 101 1 Components Table 1 Index 2 Read Write 101 2 Components Table 1 Index 3 Read Write 101 3 Components
235. ion Troubleshooting Flow Chart 2104349 001 rev AB Page 5 15 5 4 2 Setting Up Communication After the installation of the communication equipment and before placing the communication system into operation the user should note the following e Verify the field wiring terminations on the G4 EX Termination board e Verify the field wiring from the G4 EX unit to the Termination board inside the 6270 OEU enclosure e Verify the field wiring from the Termination board to the radio e Check the G4 EX identifier ID Log the ID for future reference e Log G4 EX access security code baud rate listen cycle protocol and interface for future reference The following helpful hints will aid the user after the communication equipment has been installed and set up When the communication equipment is powered switched on the G4 EX displays the after it recognizes the G4 EX ID e Check the baud rate of the G4 EX transmission and Listen time settings The baud rate and time settings can be changed when PCCU32 is in Entry mode NUT Default settings are 1200 baud the listening time is 4 FYI seconds and the communications interface is turned S off e Minimum power required for operating remote communications is 11 9 VDC default or as set by the user Should the power fall below this level remote communications will be terminated e Test remote communications using the RS 232 troubleshooting cable Use the RS 232 to RS 485 co
236. ional limit violations by observing the alarm codes on the right side of the LCD display 5 1 3 Sleep Mode Totalflow units are designed to move into a low power mode Sleep when an insufficient supply voltage is present for a period of time The issue that needs to be addressed is the reason for the Sleep alarm waking up the unit will be insufficient for correcting the problem As such issues relating to the system s power supply should be investigated 5 1 4 Solar Panel When a solar panel is attached to the 6270 OEU to provide a charging source for the battery cleanliness and positioning play an important part as do proper electrical and cabling techniques More detailed information on power consumption can be found at www abb com totalflow 5 1 5 Communication Troubleshooting the communications for this unit requires that both pieces of equipment be tested the G4 EX comm ports and the communication device This is discussed in more detail in the Communications Overview section Other communication troubleshooting information is shared in the following categories RS 232 RS 485 and RS 422 Communications 2104349 001 rev AB Page 5 1 Go To roubleshooting Alarm Codes Return to START Go To Power Return to Troubleshooting Batterie s START Dead Go To COMM Troubleshooting COMM START Trouble NO Call Totalflow Still Return to Technical YES Having START Support Tro
237. ious section s 2 In PCCU32 Entry mode select Communications from the tree view see Figure 3 12 Upon selection click on the Network tab Page 3 10 2104349 001 rev AB 3 In the Network tab set the Enable DHCP parameter field value to No Click the Send button The remaining parameter fields within the Network tab will auto populate 2 Entry x Help 18 x tha Operate View Window Ente OOLLEOT gli TA Ej TOTALFLOW FE Communications Totalflow TCP Totalflow USB MMI Serial COMO TF Remote COM1 Spare 2 H I O Interface Display Holding Registers Operations 1 2 Ready 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Cj Communications Ports 0 1 ft y f m s Tog 255 255 0 0 lt Monitor Print Screen Save Send Close 8 Eros 0 Connected to TC 7 Figure 3 12 Network Tab Move to the IP Address parameter field and type in the IP address that is reserved for the device Click the Send button Close PCCU32 Open the door to the unit and locate the Reset button on the board When located press the Reset button This will set the IP address on the board The user will need to reopen PCCU32 but do not connect From the PCCU32 toolbar click the Setup icon This will take the user to the System Setup dialog box see Figure 3 13 Within
238. ister 3 Uint16 Read Only 14 218 X 3 XMV Scroll Text Register 4 Uint16 Read Only 14 218 X 4 XMV Scroll Text Register 5 Uint16 Read Only 14 218 X 5 XMV Scroll Text Register 6 Uint16 Read Only 14 218 X 6 XMV Scroll Text Register 7 Uint16 Read Only 14 219 0 X XMV of Displays Byte Read Write 220 0 X XMV 1 Display X Interval Byte Read Write 16 221 0 X XMV 1 Display X Top Line String Read Write 17 222 0 X XMV 1 Display X Bottom Line String Read Write 17 223 0 X XMV 1 Display X Format String Read Write 18 224 0 X XMV 2 Display X Interval Byte Read Write 16 225 0 X XMV 2 Display X Top Line String Read Write 17 226 0 X XMV 2 Display X Bottom Line String Read Write 17 227 0 X XMV 2 Display X Format String Read Write 18 228 0 X XMV 3 Display X Interval Byte Read Write 16 229 0 X XMV 3 Display X Top Line String Read Write 17 230 0 X XMV 3 Display X Bottom Line String Read Write 17 231 0 X XMV 3 Display X Format String Read Write 18 232 0 X XMV 4 Display X Interval Byte Read Write 16 233 0 X XMV 4 Display X Top Line String Read Write 17 234 0 X XMV 4 Display X Bottom Line String Read Write 17 235 0 X XMV 4 Display X Format String Read Write 18 236 0 X XMV 5 Display X Interval Byte Read Write 16 237 0 X XMV 5 Display X Top Line String Read Write 17 238 0 X XMV 5 Display X Bottom Line String Read Write 17 239 0 X XMV 5 Display X Format String Re
239. ister Usage Notes 1 AGA 7 Factor Select Bits 0x01 1 UseFp 0x02 2 UseFt 0x04 4 Uses 0x08 8 Use Faux 0x40 64 Supports switchable characteristics this bit not writable 2 Misc Select Bits 0x01 1 RTD Installed f 0x02 2 Use in calcs 0x04 4 reserved 0x08 8 Check security code 0x10 16 use live ap in calcs 0x20 32 Use live analyzer data in volume calc 0x40 64 Use fixed analysis data on analyzer error 0x80 128 reserved 3 Units scale selection for uncorrected volume O ACF 1 DACF 2 CACF 3 MACF 4 DMACF 5 CMACF 6 MMACF Page C 74 2104349 001 rev AB 4 Units scale selection for corrected volume 0 SCF 1 DSCF 2 CSCF 3 MSCF 4 DMSCF 5 CMSCF 6 MMSCF 5 Units scale selection for flow rate 0 hour 1 day 2 flow window period 6 Meter factor units 0 Vol Pulses 1 Pulses Vol C 11 12 AGA 7 Float Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 7 0 Current pulse counts Read Only 74 ACF High Limit Read Write units scaled per Units scale selection see 0 42 72 ACF Low Limit Read Write units scaled per Units scale selection see 0 42 7 3 K factor Read Write 7 4 Flow window Read Write seconds 7 5 Fixed static pressure value Read Write PSIA or PSIG 76 C rnent corrected TORIO Read Only units scaled per Units scale selection see 0 42 77 Today s contract day Read Only units s
240. it 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 No Yes 0 1 No Yes No Yes 0 1 No Yes 0 1 0 1 eww Therms Master Notes Send stream 1 to this slave Send stream 2 to this slave Send stream 3 to this slave Send stream 4 to this slave C 13 9 Therms Master Btu Var Int32 Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 106 24 GF Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 25 SGF Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 26 CPCV Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 27 VISCOSITY Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 28 DENSITY Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 29 FT Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 30 FP Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 31 C7PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 32 C8PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 33 H2OCONTENT Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 34 H2OBIAS Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 35 EOAXMAP Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 36 NEOC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 37 C3PRIME Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 38 CAPLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 39 SATBTU Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 40 Z Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 41 WOBBE Btu Stream Component Read Write 106 42 STREAM NUMBER Read Write 106 43 STREAM TIME Read Write C 13 8 Therms Master Btu Var Integer Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 107 0 Master Stream ID Read Write see note 1 ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE
241. ital inputs also function as event counters Digital Outputs Optically isolated type 1A switches e Have a maximum ON resistance of 2 50 which can switch 48V AC DC at up to 200 mA at 60 C e outputs are isolated AC voltage for 1 minute at 25 C RH 60 between input and output from each other as well as the control circuit by 1500Vrms 2 ea PS7113 2A 001 DOt DO2 DC2 DOX DO DO4 DO4 Q 2 2 4 ea 48 151210 The digital inputs must defined PCCU32 Page 8 2104349 001 rev AB Operate View Window Help 8 x CHAMBER2 amp Communications Network USB1 COMO COMI COM2 8 1 0 Interface Auxiliary Data 6200EX 1 0 Card amp Flow Measurement Setup Analysis Digital Outputs No Flow Adv Setup Holding Registers amp Operations amp Trend System Ready 7240 5 7 2405 DO 3 J3 5 6 7 2407 Pols 12 sErors 0 Connectedto CHAMBER2 7 Digital or Pulse Inputs NAMUR When low impedance the state must draw more than 2 2 mA when in high impedance the state must draw less than 1 0 mA It should be noted that in the NAMUR specification a low impedance of less than 400 OHMS is considered a short fault and a high impedance of greater than 20K OHMS is an open fault These two conditions are not monitored Open Collector O C The output transistor or F
242. its Mask Read Only not used Read Only indicates super 1 4 Super Comp Method Mask compressibility methods that may be selected See note 3 Read Write live analysis updates are 1 5 Live Analysis Update Interval expected in this interval expressed in seconds 1 6 Volume Calc period Read Write seconds Read Write number of daily records 1 7 Daily Record Capacity change to this value deletes existing database and starts new database Read Write number of log period records 1 8 Log Record Capacity change to this value deletes existing database and starts new database Read Write number of event records 1 9 Event Record Capacity change to this value deletes existing database and starts new database 1 10 Aux Contact 1 Select Bits Read Write control bits see note 4 1 11 Aux Contact 2 Select Bits Read Write control bits see note 4 1 12 Retum Bomber ale vents Write Canadian Event Log available 1 13 Therms Stream Id Read WriteAnalysis Stream Id 1 14 Modbus address of analyzer Read Write 1 15 Therms use fixed or last good Read Write 1 16 Daily Record Sequence Read Only Number 147 Log Record Sequence Read Only Number 1 18 Event Record Sequence Read Only Number 1 19 DP Status Flags Read Only see note 5 1 20 AP Status Flags Read Only see note 6 1 21 TF Status Flags Read Only see note 7 Page C 48 2104349 001 rev AB ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 1 22 PI Status Flags Read Only see no
243. l Tube fi Multi request Device Kansas Deliverability Test KDT Template DEFAULT XML Direct Valve Control Pressure Buildup test PBUT Pleviowe Meter Next Meter E fases 2 Figure 3 16 WinCCU32 Edit a Device ID Dialog Box 2104349 001 rev AB Page 3 15 The security code level 2 of 5678 per Figure 3 16 has been entered This gives the WinCCU32 user full read write access to the meter FYI Y a Modbus access to the meters is not protected by the 2 security codes If the Security Switch 52 on the Termination board is in the Off position no security code has to be entered to CAUTION access the operating parameters even if there is one programmed into the device 3 4 4 2 Role Based Access Control RBAC Role Based Access Control is feature in PCCU32 that is designed to allow an administrator to designate roles and control access levels to various applications and processes in G4 devices Beginning with a set of default roles it is possible to duplicate rename and delete these items to create working list of access roles that are relevant to the user s company hierarchy From this role list it is then possible to create user accounts with various assigned roles The user is also given the ability to take the newly created configuration and save it in the form of a security file to their PC The security file can then b
244. l request response timing When using multiple XMV s on a common bus this can be used to verify each device is reliably being scanned once a second API 21 1 compliance All FLASH images do not contain all protocols Register x 5 0 contains the number of protocols in the FLASH image Registers x 5 1 through x 5 x 5 0 contains the protocol type codes each protocol in the FLASH image Registers x 6 1 through x 6 x 5 0 contain the text descriptions for each protocol in the FLASH image Protocol Enumeration Description No Protocol 255 No protocol used TFLocal 0 Typical MMI Serial connection Remote Protocol Used by radios or 2 secondary Serial Port on Board l General Terminal mode used by serial Terminal 3 devices Modbus Slave ASCII 1 Modbus Slave for ASCII encoding Modbus Slave 5 Modbus Slave for RTU encoding Modbus Host ASCII 8 Modbus Host for ASCII encoding Modbus Host RTU 9 Modbus Host for RTU encoding Tank Gauge 7 Protocol used for LevelMaster Totalflow TCP 10 General Totalflow Ethernet protocol Modbus TCP Client 11 Protocol for TCP Modbus Response client Modbus TCP Server 12 Protocol for TCP Modbus Request Server Totalflow BlueTooth 13 5 Protocol for the Totalflow PassThru 51 Enable Port signal pass through 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 31 Protocol Enumeration Description Alicat 52 21 Port Type is ref
245. lag Read Write 1 10 DP Status Flag Read Write 1 11 SP Status Flag Read Write 1 12 TF Status Flag Read Write 1 13 Ambient Temperature Status Flag Read Write 1 14 Transducer Temperature Status Flag Read Write 1 100 Transducer Serial 0 1 Read Only 1 101 Transducer Serial 2 3 Read Only 1 102 Transducer Serial 4 5 Read Only C 9 3 IOS Byte Registers Ary Reg Description Usage Note 2 0 DI 1 Term Board Read Only 24 DO 1 Term Board Read Write 2 5 DO 2 Term Board Read Write 2 8 Switched Vbat 1 Interface On Read Write Page C 36 2104349 001 rev AB Ary Reg Description Usage Note 2 9 Switched Vbat 2 Interface On Read Write 2 11 LCD Power Read Write 2 12 Low Lithium Read Only 2 13 Security Switch Read Only 2 14 Local Connection MMI Connect Read Only 2 15 DI 1 Debounce Read Write 2 17 IOS Thread Priority Read Write 2 18 IOS Scan Enable Read Write 2 19 Number of IIC Ports Read Only 2 20 Reset IIC Stats Read Write 2 21 Daughter Card Detect Flag Read Only 2 110 Stamp Board Factory Revision Read Only 2 111 Stamp Board Units of Measure Read Only 2 112 Stamp Board Calibration Type Read Only 2 113 Stamp Board Calibration Blocks Read Only 2 65535 Prom Write Enable Read Only C 9 4 5 Float Registers Ary Reg Description Usage Note 3 0 RSB Differential Pressure Read Only 3 1
246. le Queue Descriptors Uint16 Read Write 22 255 18 Number of Ramp Operations Uint16 Read Write 27 255 19 Enable Ramp Descriptors Uint16 Read Write 22 255 20 Number of Pulse Operations Uint16 Read Write 28 255 21 Enable Pulse Descriptors Uint16 Read Write 22 255 22 Number of Limit Operations Uint16 Read Write 29 255 23 Enable Limit Descriptors Uint16 Read Write 22 255 24 Number of Scale Operations Uint16 Read Write 30 255 25 Enable Scale Descriptors Uint16 Read Write 22 255 26 Number of PID Operations Uint16 Read Write 31 255 27 Enable PID Descriptors Uint16 Read Write 22 C 6 1 Operations Application Register Notes Periodic Operations can be executed at a cyclic interval such as every five seconds at a specific time of day such as 8 00 or they can be triggered by another register If the operation trigger type in array 1 is 0 Interval the operation is executed at the interval specified by the corresponding register in array 2 If the operation trigger type is 1 Time the operation is executed at the time of day specified by the corresponding register in array 2 If the operation trigger type is 2 Triggered the operation is executed each second if the register specified by the corresponding register in array 0 is non zero Periodic Operations combine the capabilities of Math Bit Compare and Array operations The registers in array 3 contain operation codes specifying the operation to be performed Th
247. le Units AGA3 31 Pulse Accumulator 32 Selectable Units AGA3 Modbus App 33 Selectable Units AGA7 Modbus App 34 Pemex Selectable Units AGA7 App 35 Valve Control With KDT App 36 Oil Custody Transfer App 37 Selectable Units Liquid Tube App 38 Selectable units Wedge Gas Tube App 39 Chrom App 40 BTU App 41 Interface App 42 Report App 43 NGC Interface App 44 Control App 45 Chrom Post Process App 46 Page 4 2104349 001 rev AB Application Instantiation Slot BTU Modbus Slave App 47 NGC LCD Display App 48 Analysis Trend File App 49 Selectable Units Liquid Orifice App 50 Nist14 Gas Equation App 51 Nist14 Liquid Equation App 52 Selectable Units VCONE App 53 ASME IAPWS IF97 Steam Tube App 54 Coriolis Tube App 55 Plunger Lift Control App 56 Wireless Remote App 57 Coriolis Interface App 58 Safety System App 59 NGC Interface TCP Server 60 NGC Interface TCP Client 61 TGP Modbus App 99 Simulated I O 100 TFIO Interface App 101 XFC AMU Interface 102 C 2 Display Application Registers The format for the register list is app array register be instantiated in any application slot The display application can REGISTER DESCRIPTION TYPE ACCESS NOTE 0 0 Number of Files Byte Read Write 1 0 1 Number of Displays Byte Read Write 2 0 2 Current File Byte Read Write 3 0 3 Current Displa
248. lect Bits 0 01 1 RTD Installed 0x02 2 Use RTD calcs 0 04 4 I Reserved 0x08 8 Check Security Code 0x10 10 Orifice Plate type 0x20 20 Use Live Analyzer Data in volume calc 0x40 40 Use Fixed Ax data on analyzer error 0x80 80 I reserved Vol Flow Rate unit selection for volume 0 MCF 1 MMCF 3 Vol Flow Rate unit selection for flow rate 0 per hour if Vol Flow Rate unit selection for volume 0 rate will be SCF HOUR if Vol Flow Rate unit selection for volume 1 rate will be MCF HOUR 1 per day if Vol Flow Rate unit selection for volume 0 rate will be MCF DAY if Vol Flow Rate unit selection for volume 1 rate will be MMCF DAY C 10 13 AGA 3 Float Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 7 0 Current DP cal checks Read Write 7 1 DP High Limit Read Write 7 2 DP Low Limit Read Write 7 3 DP Zero CutOff Read Write 7 4 Current Flow Rate SCF Hr Read Only 7 5 Last Vol Period volume MCF Read Only 7 6 Accumulated Volume MCF Read Only 7 7 Today s contract day volume MCF Read Only 7 8 Orifice diameter Read Write 7 9 Pipe diameter Read Write 7 10 Pressure base Read Write 7 11 Temperature base Read Write 7 12 Fixed F aux Read Write 7 13 Ratio of specific heats Read Write 7 14 Fluid viscosity Read Write Page C 58 2104349 001 rev AB
249. loat Read Only 6 19 X Array Operation X Result Float Read Only 6 20 0 Array Operation 1 Operation Uint16 Read Write 6 20 1 Array Operation 2 Operation Uint16 Read Write 6 20 2 Array Operation 3 Operation Uint16 Read Write 6 20 X Array Operation X Operation Uint16 Read Write 6 21 0 Array Operation 1 Register Register Read Write 6 21 1 Array Operation 2 Register Register Read Write 6 21 2 Array Operation 3 Register Register Read Write 6 21 X Array Operation X Register Register Read Write 6 22 0 Array Operation 1 Size Uint16 Read Write 6 Page C 16 2104349 001 rev AB Register Description Type Access Note 22 1 Array Operation 2 Size Uint16 Read Write 6 22 2 Array Operation 3 Size Uint16 Read Write 6 22 X Array Operation X Size Uint16 Read Write 6 23 0 Periodic Operation 1 Descriptor String Read Write 12 23 1 Periodic Operation 2 Descriptor String Read Write 12 23 2 Periodic Operation 3 Descriptor String Read Write 12 23 X Periodic Operation X Descriptor String Read Write 12 24 0 Math Operation 1 Descriptor String Read Write 12 24 1 Math Operation 2 Descriptor String Read Write 12 24 2 Math Operation 3 Descriptor String Read Write 12 24 X Math Operation X Descriptor String Read Write 12 25 0 Bit Operation 1 Descriptor String Read Write 12 25 1 Bit Operation 2
250. low can provide a 12 to 24 VDC converter This converter can be powered from the meter s VBAT either comm ports or J16 The converter s 24 VDC output can then be used to power the 4 20 mA transmitter loop In other words VCC would now be 24 VDC Subtracting the 5 volts dropped across the 250 OHM resister would leave 19 VDC to power the transmitter Page B 12 2104349 001 rev AB Another possible solution would be to reduce the 250 OHM TIP resistor to a small value possibly 125 OHMs An under powered transmitter could more easily drive 20 mA into the lesser resister Field calibrating the Al would negate any differences between the 250 OHM and the 125 OHM resistors However as the user reduces the size of the resistor they lessen the overall resolution B 2 Example 1 If the 4 20 mA transmitter can drive full range 20 mA through the 250 OHM resistor the user has essentially converted a 4 20 mA current range into a 1 5 VDC voltage range The analog to digital A D converter used in Totalflow equipment expects a 1 5 VDC signal During field calibration the user might have the 4 mA of loop current represent 10bbls of fluid per hour and 20 mA represent 100bbls The conversion to voltage using the 250 OHM resistor would be as follows 1 VDC 10bbis hour 5 VDC 100bbls hour Assuming that the A D converter is ranged between 0 and 5 VDC and the converter is resolving 15 bits the user would expect to resolve about 150u VDC
251. m Component Read Write 104 7 C3 Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 8 NC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 9 IC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 10 NC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 11 IC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 12 NC6 Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 13 NC7 Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 14 NC8 Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 15 NC9 Btu Stream Component Read Write 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 91 ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 104 16 NC10 Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 17 02 Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 18 CO Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 19 H2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 20 AR Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 21 AIR Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 22 C6PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 23 BTU Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 24 GF Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 25 SGF Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 26 CPCV Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 27 VISCOSITY Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 28 DENSITY Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 29 FT Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 30 FP Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 31 C7PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 32 C8PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 104 33 H
252. maged or if there are noticeable defects notify the Totalflow representative Keep all shipping materials for the carrier s inspection Totalflow will arrange for immediate repair or replacement See the Getting Help section at the beginning of the manual 2 2 2 Pole Mount Installation The following information presented in this document will detail the steps for mounting the G4 EX to a 2 mounting pipe using the mounting kit assembly provided with the device The G4 EX has three mounting types that can be performed based on the transducer that the user has received It must be noted that the transducer should be mounted above the meter run to allow adequate slope between the manifold and the orifice fittings The installation instructions that follow can be used for either a side pole mount or a stand alone pipe mount configuration Before beginning these steps review the procedures and the materials required for installation 2104349 001 rev AB Page 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 Materials Supplied e G4 EX mounting kit assembly and associated hardware 2 2 1 2 Materials Not Supplied e One 2 x 40 pipe e Standard 3 or 5 valve manifold e Stainless steel tubing 2 2 1 3 Step by Step Instructions To install the G4 EX it is recommended that two people perform the installation One to hold the unit in position and FYI 2 the other to install and tighten the mounting brackets N The method of installation mus
253. may find it helpful to create a desktop shortcut for each meter For instructions on how to accomplish this task follow steps 10 12 otherwise the user may continue on to the next section 2104349 001 rev AB Page 3 9 10 Create desktop shortcut assign name to it For the sake of the example the following will use the meter s ID for the shortcut name 11 The user will now need to point to the version of PCCU32 that they want to use the user may have multiple versions of PCCU32 on their laptop It should be noted that it must be PCCU32 version 7 05 5 or later 12 The user will then need to identify the network protocol to be used TCP and the network ID see Figure 3 11 For example e Point to the folder with PCCU32 in it e Point to PCCU32 exe e Point to the protocol TCP e Point to the specific network address XFC 148 e String the enter address together C PCCU605 pccu32 exe TCP XFC 148 XFC 148 Properties 21 General Shortcut Compatibilty Security AFC 148 Target type Application Target location PCCUB05 Target SPCCLIBOSSpecu32 exe 148 Start in c YPCCU605 Shortcut key None Run Normal window Comment Find Target Change Icon Advanced Figure 3 11 Windows Desktop Shortcut Dialog Box 3 3 4 2 Method 2 1 Connect locally using either the RS 232 instructions or the USB instructions covered in the prev
254. may record volumes as often as every minute and as seldom as every hour The default is 60 minutes The G4 EX can normally store 960 log periods 40 days 24 logs five minute log period will consume available memory in eight days Description Options Log Period 1 2 5 10 20 30 60 Minutes 3 6 3 Volume Calculation Period Volume Calculation Period is the specified length of time between volume calculations The Volume Calculation Period must be equally divisible into the Log Period The default is 1 second Description Options Volume Calculation Period 60 min second 1 sec 2 sec 5 sec 10 sec 20 sec 30 sec 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min 20 min 30 min and It is recommended to leave at the default of 1 3 6 4 Calculated Method When the G4 EX is initially powered up the calculation method must be set The user has the option of setting the calculation method to AGA 3 1985 AGA 3 1992 AGA 7 or ISO 5167 Once the calculation type has been determined the user may toggle specific factors on or off depending upon their availability see Table 3 1 Calculation types and many of the factors involved with setting up the calculations are usually dictated by the user s sales contract or company policy Table 3 1 Configurable Calculation Factors Calculation Parameter AGA 3 1985 AGA 3 1992 AGA 7 ISO 5167 Fpb Pressure Base Factor Ye
255. metric pressure during calibration 3 2 PCCU32 installation and Setup Totalflow PCCU32 7 05 5 or later software is required to communicate with the G4 EX Previous versions of PCCU32 are not compatible PCCU32 software running in a laptop Windows environment offers the user the most capabilities for programming The Windows environment features user friendly help files and easy to follow menus Easy to follow menus and icons step the user through many required choices 3 2 1 Step by Step Instructions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Insert the PCCU32 disk into the PC drive The Install Program should automatically load assuming the Auto Insert Notification has not been turned off If the Install Program does not automatically load click on Start and then Run e Type the CD DVD drive letter plus setup For example E setup e Click the OK button The Install Program will load followed by a Welcome message Click the Next button A screen will display that asks for user information Complete entering in the relevant information and enter the serial number in the appropriate space the user needs to ensure that they enter both the numbers and dashes for the serial number Click the Next button Change the destination directory if desired Click the Next button Change the program folder if desired Click the Next button The installation process will load all the required software If the install program asks the user t
256. mmunication converter in conjunction with the RS 232 troubleshooting cable to test RS 485 remote communications 5 4 3 Transceiver Supply Voltage Test Using the wiring information and guidelines supplied by the transceiver s manufacturer verify that the transceiver is receiving the manufacturer s suggested voltage If the unit is receiving sufficient voltage continue to the 6270 OEU Wiring Voltage Test If the transceiver is not receiving sufficient voltage 2 1 investigate the power supply issues These may involve FYI O wiring irregularities at either the charger regulator Termination board terminal strip or at the power relay if using relay for switching power to the radio 5 4 4 6270 OEU Supply Voltage Test If the transceiver does not feature a Sleep mode and power is supplied through an optional relay begin with step 1 If the transceiver features a Sleep mode or is continuously powered begin with step 2 Page 5 16 2104349 001 rev AB Wire color origination inside the 6270 enclosure should 241 comply with WI drawings For the purposes of these FYI 9 instructions wire color name and designation should coincide with the Totalflow drawings The user may need to adapt as appropriate for their individual installation 5 4 4 1 Step by Step Instructions 1 Ifthe transceiver does not feature a Sleep mode and receives power through an optional relay activate COM1SW or COM2SW and using Digital MultiM
257. mperature Effect Within the Operational Temperature Limit Linearity Hysteresis and repeatability combined 0 075 of user calibrated spans from 20 to 100 of URL 0 075 of URL 0 06 of Reading Stability 0 196 of URL for 12 months Differential Pressure Linearity Hysteresis and repeatability combined 0 07596 of user calibrated spans from Accuracy 20 to 100 of URL Ambient Temperature Effect Within the 0 075 of URL 0 06 of Reading Operational Temperature Limit 2104349 001 rev AB Page 1 19 Stability 0 196 of URL for 12 months SP Effect DP Zero per 1500 psi 0 03 of URL 3200 psi maximum DP Span 1500 psi 0 196 of Reading 3200 psi maximum Temperature Operating Range 80 F to 750 F 62 C to 339 C Accuracy 0 35 F 0 2 C over Operating Range as shipped from factory 0 2 F 0 12 C repeatability over Operating Range after single point field calibration 1 2 5 Display Assembly The G4 EX display assembly see Figure 1 15 has a dedicated interface to the Main Processor board from the 4x16 Liquid Crystal Display LCD via a 14 pin connector The display utilizes four lines by 16 characters The user can then customize the annunciators based on their own specific needs The alarm codes and annunciators communicate a basic message s to the user and indicate a need for further atten
258. n 8 RXD When the unit is transmitting to WinCCU the voltage should vary between 5 VDC 5 VDC This would indicate that the unit is receiving data continue to step 2 If the unit is not receiving data investigate the wiring issues see Table 5 3 2 Using an oscilloscope measure the request to send voltage on the Termination board J19 or J20 between COMM 1 J19 Pin 2 GND and Pin 6 RTS or COMM 2 J20 Pin 2 GND and Pin 6 RTS When the unit is communicating to WinCCU the voltage should be 5 VDC and remain at 5 VDC until the G4 EX transmit stops This would indicate that the unit is transmitting data continue to step 3 If the unit is not receiving data investigate the wiring issues see Table 5 3 3 Using an oscilloscope measure the transmit data voltage on the Termination board J19 or J20 between COMM 1 J19 Pin 2 GND and Pin 7 TXD or COMM 2 J20 Pin 2 GND and Pin 7 TXD When the unit is transmitting to WinCCU the voltage should vary between 5 VDC and 5 VDC This would indicate that the unit is transmitting data If the unit is still not responding continue to the next test as directed in Figure 5 7 5 4 9 RS 232 OEU Termination Strip Test Generally speaking these tests performed on the TIP Termination strip will only verify incorrect or damaged wiring If all previous testing passed and all wiring jumper and terminations have been verified as correct the Termination strip may need to b
259. n the Termination board Center the card over the Termination board green phoenix connectors facing out Align the four screw holes at each corner This should allow the I O card to interconnect with I O Expansion connection on the Termination board Apply gentle pressure to the I O card in the two areas located on either side of the connector until the board is seated Using the four 6 32 x 625 standoffs removed previously connect the I O card to the Termination board Do not over tighten Reapply power to the unit Make the local connection using PCCU32 and the MMI cable Once physically connected open PCCU32 and move into Entry mode In the PCCU32 tree view select the Interface application Once expanded click on the 6200EX Card sub menu If the user is communicating properly they will see the setup screens for the daughter card Page A 4 2104349 001 rev AB 2 Entry i ioj xj Operate View Window Help lj x ty C eJ Wu m4 10 72 2 CHAMBER2 amp Communications pz pel Analog Output Digital Outputs Digital Inputs Pulse Inputs Network USB1 COMO COMI COM2 8 1 0 Interface Auxiliary IIC Data amp Flow Measurement Setup Analysis i Digital Outputs No Flow Adv Setup Holding Registers Operations amp Trend System Ready Polls 10 stErrors 0 Connected to CHAMBER2 EZ Description vate Cali
260. n use the Reset Volume command instead It is recommended to perform either the Reset Log Period or the Reset Volume command to enhance the audit trail created by the event API 21 1 requirement 4 In PCCU32 enter the new orifice plate diameter 2104349 001 rev AB Page 4 29 5 Return the meter to service 4 17 2 Leaving Meter Run In Service Procedure Senior Fitting 1 2 3 4 5 Place the G4 EX in HOLD by entering Calibration mode This enables constant SP DP and Temperature values to be used while the orifice plate is being changed Replace the orifice plate Exit Calibration mode This releases HOLD of the SP DP and Temperature If the user wants to end the current log record and begin a new record with the new orifice size as stated in 21 1 they need to first move into Entry mode within PCCU32 Next select the preferred measurement tube and then click on the Commands tab Change the value for the Reset Log Period to Yes This forces new record to be written based on the old orifice plate size Additionally if the user wants to simultaneously zero the accumulated volume they can use the Reset Volume command instead It is recommended to perform either the Reset Log Period or the Reset Volume command to enhance the audit trail created by the event API 21 1 requirement In PCCU32 enter the new orifice plate diameter JM Atthe top of the Volume Calculation Period the G4 EX will
261. nce of a given device and holds the necessary qualifications for the task When opening covers or removing parts exercise extreme caution Live parts or connections can be exposed Installation and maintenance must be performed by person s qualified for the type and area of installation according to national and local codes Capacitors in the equipment can still be charged even after the unit has been disconnected from all power supplies Various statements in this manual identified as conditions or practices that could result in equipment damage personal injury or loss of life will be highlighted using the following icons result in damage to the equipment other property and personal Exercise caution while performing this task Carelessness could caution S injury STOP Do not proceed without first verifying that a hazardous WARNING condition does not exist This task may not be undertaken until proper protection has been implemented or the hazardous condition has been removed Personal injury or fatality could result Examples of these warnings include Removal of enclosure cover s hazardous location must follow guidelines stipulated in the certification drawings shipped with this unit If the unit is installed or to be installed in a hazardous location the technician must follow the guidelines stipulated in the certification drawings shipped with this unit Access to the unit PCCU cable in ha
262. ndex Xref Index 25 Read Write 118 25 Components Index Xref Index 26 Read Write 118 26 Components Index Xref Index 27 Read Write Page 100 2104349 001 rev AB C 14 6 Therms M aster Component Xrefed Index Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 118 27 Components Index Xref Index 28 Read Write 118 28 Components Index Xref Index 29 Read Write 118 29 Components Index Xref Index 30 Read Write 118 30 Components Index Xref Index 31 Read Write 118 31 Components Index Xref Index 32 Read Write C 14 5 Therms Master Btu Byte Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 119 0 Stream 1 Source App Read Write 119 1 Stream 2 Source App Read Write 119 2 Stream 3 Source App Read Write 119 3 Stream 4 Source App Read Write 119 4 Use Data From Source Therms or NGC Read Write 119 5 Stream 1 NGC Trigger Read Write 119 6 Stream 2 NGC Trigger Read Write 119 7 Stream 3 NGC Trigger Read Write 119 8 Stream 4 NGC Trigger Read Write 119 9 Therms Master MB Address Read Write 119 10 Scan Enable 3001 Read Write 119 11 Scan Enable 7200 Read Write 119 12 Scan Enable 7001 Read Write 119 13 Scan Enable 7017 Read Write 119 14 Scan Enable 3058 Read Write 119 15 Use ABB Scan or 2251 Scans Read Write 119 16 Use New Data Flag or Cycle Time Read Write ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 120 0 Components Ind
263. nent Read Write 252 22 C6PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 23 BTU Btu Stream Component Read Write Page C 110 2104349 001 rev AB ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 252 24 GF Btu Stream Component Read Write 252 25 NEOC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write C 15 6 Therms Slave Stream 3 Float Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 253 0 N2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 1 CO2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 2 H2S Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 3 H20 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 4 HE Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 5 C1 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 6 C2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 7 C3 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 8 NCA Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 9 IC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 10 NC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 11 IC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 12 NC6 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 13 NC7 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 14 NC8 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 15 NC9 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 16 NC10 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 17 O2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 18 CO Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 19 H2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 253 20 AR Btu Stream Component Read Write 2
264. ng 19 Reconnect the high low manifold lines and restore pressure 20 Reassemble the unit by performing steps 10 14 in reverse order 21 Following the instructions in section 4 3 restore the station files 4 13 Calibration 4 13 1 The calibration mode allows the user to calibrate check and zero the static and differential pressure Additionally this mode allows the user to set the bias for the resistance temperature detector RTD During the initial calibration the parameters shown in Table 4 1 will need to be configured Table 4 1 Calibration Configurable Parameters Parameter Default Value Units RTD Installed No RTD Bias 0 00 Degrees F Temperature Base Tb 60 000 Degrees F Used Fixed Temperature TF No Required Test Equipment The following test equipment is required to calibrate the G4 EX EXIMV e PCCU32 version 7 17 or later e Deadweight tester or equivalent calibration standard e Test gauge capable of dual range measurement PSIG and inches e Barometer or another means which can determine barometric pressure e Nitrogen or compressed air source If a method other than compressed nitrogen deadweight tester is used to calibrate the static pressure cell the user 5 must ensure that the prescribed flange type valves 9 blocked to prevent false differential pressure from being applied to the DP cell Additionally ensure that both high and low sides are press
265. ng errors or damaged wires 1 FYI zi lt Ifa communication problem still exists and the unit has UV passed the required test additional testing is required 7 5 4 12 RS 485 OEU Termination Strip Test 5 4 12 1 Step by Step Instructions FYI a Digital MultiMeter If available an oscilloscope will provide a more accurate reading To verify the WinCCU software must continuously be polling the meter Generally speaking these tests performed on the Termination strip will only verify incorrect or damaged wiring If all previous testing passed and all wiring jumper and terminations have been verified correct the Termination strip may need to be replaced but does not typically fail Contact Totalflow Customer Service See the Getting Help section for instructions 9 Voltage on the following steps may be difficult to see using N procedures color origination complies with Totalflow wiring instruction drawings For the purposes of these instructions the user may need to adapt for their individual installation When designating the wire colors in the following N 1 Using an oscilloscope if available measure the line driver voltage on the G4 EX side of the OEU Termination strip see Figure 5 8 between BUS and BUS When the unit is receiving data from WinCCU the voltage should vary between 5 VDC and 0 VDC This indicates that the unit is receiving data 2 Using an oscilloscope measure the request to send
266. ng pipe cable with the provided plastic tie wraps 2 2 11 AC Charging Unit Installation The AC power charging unit maintains a constant voltage charge on the installed battery pack See Figure 2 15 2 2 11 1 Materials Supplied e AC charging unit Pipe nipple 2 2 11 2 Materials Not Supplied e Plastic cable ties e AC wiring conduit rigid or flexible Page 2 16 2104349 001 rev AB v r To maintain system certification all wiring must comply FYI with NEC 501 code and applicable ABB certification drawings To prevent injury only a licensed electrician should install caution S AC power wiring to the user supplied primary AC power source 2 2 11 3 Step by Step Instructions 1 The AC charging unit is shipped separately When the unit is received unpack and inspect all components for evidence of damage Report damage to the shipping carrier and to Totalflow s Service Department 2 Remove one of the plugs from the side of the 6270 OEU so that the AC charging unit can be mounted without obstruction See Figure 2 15 3 Remove the outside of the lock nut from the nipple Leave the sealing ring and inside lock nut INSIDE FRONT DOOR To G4 EX JIS FROM AC CHARGER FROM AC Te GA EX J16 E COMPARTMENT To Battery COMMUNICATIONS
267. ntract or company policy Table 3 2 Fpv Analysis Data Analysis Data Default Units NX19 Fixed AGA 8 1992 All Value Ft Fp Detail Others Fp for Fpv method NX19 Fixed 1 000 Yes No No Ft for Fpv method NX19 Fixed 1 000 Yes No No Heating Value 1000 0000 BTU SCF Yes Yes Yes Argon 0 0000 mol No Yes No Carbon dioxide CO2 0 0000 mol Yes Yes Yes 1 NX19 NX19 GCNM 8 1992 Gross and 8 1992 Detail 2 See Fs for AGA 7 3 Only AGA 3 1992 Gross and Detail 4 Not an AGA factor Fw is a factor which compensates for water vapor in the gas stream and its effect on volume measurement 5 Not an AGA factor Faux is a user set multiplier to compensate for liquids in the gas stream Defaults to 1 6 Discharge Coefficient Type only AGA 3 1992 and ISO 5167 1 T NX19 GCN NX19 GCNM AGA 8 1992 Gross 8 Enter the Heating Value in Btu per SCF Not used in volume calculations Only used for calculating MMBTU for reports Page 3 30 2104349 001 rev AB Analysis Data Default Units NX19 Fixed AGA 8 1992 All Value Ft Fp Detail Others Carbon monoxide 0 0000 mol No Yes No Ethane 0 0000 mol No Yes No H2S 0 0000 mol No Yes No Helium 0 0000 mol No Yes No Hydrogen 0 0000 mol No Yes No iButane 0 0000 mol No Yes No iPentane 0 0000 mol No Yes No Methane 100 000 mol No Yes Yes nButane 0 0000 mol No Yes N
268. nts caution S must follow guidelines stipulated in the certification drawings shipped with this unit and adhere to local codes Potentiometer Processor Card SD CARD JTAG Connector Lithium Battery Connector Sensor Connector Primary Component Side Secondary Component Side Figure 1 6 G4 EX Main Processor Board 1 2 2 1 Engine Card An engine card plugs into the G4 EX board All processor and memory components reside on this engine card The engine card uses a low power processor running at 203 MHz with 16MB PSRAM for program execution and data storage 32MB Flash for application storage and 256 bytes of serial E PROM A lithium backup battery is located on the main G4 EX board Application programs and configuration files are stored in non volatile Flash 2104349 001 rev AB Page 1 11 1 2 2 2 G4 EX Main Processor Board Specifications The G4 EX Main Processor board is designed as general purpose motherboard for the 6200 6201EX devices Table 1 5 G4 EX Main Processor Board Specifications Component Description Power 9 to 30 VDC Ess SWVBAT 1 fused with 2 5 amp PTC VBAT 1 fused with 2 5 amp PTC Charger No Charger e Application Totalflow exe runs out of 16M SRAM RAM memory has lithium backup battery Memory e Application and configuration files permanently stored in 32M Flash e Registry MAC address etc is stored in 256 byte E PROMSD Card e SD Card optional
269. o nDecane 0 0000 mol No Yes No nHeptane 0 0000 mol No Yes No nHexane 0 0000 mol No Yes No nitrogen N2 0 0000 mol Yes Yes Yes nNonane 0 0000 mol No Yes No nOctane 0 0000 mol No Yes No nPentane 0 0000 mol No Yes No Oxygen 0 0000 mol No Yes No Propane 0 0000 mol No Yes No Water H2O 0 0000 mol No Yes No Specific Gravity 0 6000 N A Yes Yes Yes 3 6 6 Constants On a single tube gas orifice meter there are certain constants or parameters that may need to be entered or changed from the default values Table 3 3 displays the list of these constants Table 3 3 Gas Orifice Constants Default 3 AGA 3 Parameters Value Units 1985 1992 AGA 7 180 5167 Configurable Auxiliary Factor Faux 1 0 Yes Yes Yes Yes Barometric Pressure PSIA Yes Yes Yes Yes DP Zero Cutoff 0 0000 In H2O Yes Yes No Yes Meter Factor Fb Basic Orifice 210 2300 Yes No No No Factor Orifice Coefficient of Expansion 9 2500 n ue Deg No Yes No Yes 2104349 001 rev AB Page 3 31 Parameters Met Units s AGA 7 ISO 5167 Orifice Diameter 1 0000 Yes Yes No Yes Orifice Material Stainless Yes No No No Pipe Coefficient of Expansion 6 2000 s ES No Yes No Yes Pipe Diameter 2 0670 Yes Yes No Yes Pressure Base Contract 14 7300 PSIA Yes Yes Yes Yes Specific Heat Ratio 1 3000 Yes Yes No Yes Tap Location Upstream Yes
270. o Yes 4 Click the Send button This will initiate a warm boot 4 4 2 3 Method 3 1 Move into Entry mode within PCCU32 2 Once this has been completed click the Terminal icon on the PCCU32 window toolbar This will bring up the Terminal window 3 Once in the Terminal window move to the terminal prompt gt and type in the following BOOT WARM Press Enter on the keyboard to initiate the warm boot 4 5 Performing a Cold Boot 4 5 1 cold boot occurs when the user cuts power to the board including the lithium battery backup This causes loss of all historical data cold boot can be initiated from hardware or software standpoint The following will take the user through both methods Hardware Cold Boot 1 Open the door to the unit Locate the lithium battery connector 2 Upon location disconnect the battery 3 Press the Reset button for approximately five seconds The unit will cold boot Page 4 4 2104349 001 rev AB ps LITHIUM O Lithium Battery Connector Figure 4 2 Lithium Battery Connector 4 5 2 Software Cold Boot There are two methods for initiating software cold boot 4 5 2 1 Method 1 1 Open PCCU32 The user needs to insure that they are not connected initially and are at the Totalflow splash screen 2 Click the 32 Bit Loader icon on the toolbar This takes the user to the 32 Bit Loader screen 3 Within the screen the user needs to select the Reload radi
271. o be transferred If the G4 EX has a surplus of credits these credits can be HP 0 transferred to the credit key to be used the other meters This is discussed in a later section To transfer application credits to the G4 EX the user will need to connect to the G4 EX with PCCU32 7 0 or later 1 Open PCCU32 Once open move to the top of the tree view and click on the App Licensing tab see Figure 3 31 2 Install the credit key in an available USB port 3 Click the Load button to view the available credits This screen enables the user to see the licensing status of the TIP gt 0 G4 as well as the available credits on the credit key The left pane shows the type and amount of the available credits on the credit key The upper right pane is for information purposes only It shows the various available applications and the type amount of credits necessary to run the application The standard credits and four general credits are free with the purchase of the G4 EX The lower right pane displays the licensing status of the G4 EX It shows what credits are in the machine what credits are being used and any surplus or deficit of credits surplus of credits is highlighted in green deficit of credits is highlighted in red Page 3 26 2104349 001 rev AB Station Setup Applications Resources System Log Security Log Registry Key Cre
272. o button 4 Make sure that all of the checkmarks are removed from the various software options Once this has been accomplished place a check in the options list beside Shutdown Flash Delete tfData and Start Flash A prompt will display that warns that a cold boot is occurring Click the Yes button to initiate a cold boot There is a chance that the user will see a PCCU32 dialog Ds display that informs them that the Target Device Loader is not working The user will need follow the dialog box instructions to cold boot the system 4 5 2 2 Method 2 1 Move into Entry mode within PCCU32 2 Once this has been completed click the Terminal icon on the PCCU32 window toolbar This will bring up the Terminal window 3 Once in the Terminal window move to the terminal prompt gt and type in the following BOOT COLD Press Enter on the keyboard to initiate the warm boot 2104349 001 rev AB Page 4 5 4 6 Changing the G4 EX Clock 4 6 1 4 6 2 4 6 3 When any measurement applications are instantiated on the G4 EX changing the clock could affect the time when log period entries are made To protect the integrity of the accounting audit trails the G4 EX handles these types of clock changes as follows Clock Change Not Crossing an Hour Boundary When the next log period entry is made the clock is not altered Example If the present time is 4 14 pm and the clock is changed to 4 05 pm of the same d
273. o ce iere Rte Ege Pu RR KT RR ha D eR aene 2 13 Figure 2 13 Lithium Battery eee eec 2 14 Figure 2 14 Solar Panel 2 15 Figure 2 15 AG Charger Installed 4 sv drake aka ER 2 17 Figure 2 16 AC Charger Outlet Box Installation 2 18 Figure 2 17 AC Charger Inside the Conduit 2 19 Figure 2 18 G4 EX to UPS e edere eee dn trader e tee dati dee e ti ee ete diee dude 2 19 Figure 3 1 System Setup SCIGOD aci ui acceded boe cod Diogen Ld bates 3 2 Figure 3 2 Windows Found New Hardware 3 3 viii Figure 3 3 Specific Location Selection 3 4 Figure 3 4 Specify Location for USB Driver 3 4 Figure 3 5 System Setup 3 6 Figure 3 6 Select a Bluetooth Device Dialog 3 6 Figure 3 7 System Setup Dialog Box 3 7 Figure 3 8 Network e RARE RH RE o 3 8 Figure 3 9 Communication 3 8 Figure 3 10 System Setup 1 3 9 Figure 3 11 Windows Desktop Shortcut Dialog 3 10 3 12
274. o compare application limits to current values to determine where the alarm condition is present A to D Failure Displayed if A to D Converter s differential pressure absolute static pressure or temperature readings exceed maximum counts or are less than minimum counts 2104349 001 rev AB Page 1 7 1 2 4 EX Computer Hardware The G4 EX computers are housed in an explosion proof enclosure The components that comprise this are as follows G4 EX Enclosure 3R IP53 with breather drain installed 4X IP66 without breather installed G4 EX Main Processor Board G4 EX Termination Board e Lithium Battery e Engine Card e G4 EX Liquid Crystal Display LCD Assembly e PCCU Connector Internal Connector Explosion Proof External Connector USB Miltary optional e Explosion Proof Integral Multivariable Transducer with Raw Sensor Board Interface e Resistive Temperature Detector Standard RTD DIV 2 Explosion Proof RTD DIV 1 1 2 1 G4 EX Enclosure The custom designed explosion proof enclosure consists of a cylinder shaped cast aluminum housing powder coated with front and rear end caps for access to internal components see Figure 1 3 through Figure 1 5 This enclosure may be direct mounted pipe mounted on the meter run using a pipe saddle or mounted on a stand alone pipe The enclosure features three 3 exterior hubs for wiring e Communication and power e Resistive temperature dete
275. o restart the computer the user will need to do so before running the PCCU32 software If there is no message that asks for a restart of the computer the installation is complete Click the Finish button 2104349 001 rev AB Page 3 1 3 3 Establishing Local Communication discussed previously local communication can be established in different ways RS 232 MMI cable Bluetooth or USB cable The unit can be configured for one or the other or all TCP IP is available but is designed for use over a network setup With each selection the user will see options that pertain only to that connection method 3 3 1 Connecting to Local Port via RS 232 Cable If the unit is configured to include the local RS 232 Communication port the connection is made using the RS 232 cable This connects the laptop computer to the local port on the meter 3 3 1 1 Step by Step Instructions 1 Connect the MMI cable to the designated port on the PC default is COM 0 and to the local port located on the unit 2 The user needs to open PCCU32 Upon selection PCCU32 will open 3 With the MMI cable connected click the Connect icon on the PCCU32 main toolbar The Local Connect screen will display If the invalid security code screen displays enter four zeroes TIP 0000 for the new code and click the OK button The G4 EX should have defaulted to 0000 on start up If the meter has been given a security code the user needs
276. o the next oldest record The oldest record is referred to by register number MAX RECORDS 1 For Log Period registers register value 0 refers to the last logged record For Day Period register value 0 refers to the current contract day record C 10 9 Tube Log Period Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 10 13 Last Calc Normal Heptane Read Only mole 10 14 Last Calc Normal Octane Read Only mole 10 15 Last Calc Normal Nonane Read Only mole 10 16 Last Calc Normal Decane Read Only mole 10 17 Last Calc Oxygen Read Only mole 10 18 Last Calc Carbon Monoxide Read Only mole 10 19 Last Calc Hydrogen Read Only mole 10 20 Last Calc Argon Read Only mole 10 21 Last Calc Air Read Only mole 10 22 Last Calc Heavy Hydrocarbons Read Only mole 10 23 Last Calc Heat Content Read Only BTU SCF 10 24 Last Calc Specific Gravity Read Only ARRAY DESCRIPTION USAGE 200 Log Period Static Pressure Floating Point PSIA 201 Log Period Diff Pressure Floating Point Inches 2 202 Log Period Temperature Floating Point Deg F 204 Log Period Extension Floating Point 205 Log Period Volume Floating Point MCF 206 Log Period Heating Value Floating Point MMBTU 207 Log Period Flow time Unsigned Long seconds 208 209 Log Period Total time Log Period Alarm bits Unsigned Long seconds 32 bits see note 1 250 Log Period Record
277. odic Operations 2 Trigger Interval Uint32 Read Write 1 2 2 Periodic Operations 3 Trigger Interval Uint32 Read Write 1 2 X Periodic Operations X Trigger Interval Uint32 Read Write 1 3 0 Periodic Operations 1 Operation Byte Read Write 2 3 1 Periodic Operations 2 Operation Byte Read Write 2 3 2 Periodic Operations 3 Operation Byte Read Write 2 3 X Periodic Operations X Operation Byte Read Write 2 4 0 Periodic Operations 1 Register 1 Register Read Write 2 4 1 Periodic Operations 2 Register 1 Register Read Write 2 4 2 Periodic Operations 3 Register 1 Register Read Write 2 4 X Periodic Operations X Register 1 Register Read Write 2 5 0 Periodic Operations 1 Register 2 Register Read Write 2 Page 14 2104349 001 rev Register Description Type Access Note 5 1 Periodic Operations 2 Register 2 Register Read Write 2 5 2 Periodic Operations 3 Register 2 Register Read Write 2 5 Periodic Operations X Register 2 Register Read Write 2 6 0 Periodic Operations 1 Output Register Register Read Write 2 6 1 Periodic Operations 2 Output Register Register Read Write 2 6 2 Periodic Operations 3 Output Register Register Read Write 2 6 X Periodic Operations X Output Register Register Read Write 2 7 0 Math Operation 1 Result Float Read Only 3 7 1 Math Operati
278. omplete daily operation statistics including Percent flowing time Percent back flow time Percent out of limits programmable on SP DP Tf and flow rate Minimum and maximum values for SP DP Tf and flow rate 1 1 3 Flow Computer Calculations The records and statistics generated are based on the following calculation methods of the G4 EX Calculation of flow rates and volumes in accordance with AGA 3 85 AGA 3 92 AGA 7 or ISO 5167 Calculation of flow rates and volumes in accordance with AGA 8 92 Gross or Detail or NX 19 Supercompressibility Standards Calculation of flow extension for the AGA3 92 equation is Dp Sp once Tf 459 67 per second The flow extension reported for the log period is 3600 flow time in seconds Tf 459 67 2104349 001 rev AB Page 1 3 e Calculation of the flow extension for the AGA3 85 equation is J Dp Sp once per second e Extrapolation of flow accumulation during transducer calibration or calibration checks e Selection of all coefficients for calculation the calculation of dynamic factors dependent upon DP SP and Tf using averages is based on one second samples e Sample set of most recent calculations allowing subsequent verification Monitoring of the operational limits minimums and maximums to ensure detection and reporting of malfunctions or abnormal site conditions e Acceptance and storage of system constants from the PCCU32 or remote communica
279. on TIP COMM 1 SW1 and COMM 2 SW2 on the Termination board are configured properly see Figure 5 4 m Voltage on the following steps may be difficult to see using a Digital MultiMeter If available an oscilloscope will provide a more accurate reading To verify the WinCCU software must continuously be polling the meter Generally speaking these tests performed on the Termination board will only verify incorrect or damaged wiring If all previous testing passed and all wiring jumper and terminations have been verified correct the Termination board may need to be replaced but does not typically fail Contact Totalflow Customer Service See the Getting Help section for instructions 1 Using an oscilloscope measure the line driver voltage on the Termination board J19 and J20 between COMM1 J19 Pin 9 BUS and Pin 8 BUS or COMM 2 J20 Pin 8 BUS and Pin 9 BUS When the unit is receiving data from WinCCU voltage should vary between 5 VDC and 0 VDC This indicates that the unit is receiving data 2 Using an oscilloscope measure the remote request to send voltage on the Termination board J19 On J20 RRTS is not directed COMM 1 J19 Pin 2 GND and Pin 5 RRTS 2104349 001 rev AB Page 5 21 When the unit is transmitting receiving data the voltage should vary between 5 VDC and 5 VDC This would indicate that the RRTS is working correctly 3 If any inaccuracy exists investigate the wiri
280. on 2 Result Float Read Only 3 7 2 Math Operation 3 Result Float Read Only 3 7 Math Operation X Result Float Read Only 3 8 0 Math Operation 1 Operation Byte Read Write 3 8 1 Math Operation 2 Operation Byte Read Write 3 8 2 Math Operation 3 Operation Byte Read Write 3 8 X Math Operation X Operation Byte Read Write 3 9 0 Math Operation 1 Register 1 Register Read Write 3 9 1 Math Operation 2 Register 1 Register Read Write 3 9 2 Math Operation 3 Register 1 Register Read Write 3 9 X Math Operation X Register 1 Register Read Write 3 10 0 Math Operation 1 Register 2 Register Read Write 3 10 1 Math Operation 2 Register 2 Register Read Write 3 10 2 Math Operation 3 Register 2 Register Read Write 3 10 X Math Operation X Register 2 Register Read Write 3 11 0 Bit Operation 1 Result Uint32 Read Only 4 11 1 Bit Operation 2 Result Uint32 Read Only 4 11 2 Bit Operation 3 Result Uint32 Read Only 4 11 X Bit Operation X Result Uint32 Read Only 4 12 0 Bit Operation 1 Operation Byte Read Write 4 12 1 Bit Operation 2 Operation Byte Read Write 4 12 2 Bit Operation 3 Operation Byte Read Write 4 12 X Bit Operation X Operation Byte Read Write 4 13 0 Bit Operation 1 Register 1 Register Read Write 4 13 1 Bit Operation 2 Register 1 Register Read Write 4 13 2 Bit Operation 3 Register 1 Register Read Write 4 2104349 001 rev AB Page 15
281. on the G4 EX board with the standoffs and snap the board into place within the device 15 Replace the display and graphic overlays that were removed earlier 4 12 Replacing the Transducer EXIMV The EXIMV is specifically designed for the G4 EX device The transducer characterization files are stored in the G4 EX raw sensor interface board As such replacement repair involves removing both the transducer and the G4 EX raw 2104349 001 rev AB Page 4 15 4 12 1 sensor interface board from the actual G4 EX device Contact Totalflow to return both pieces for replacement under warranty or for repair Entry into the interior of the transducer voids the transducer warranty If the transducer requires servicing the entire caution gt assembly must be removed from the unit packaged securely for shipping and returned to Totalflow Contact Totalflow Customer Service for instructions Figure 4 10 EXIMV Installation Overview Step by Step Instructions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Collect data from the unit Back up the configuration files following the instructions listed previously in this chapter Once the user has finished backing up the configuration and data files they will need to open the manifold high low equalizer val
282. one or more additional tests from this location 5 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 Step by Step Instructions Check that the power supply voltage setting the power supply current rating and the cables used for the installation meet the recommended requirements If this is new installation and external power is being powered from the G4 EX call Totalflow Technical Support for help in evaluating the cable and power supply installation requirements Correct and retest as necessary Check for poor cable connection between the G4 EX board and the lithium battery pack Verify that all field wiring screw terminals on the Termination board are tight see Figure 54 Page 5 8 2104349 001 rev AB Als Dis DOs J12 Jumper Jumper Pin1 to Pin 2 for Al DO AI2 J13 Jumper Jumper Pin1 to Pin 2 for DOUT Jumper Pin 2 to Pin 3 for AI2 Jumpers for RS 485 Mode Only If this is the last board on the bus or if itis the only board jumper J9 Pin 1 to Pin 2 There are a pair of jumper wires required for RS 485 only wire J19 Pin 9 to Pin 7 and Wire Pin 8 to Pin 6 on the terminating board For all intermediate boards Jumper J9 Pin 2 Jumper Pin 2 to Pin 3 for DOUT2 to Pin 3 J9 Terminates RS 485 Al DI J12 J6 J DO on COMM1 i COMM1 13 molej3 E L1
283. only for AGA 3 0 6 AGA 3 1985 Dynamic Select Bits 1985 other tubes or calculation methods ignore this value Read Write used only for AGA 3 0 7 AGA 3 1992 Static Select Bits 1992 other tubes or calculation methods ignore this value Read Write used only for AGA 3 0 8 AGA 3 1992 Dynamic Select Bits 1992 other tubes or calculation methods ignore this value 0 9 Volume Calc Type Read Write 0 10 Calc Units Read Only 0 11 Report Units Read Only 0 12 Super Compressibility Method Read Write see note 1 0 13 Use Square Root Average flag Read Write 0 14 Characteristic Record Type Read Write see note 2 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 61 ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 0 15 Use Fixed 2 Read Write for Fw calculation Read Write live analysis 015 Gravity Contig tage configuration see note 3 0 17 BTU Config flags Boggle analysis configuration see note 3 i Read Write live analysis 0 18 Nitrogen Config flags configuration see note 3 0 19 Carbon Dioxide Config flags Read Write live analysis configuration see note 3 Read Write live analysis 0 20 Hydrogen Sulfide Config flags configuration see note 3 0 21 Water Config flags Medlie tive analysis configuration see note 3 0 22 Helium Config flags Read Wiley Ne ee configuration see note 3 0 23 Methane Config flags RENE analysis configuration see note 3 0 24 Ethan
284. onnected to Totalflow G4 device the Read button is enabled for all users Additionally the Send button is enabled only for users with Administrator rights The Read button reads a security file from the device for editing The Send button is used to send and apply the security configuration to a device Another way to send a security file is to select the menu item Operate Security gt Role Based Access Control gt Send Security File This menu item is only enabled for users with Administrator rights Clicking the menu item displays the Send Role Based Access Control File dialog box Figure 3 22 In the dialog box the user can click the Browse button to select the required file Upon selection the user can click the Send button to send the security file Send Role Based Access Control File x Role Based Access Control File Figure 3 22 Send Role Based Access Control File Dialog Box 2104349 001 rev AB Page 3 19 Port Configuration Entry mode is available in the Advanced and Expert view modes and can be used to configure for ports that not specified in the security file or can be used to override what is specified in the security file Under each port which has protocol specified is parameter field called Authentication This parameter can be set to Disabled Enabled or Enable by Security Switch See Figure 3 23 e Disabled Does not perform any functions on the port
285. oot and all historical data will be lost 2 Remove power to the board and then reconnect This will initiate a warm boot 4 4 2 Software Warm Boot There are three methods of warm booting the system from software standpoint 4 4 2 1 Method 1 1 Open PCCU32 The user needs to ensure that they are not connected initially and are at the Totalflow splash screen 2 Click the 32 Bit Loader icon on the toolbar This takes the user to the 32 Bit Loader screen 3 Within the screen the user needs to select the Reload radio button 2104349 001 rev AB Page 4 3 4 Ensure that all of the checkmarks are removed from the various software option Once this has been accomplished place a check in the options list beside Shutdown Flash and Start Flash 5 Select the needed connection type from the available drop down menu 6 Upon completion click the Start button There is chance that the user will see PCCU32 dialog 9 box display that informs them that the Target Device FYI Loader is not working The user will need to follow the dialog box instructions to warm boot the system 4 4 2 2 Method 2 FYI The user must be in Expert view N 1 Move into Entry mode within PCCU32 2 Upon completion click on the Meter ID in the PCCU32 tree view By default this will take the user to the Station Setup tab 3 Locate the System Shutdown then Reset parameter field Once located set the parameter value t
286. or warm start procedure The decision to use these procedures should only be made by an experienced technician 5 3 8 1 Cold Start A cold start clears all the data that is stored in RAM as well as resetting all entered variables to their factory default values or to the values last written to the tfCold drive by the Save and Restore utility A cold start should be used for new G4 EX installations This will ensure that all memory is clear and the operating program is at its default settings Discretionary use of this procedure is advised Refer to Chapter 4 for steps on performing both a hardware and software cold start 5 3 8 2 Warm Start A warm start does not clear the data stored in RAM The warm start will only reset the G4 EX microprocessor and not disturb any data that has been stored in RAM A warm start should be used when taking a unit out of service to perform maintenance or troubleshooting A warm start can be used when a power or communication interruption caused the G4 EX microprocessor to lock up Refer to Chapter 4 for steps on performing both a hardware and software warm start 5 4 Communications Troubleshooting 5 4 1 Overview These troubleshooting procedures are applicable to the G4 EX with an installed radio in the optional 6270 OEU Enclosure unit Use Figure 5 7 as an aid in troubleshooting communication problems The three basic types of radio communication that can be used between the G4 EX and a radio receiver
287. ositive lead on the bottom solder pad Do not place lead against ground J5 a e LITHIUM Lithium Battery Connector 2 13 Lithium Battery 2 2 10 Solar Panel Installation The solar panel is designed for outdoor mounting on 2 extension pipe installed on the upper end of the 6270 OEU 40 mounting pipe see Figure 2 14 The solar panel must be mounted within 12 feet of the 6270 enclosure other lengths available For wall mounted enclosures it can be mounted on the top or the side of the meter house Do not connect the solar panel power cable to the charger regulator that is located in the 6270 enclosure unless the main battery pack has been connected Refer to the CAUTION Battery Pack Installation section Exercise caution when installing the solar panel so as not to damage it For solar panel installations where the panel is mounted on 241 top or to the side of a meter house please insure that FYI W the panel receives full sun all day When mounted the solar panel will face up from the horizon at a 50 angle and face in a southern direction Page 2 14 2104349 001 rev AB for Class I Division 2 locations only or can be installed in The 6270 OEU system with battery and solar panel is rated WARNING non hazardous locations 2 2 10 1 Materials Supplied e solar panel e Two U bolts and fastening hardware e Solar panel cable if not already attached
288. pability to measure and monitor gas flow in compliance with AGA API and ISO standards The G4 EX is a low power microprocessor based unit designed to meet a wide range of measurement control monitor and alarming applications for remote gas systems located in DIV 1 hazardous areas See Table 1 1 for the XFC family genealogy This highlights the main differences between the various devices The XFC G4 6200 6201EX G4 EX is approved for installation in Classified Potential Hazardous Locations where an explosive atmosphere may be present Follow precautions and requirements for installation maintenance and service of equipment according to Local and National Electrical Codes and the Warnings contained in this manual Table 1 1 XFC Family Genealogy XFC Model DIV Class Multi Tube Max TFIO Modules Communication Equipment Pulse Meter Orifice Meter Battery Charger Max Battery Capacity 6200EX 12 Point I O Optional Expansion Card e External External External 6201EX 6410 6411 12 point I O Optional Expansion Card External External External On Board On Board 26AH 26AH External External N A N A 2104349 001 rev AB Page 1 1 XFC DIV Model Class Multi Orifice Pulse Battery Max Battery Communication Max TFIO Tube Meter Meter Charger Capacity Equipment Modules 6413 2 e On Board 26A
289. parameter field Once there apply five volts to the Al terminals 8 Enter value that represents the full range and represents the desired engineering units Upon completion click the OK button 9 If 3 Point calibration was selected move to the 50 Cal parameter field Once there apply three volts to the Al terminals 10 Enter value that represents 50 and represents the preferred engineering units If performing 5 Point calibration the user will need to add FYI additional values for both 25 75 calculation points 4 143 Onboard Pulse and Digital Inputs The Totalflow G4 EX comes standard with one high speed pulse input on board This may also be used as a digital input The following procedure will enable the user to set the digital input Follow the instructions in the PCCU32 help files for specific software steps 4 14 3 1 Step by Step Instructions 1 The user will need to click on the Calibrate icon in the PCCU32 main toolbar Once completed click on the AGA 7 tube in the tree view 2 Click on the Setup tab Page 4 26 2104349 001 rev AB 3 Ifthe device was ordered as a Pulse Input meter the register addresses Static Pressure Pulse Input and Temperature are listed and fixed If however a new tube application was added by the user they will need to manually enter the register addresses 4 Next the user will need to click on the K Factor button Enter a value and cli
290. passed Windows Logo testing If the user wishes to use their laptop s USB port they will need to click on Continue Anyway and proceed on with the installation The installation procedure begins loading the Totalflow inf This should only take few seconds This will complete the Found New Hardware Wizard Click the Finish button The Totalflow USB driver is now installed FYI 9 If the user sees the Found New Hardware Wizard 6 7 subsequent connects to the meter click the Cancel button The user will need to open PCCU32 With the USB cable connected click on the Connect icon within the PCCU32 main toolbar The Local Connect screen displays six buttons From the button selections click Entry Setup to move to the Station Setup screen Links within the PCCU32 tree view will move the user to screens for setup and daily operations 3 3 3 Setup of the G4 EX for Bluetooth Connectivity The following instructions will show the user how to set up the G4 EX for Bluetooth connectivity 3 3 3 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Step by Step Instructions Plug the Bluetooth adapter into the computer Ensure that all the relevant drivers are installed and the device is working properly Open PCCU32 From the PCCU32 main toolbar select the System Setup icon This will take the user to the System Setup dialog box The user will need to click the Bluetooth radio button to establish that this is the method by which
291. pplication Licensing The G4 fourth generation EX offers the user unrivaled power and flexibility The G4 EX units can support far more applications than the G3 third generation devices Various applications require that Totalflow pay a royalty to third party vendors As such Totalflow has developed a credit system for handling application loads beyond what would be required for a typical G3 meter run Application credits are required to enable many of the applications From the factory the G4 EX has four general credits installed Several system configurations are possible with these four general credits e AGA 3 with Plunger Lift and Trending uses general credits e Two AGA 3 or AGA 7 tubes with Trending uses 3 general credits e AGA 3 with Pad Control and Plunger Lift uses 3 general credits Applications are divided into categories Standard General IEC and CO2 Other application categories may be created in the future Standard applications typically support general applications as well as the basic operation of the G4 EX unit Standard applications do not require any credits to be instantiated Standard applications include e System Application e Communications e Subsystem Therms Master e Therms Slave e Analysis Trend System e LevelMaster Pulse Accumulator e NGC Client Controller e Operations XMV Interface e Holding Registers e Units Conversion Host Interface e Displays
292. priate driver with the Found New Hardware Wizard 3 Click the Next button 4 It may be necessary to point the wizard to the PCCU32 directory in the Files Needed screen Select Browse and locate the driver usbkey sys in the PCCU32 directory 5 Upon location click the OK button 6 The software driver installation will begin When it is completed click the Finish button If the user inserts the credit key in a different USB port on vXl the computer it will need to be installed for that new USB FYI W port In other words the credit key must be installed on each available port if the user does not intend to use the same USB port each time they use the credit key 3 5 2 Access View the Credit Key with PCCU32 7 0 or later To access and view the credit key the user must use PCCU32 7 0 or later The credit key is a secure device and only accessible through PCCU32 3 5 2 1 Step by Step Instructions 1 Install the credit key in an available USB port 2 Open PCCU32 but do not connect to the unit 3 Goto the Credit Key License Utility Operate gt File Utilities gt Credit Key License Utility To move to the Credit Key License Utility the user cannot FYI F connected to the G4 The user must have PCCU32 running and the initial Totalflow PCCU32 screen displayed 4 When the Credit Key Status and Update Utility screen displays click Load to view available credits on the USB key see Figure 3
293. qual to R1 0 True if Equal to zero R1 0 True if Not Equal to zero R1 gt 0 True if Greater than zero R1 0 True if Less than zero Integer R1 R2 Addition Integer R1 R2 Subtraction Integer R1 R2 Multiplication Integer R1 R2 Division Integer abs R1 Remove sign Integer R1 R2 Modulo Array Addition Array Linear Average Array Square Root Average Array Minimum Array Maximum Copy Array Move Array Out R22 R1 Out R1 Math Operations are executed when the corresponding register in array 7 is read The registers in array 8 contain operation codes specifying the math operation to be performed The registers in arrays 9 and 10 contain the operands of the operations The result of the math operation is returned in the corresponding register in array 7 The following math operation codes are supported 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 25 No Operation R1 R2 Addition R1 R2 Subtraction R1 R2 Multiplication R1 R2 Division R1 R2 Power of sqrt R1 Square Root sin R1 Trig Sine cos R1 Trig Cosine tan R1 Trig Tangent 10 ABS R1 Remove sign 11 Log R1 Logarithm 12 1 R1 Reciprocal 13 R1 R2 Modulo Bit Operations are executed when the corresponding register in array 11 is read The registers in array 12 contain operation codes specifying the bit operation to be performed The registers in arrays 13 and 14 contain the operands o
294. r Disassembly If Installed A 3 A 3 4 Daughter Card 2 202 2 0 0 0 A 4 A 3 5 Internal PCCU Connector Reassembly If Previously Installed A 5 A3 6 Implementation inen tetendit iiti tee hetta 6 APPENDIX B 4 20 MILLIAMP 11 B 1 Powering 4 2 Milliamp Transmitters B 11 B 2 Examples Ladd B 13 B 3 Example 2 i SE UR B 13 B 4 Concl sion yii tet Fd tee 13 APPENDIX G4 MODBUS REGISTER MAPS C 1 C 1 System Application Registers eec C 1 C 1 1 System Application Register C 3 C 2 Display Application Registers C 5 C 2 1 Display Application Register Notes C 7 Alarm System Application Registers C 8 C 3 1 Alarm System Application Register C 10 CA Holding ro ete C 11 C 4 1 Holding Register C 12 C 5 Reports Application Registers C 1
295. r Write 0 0 19 06 02 10 08 15 18 Register Write 1 0 37 06 03 10 08 08 33 Register Write 0 0 19 06 03 10 08 08 33 Register Write 0 3 103 06 14 10 07 56 51 Site Code Operations 06 21 10 09 50 58 Register Write 11 0 3 06 21 10 09 51 00 Register Write 0 13 0 06 21 10 09 56 24 Register Write 7 193 30 06 21 10 09 56 25 Register Write 7 193 30 06 21 10 09 56 25 Register Write 0 13 0 06 21 10 09 56 26 Register Write 7 193 30 07 12 10 10 11 53 Register Write 0 0 19 07 12 10 10 11 53 Register Write 0 3 72 07 19 10 13 20 04 Register Write 0 0 19 07 19 10 13 20 04 Register Write 71 3 3 07 19 10 13 23 06 Register Write 71 107 0 07 20 10 08 59 29 Register Write 0 0 19 07 20 10 08 59 29 Register Write 71 109 3 07 20 10 08 59 29 Register Write 71 109 7 07 20 10 09 18 06 Register Write 0 3 12 IANA 4 50 4 Zac 444 Figure 3 26 Security Log Tab Remote Communications While it is currently possible to enable on remote port this will block any access to the port since no host software currently supports RBAC Access Rights for Common Functions Restricted Applications Applications not accessible to the currently connected user are not seen in the left hand tree view within PCCU32 Functions that are restricted to the user are disabled When an application with Read Only functionality is accessed the Sen
296. r s unit is configured to include the local USB communication port the connection is made using the USB cable This connects the laptop computer to the Local port on the meter Before the user is able to communicate to the G4 EX using a USB cable they must install the Totalflow USB driver Totalflow inf 3 3 2 1 1 Step by Step Instructions If the G4 EX and laptop are powered up when the connection is made the user will receive the Found New Hardware Wizard screen see Figure 3 2 When this screen displays the user needs to select the No not this time radio button Click Next Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New amp Hardware Wizard Windows will search for current and updated software by looking on your computer on the hardware installation CD or on the Windows Update Web site with your permission Read our privacy policy Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software Yes this time only Yes now and every time connect a device No not this time Click Next to continue Cancel 2 3 Figure 3 2 Windows Found New Hardware Wizard To install Totalflow inf select the Install from a list or specific location i e the PCCU32 folder radio button see Figure 3 3 Click Next Select the Include this location in the search checkbox Browse to the PCCU32 folder In Figure 3 4 the folder was named PCCU605 to draw attention to the necessity to run PCCU
297. re removing enclosure cover For further information refer to the certification drawing indicated on the device s nametag national and local electrical codes follow guidelines stipulated in the certification drawings shipped Installation and or maintenance of electric components should caution e with this unit and adhere to local codes Ribbon Cable Note The single red wire on the cable goes to Pin 1 of both connectors Assembly Main Processor and Display Assembly Graphic Overlay and Bezel Front Cap EN Lithium Battery Connector Sensor Cable Connector to J on back of board Note The single red wire on the cable goes to Pin 1 of both connectors Figure 4 4 G4 EX Front End Exploded View Page 4 8 2104349 001 rev AB 4 8 1 Step by Step Instructions 1 Collect data from the unit 2 Back up the configuration files following the instructions listed previously in this chapter 3 Verify that the LL battery alarm is not being displayed on the G4 EX LCD be non hazardous before removing any enclosure cover For further information refer to the certification drawing indicated on the device s nametag and national and local electrical codes Remove power from the device or insure the area is known to WARNING 4 Gain access to the rear Termination board by loosening the countersunk hex socket locking set screw in the rear end cap Use a 1 16 hex wrench to perform this task
298. re used as the low limit values for the output data The result of the scale operation is returned in the corresponding register in array 68 PID Operations are executed when the corresponding register in array 78 is read The registers in array 70 contain the input to the operation The registers in array 71 are used as the set points for the operation The registers in array 72 are used as the dead band values for the set points and the inputs The registers in array 73 are used as the proportional gain of the operation The registers in array 74 are used as the integral reset values of the operation The registers in array 75 are used as the derivative rate of the operation The registers in array 76 are used for the auto 1 manual 0 mode of the operation The registers in array 77 are used for the action direct 0 reverse 1 of the operation The result of the PID operation is returned in the corresponding register in array 78 The value in this register is either 0 to disable associated descriptors or a 1 to enable the associated descriptors Register 255 10 contains the number of Select Operations It determines the size of arrays 28 thru 32 Register 255 12 contains the number of Lag Operations It determines the size of arrays 33 thru 36 Register 255 14 contains the number of Lead Operations It determines the size of arrays 37 thru 40 Register 255 16 contains the number of Queue Operations It determines the size of arrays 41 t
299. remaining charged the user will need to test the battery pack AC charger and or the solar panel The following instructions conta 5 3 3 1 Step by Step Instructi in the steps required to perform the circuit testing ons 1 Disconnect power from the charger regulator located in the Optional 6270 enclosure 2104349 001 rev AB Page 5 9 2 Replace the battery with known good battery using the Battery Pack Installation procedure in Chapter 2 3 Reconnect power to the charger regulator If the battery pack is charged through an AC charger move to step 5 otherwise continue to step 4 4 Measure the charging voltage from the solar panel at the charger regulator Use DMM that connects the and leads to the and solar panel wires Loaded voltage should be greater than or equal to the specifications listed in Table 5 2 If the voltage is within range the battery was bad If the loaded voltage is not above the minimum perform the Solar Panel Troubleshooting Test found within this chapter 5 If the unit receives charging voltage from the AC charger perform the AC Charger Troubleshooting Test found within this chapter Table 5 2 Specifications for Solar Panels Panel Max Volts Open Circuit Load Resistance Loaded Voltage 5 4 5W 16 5V 20 5V 50 25W 13 5V 10 10W 16 8V 21V 30 25W 17 5V 20 20W 16 8V 21V 15 25W 17 8V 30 30W 16 8V 21V 10 O 40W
300. ressure value This shifts the SP transducer curve After the Hold state initiates select Zero Transducer 4 15 2 Differential Pressure The DP can be zeroed without recalibrating If DP shifts the user can enter a new zero 0 This shifts the DP curve After the HOLD state begins select Zero Transducer 4 16 RTD Calibration and Bias The Totalflow G4 EX has one onboard RTD input The registers representing the RTD input is normally assigned to a measurement tube The RTD tab is located in the Calibrate screen within the Onboard I O tree view The user will need to click the Analog Inputs sub menu and move to the RTD tab see Figure 4 13 2104349 001 rev AB Page 4 27 Checks Calibration Setup Hold Sp 278 20 Dp 5 92 Tf 168 73 Sp Dp TF 278 288 5 916 168 735 Ted Update T Range Bias 0 000 Figure 4 13 RTD Calibration Screen The Current Value parameter will display the current value of the selected RTD by placing a check mark in the Update field 4 16 1 Step by Step Instructions 1 Connect the variable resistor or RTD calibration equipment to J7 on the G4 EX board Terminal J7 1 SHLD 2 Out 3 Plus 4 Minus 5 In user elects to calibrate using an 100 OHM RTD probe refer to the PCCU32 help files to view resistance corresponding temperature readings i FYI 2 Select the RTD tab within the
301. rge the installed battery pack Clear any debris from the cell face of the panel Check the solar panel wiring to ascertain that it is correctly connected to the associated termination pins that are located in the 6270 OEU enclosure see Figure 5 5 Disconnect the solar panel from the field device Set the DMM to 20 VDC Determine if the open circuit voltage is greater than or equal to the specification listed in Table 5 2 by clipping the positive lead of the DMM to the first wire and clipping the negative lead of the DMM to the second wire If the solar panel is not above the minimum continue to the next step Using the selected resistor from Table 5 2 for the solar panel wattage attach the selected resistor between the two solar panel wires Clip the positive lead of the DMM to the upper side of the test resistor 10 Clip the negative lead of the DMM to the lower side of the test resistor 11 Determine if the loaded voltage is greater than or equal to the specification listed in Table 5 2 If the solar panel is not above the minimum replace the solar panel and return to step 3 DOOR To G4 EX J16 Pin 2 To Solar Panel To Solar Panel To G4 EX J16 Pin 1 Charger Regulator To Battery Figure 5 5 6270 OEU Charger Regulator 2104349 001 rev AB Page 5 11 5 3 5 Charging System Unit Test If th
302. rite 0 absolute 1 gauge 0 56 Programmable count before Read Write activating a2dfail 0 57 222 of a2dfail in Read Only 0 58 Vol period complete flag Read Only 0 59 Log period complete flag Read Only 0 60 Day period complete flag Read Only 0 61 Disable tube check pointing Read Write 1 disable 262 5 Read 1 stop 0 63 Mr Pe ton Read Write 1 stop logging 0 64 Log gauge pressure Read Write 0 log absolute 1 log gage if gage transducer Page 46 2104349 001 rev AB 1 ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 0 65 Log Dp Check with pressure Read Only applied to Sp 0 66 Stream source application Read Write Enable Disable Slip Second 0 67 Adjustment Read Only C 10 1 1 Tube Byte Register Usage Notes AGA 3 1985 Dynamic Factor Select Bits 0x01 1 UseFtf 0x02 2 UseY sf 0x04 4 Use Fr oh 0x08 8 Use Fa 0x10 16 UseFpv 0x20 32 Use Fw water vapor factor 0x40 64 Use pipe tap equation 0x80 128 tap cfg supported Set by FCU AGA 3 1992 Static Factor Select Bits 0x08 UseLive CD if set 0x10 Use Fws Faux well stream 0x20 Static Pressure Tap is Upstream 0x40 Supports switchable characteristics AGA 3 1992 Dynamic Factor Select Bits 0x02 2 UseY 0x10 16 UseFpv 0x20 32 Use Fw water vapor factor Volume Calculation Type 0 NONE 1 AGA 3 1985 2 AGA 3 1992 Super
303. rite 10 209 18 XMV 2 Calibration Point 2 Float Read Write 10 209 19 XMV 2 Calibration Point 3 Float Read Write 10 209 20 XMV 2 Calibration Point 4 Float Read Write 10 209 21 XMV 2 Calibration Point 5 Float Read Write 10 209 22 XMV 2 Calibration Bias Float Read Write 10 209 30 XMV 2 Calibration Abort Float Write Only 10 209 31 XMV 2 Calibration Complete Float Write Only 10 209 32 XMV 3 Zero Transducer Float Read Write 10 209 33 XMV 3 Calibration Point 1 Float Read Write 10 209 34 XMV 3 Calibration Point 2 Float Read Write 10 209 35 XMV 3 Calibration Point 3 Float Read Write 10 209 36 XMV 3 Calibration Point 4 Float Read Write 10 209 37 XMV 3 Calibration Point 5 Float Read Write 10 209 38 XMV 3 Calibration Bias Float Read Write 10 209 46 XMV 3 Calibration Abort Float Write Only 10 209 47 XMV 3 Calibration Complete Float Write Only 10 209 X XMV Zero Transducer Float Read Write 10 209 X 1 XMV Calibration Point 1 Float Read Write 10 209 X 2 XMV Calibration Point 2 Float Read Write 10 209 X 3 XMV Calibration Point 3 Float Read Write 10 209 X 4 XMV Calibration Point 4 Float Read Write 10 209 X 5 XMV Calibration Point 5 Float Read Write 10 209 X 6 XMV Calibration Bias Float Read Write 10 209 X 7 XMV Calibration Abort Float Write Only 10 209 X 8 XMV Calibration Complete Float Write Only 10 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 81
304. ro 8 Check the continuity of each wire first pair either red or black as identified in step 4 to the probe or shield If there is continuity the RTD is defective Replace the probe If there is no continuity continue to the next step 9 Check the continuity of each second wire pair white as identified in step 7 to the probe or shield If there is continuity the RTD is defective Replace the probe If there is no continuity continue to the next step 10 Check the continuity of each first wire pair as identified in step 4 to each second pair wire as identified in step 7 The meter should read approximately 100 to 140 OHMs If this is the case continue to the next step If not the RTD is defective and should be replaced 11 If the probe is still not functioning properly recheck the wiring using the supplied diagram If no wiring error was found perform the RTD Current Source Troubleshooting test 5 2 5 RTD Current Source Resistive Test If the readings from the RTD are still suspect following the RTD Probe Continuity test follow the instructions below to test the current source on the Termination board to verify that it is receiving power Page 5 6 2104349 001 rev AB 5 2 5 1 Required Equipment e Totalflow Diagnostics Kit e Digital MultiMeter with alligator clip leads 5 2 5 2 Step by Step Instructions 1 Begin by disconnecting power and communications from the Termination board if not already done
305. s See Tube Byte Register 0 42 C 11 5 Tube Register Cross Reference Tube register cross references are structures containing the register access values for data used by the tube but owned by another application The following structure defines data type Register typedef struct Register Struct byte app Application byte array Register array int16 index II index into array Register ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 4 0 AP Register Read Write 4 1 ACF Register Read Write 4 2 TF Register Read Write 4 3 PI Register Read Write 4 4 RS Register Read Write 4 5 AC 1 Register Read Write 4 6 AC 1 DI Register Read Write 4 7 AC 2 Register Read Write 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 69 ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 4 8 AC 2 DI Register Read Write C 11 6 Tube String Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 5 0 Tube ID Read Write 5 1 Tube last analysis time Read Only 5 2 Tube Description Read Write C 11 7 Tube Last Calculation Period Analysis Registers Floating Point ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 10 0 Last Calc Nitrogen Read Only mole 10 1 Last Calc Carbon Dioxide Read Only mole 10 2 Last Calc Hydrogen Sulfide Read Only mole 10 3 Last Calc Water Read Only mole 10 4 Last Calc Helium Read Only mole 10 5 Last Calc Methane Re
306. s N A N A N A Ftb Temperature Base Factor Yes N A N A N A Fg Specific Gravity Factor Yes N A N A N A Fb Orifice Factor Yes N A N A N A Ftf Flowing Temperature Factor Yes N A N A N A Y Expansion Factor Yes Yes N A Yes Fr Reynolds Number Yes N A N A N A Fa Orifice Thermal Expansion Factor Yes N A N A N A 2104349 001 rev AB Page 3 29 Calculation Parameter AGA 3 1985 AGA 3 1992 AGA 7 5 5167 Supercompressibility Factor Yes Yes Yes Yes Fw Water Vapor Factor Yes Yes Yes Yes Faux Full Well Stream Factor Yes Yes Yes Yes Cd Coefficient of Discharge N A Yes N A Yes Fp Fpv method NX19 Fixed Yes Yes Yes Yes Ft for Fpv method NX19 Fixed Yes Yes Yes Yes Coefficient of Discharge Calc N A Yes N A Yes8 Fpc Pressure Correction Factor N A N A Yes N A Ftc Temperature Correction Factor N A N A Yes N A Fs Fpv Compressibility Factor N A N A Yes N A 3 6 5 Super Compressibility Calculation Fpv When the G4 EX is powered up the calculation method needs to be set The user has the option of changing the formula method to any one of several other choices see Table 3 2 Once the calculation has been determined the user may toggle specific parameters on or off depending upon whether they would like to use fixed or live analysis data 9 Many decisions involved with setting up the Fpv are dictated by the user s sales co
307. s Per Page Strings C 41 9 9 105 112 Descriptor Registers C 41 C 9 10 IOS SPI Port Data Registers ssssssseee eene C 41 C 10 11 12 13 9 11 IOS SPI Port Statistics Registers Uint 32 C 41 0 9 12 IOS String Registers nu ener RP IR e C 42 9 13 IOS Daughter CardByte C 42 C 9 14 105 Daughter Card UINT16 Registers C 42 9 15 IOS Daughter Card UINT32 Registers C 43 C 9 16 IOS Daughter Card Float C 43 9 17 105 Daughter Card FE Ram Registers 2 64 Bytes Per Page StringsC 43 C 9 18 105 Daughter Card FE Ram Registers A4 64 Bytes Per Page StringsC 43 C 9 19 Term Board AVDO 0 C 43 AGA 3 Measurement Tube Application Registers C 44 10 1 AGA 3 Tube Byte C 44 C 10 2 Tube 16 Bit Integer C 48 C 10 3 Tube 32 Bit Integer C 49 C 10 4 Tube Floating Point C 49 C 10 5
308. s as they want Recording too many markers could cause the G4 EX to overwrite existing older events Only the last five checks are used by the WinCCU editor for calibration adjustment Enter a low mid low mid mid high and high value CAUTION The resulting comparison pressure must not be greater than the static pressure cell s maximum pressure 2104349 001 rev AB Page 4 19 4 13 3 1 Step by Step Instructions 1 Enter the Calibration menu s Checks screen This will place the G4 EX on Hold Select the preferred measurement tube from the tree view 2 Select SP from the Calibration drop down menu to the left of the Pressure Marker table 3 Select the SP type Absolute or Gauge Absolute will display values with the barometric pressure TIP added in Additionally entered values will need the barometric pressure added Gauge will display values in gauge pressure Additionally entered values will need to be in gauge pressure 4 Click on the Enter Pressure Check Value and select Continuous to update the current reading 5 Verify that the vent valve is closed see Figure 4 12 6 Open both the high and low equalizer valves 7 Close both the downstream and upstream tap valves 8 Open the atmospheric vent valve 9 Enter a pressure marker for atmospheric pressure PSIA Enter zero if in Gauge mode or the barometric pressure or contract value if in Absolute mode Click the OK button 10 Close the atmospheric vent v
309. sibility calculations can be performed in accordance with either NX 19 AGA 8 or ISO 12213 2 G4 EX ce Marifold Crifice Fitting COMM EQUIP MENT BATTERY AND CHARGER Customer Cable i CLASS 1 DIV 1 AREA NON HAZARDOUS AREA NTENA N Solar Panel Proof RTD Probe Remote Location Figure 1 1 Typical G4 EX Installation Page 1 2 2104349 001 rev AB 1 1 2 Functionality Functions of the G4 EX reflect a design that is practical straightforward and efficient It is simple to use and easy to learn This functionality allows for saving time that is usually allotted for calculations and report preparation This flow computer allows the user to perform the following with a minimum of effort maximum speed and greater accuracy Complete log period flow and operational records that are reported hourly default including Average static pressure Average differential pressure Average flowing temperature Integral Corrected volume total Corrected energy total Operating status and alarms Flow time Complete daily flow records including Average static pressure Average differential pressure Average flowing temperature Average extension Corrected volume total Corrected energy total Operating status and alarms C
310. solar paneled system such as many Totalflow installations available voltage to power the 4 20 transmitter can become an issue Batteries in a battery backed solar installation can drop to 12 VDC or less Some transmitters may not be able to drive 20 mA into a 250 OHM load with only 12 VDC applied to them Fully charged batteries connected to an operational battery charger may be sitting at about 13 5 14 VDC 2104349 001 rev AB Page B 11 Flowmeter Al To A D Converter Al pu m Flowmeter To A D Converter Al 1 3 fe Onboard 2500 resistor Selected using three pin lt _ jumper 2500 To PCCU Control Flowmeter To A D Converter Al External to flowmeter VCC 2 wire line powered 4 20ma transmitter User supplies 2500 resistor and wires it across the Al input pins 2500 N n External to flowmeter VCC 2 wire line powered 4 20ma transmitter VA T Ne External to VCC flowmeter Dan 3 wire 4 20ma transmitter 7 N e 2500 J Onboard 2500 resistor is selected in PCCU setup i Again the 4 20 mA transmitter that was selected by the user must be fully operational at voltages as low as VCC 5 VDC Again VCC is the source voltage available at the user s site and 5 VDC represents the voltage dropped across the meter s 250 OHM resistor at the maximum loop current 20 mA Totalf
311. spected for cleanliness both externally and internally Foreign contaminants can cause damage to interior mounted components that can render the G4 EX inoperable 4 1 4 Front Mounted LCD The user is informed of operational problems and operational limit violations by observing the alarm codes on the LCD display Troubleshooting techniques for dealing with these alarm codes is presented later in the manual 4 1 5 Returning Parts for Repair If a Totalflow component is to be returned to Totalflow for repair securely wrap it in protective anti static packaging Before returning a component call Totalflow for a Return for Authorization RA number Affix this number to the outside of the return package Part shipments must be prepaid by the customer Any part that is not covered by the original system warranty will be shipped to the customer F O B 4 2 Backing Up Configuration Files Before beginning any maintenance on the G4 EX the user should collect the data and back up all configuration files to the laptop s hard drive or disk This upload safeguards data and allows the user to restart the unit without the obstacles associated with reconfiguring the G4 EX should any problem arise 2104349 001 rev AB Page 4 1 Although there are Save buttons within the Entry mode screens in PCCU32 that allow the user to back up Entry model data items complete system backup is only accomplished by using the Save and Restore Utility or the 3
312. splays click the Restore Station Files button The Restore Station Files dialog box will display 3 When the Restore Station Files dialog box displays verify the default name and file path Click the OK button This will restore the files to the tfCold drive 4 Verify that the unit is functioning properly 4 4 Performing a Warm Boot A warm boot signifies that the user has cycled power off the board without disconnecting the lithium battery This method enables the user to not lose any stored data A warm boot can be initiated from a hardware or software standpoint The following will take the user through the steps for both methods 4 4 1 Hardware Warm Boot There are two methods of warm booting the system from a hardware standpoint Page 4 2 2104349 001 rev AB 4 4 1 1 Method 1 1 The user will need to open the door to the unit Locate the Reset button on the G4 EX Termination board oc oo oo0oo0000000 Uc 23 A Figure 4 1 Reset Button Location 2 Upon location press the Reset button for approximately five seconds The unit will warm boot 4 4 1 2 Method 2 1 Open the door to the unit Ensure that there is voltage on the battery and that the jumper is enabled If either of these conditions are not met do not attempt a n warm boot Continuing with this process without both FYI 9 conditions being met will result cold b
313. structions make the field connections to the connector plug and re insert into the J8 board connector 10 Following the connection of the RTD thermowell secure the cable to the meter run pipe with plastic tie wraps Do not wrap cable around the meter run pipe 2 2 6 Explosion Proof RTD Probe Assembly If the G4 EX is installed in DIV 1 area the Explosion Proof RTD must be used see Figure 2 7 The following procedures assume that the Explosion Proof RTD kit was purchased as an option For additional information refer to the Wiring Interconnect and Application Instructions that were supplied with the kit HEAD 2 2 NIPPLE S THERMOWELL CUSTOMER SUPPLIED LINE METER RUN Figure 2 7 Explosion Proof RTD Overview 2 2 6 1 Materials Supplied RTD probe see Table 1 7 in Chapter 1 for available parts e Optional thermowell see Table 1 8 in Chapter 1 for available parts e Explosion proof connection head e Conduit union e Nipple fitting e Certification tag e Wiring instructions Page 2 8 2104349 001 rev AB 2 2 6 2 Materials Not Supplied e Teflon tape e Wiring cable conduit from Explosion Proof RTD to flow computer see local codes for material specifications The following instructions assume that the thermowell has TIP previously been installed The end of the thermowell should penetrate the center 1 3 of the meter run 2 2 6 3 Step by Step Instructions 1 Unpack the parts and
314. switch the output between two input values The registers in arrays 30 and 31 contain the inputs to the operation The result of the select operation is returned in the corresponding register in array 32 Lag Operations are executed when the corresponding register in array 36 is read The registers in array 34 contain the value that is used as the lag interval The register in array 35 contains the input to the operation The result of the lag operation is returned in the corresponding register in array 36 Lead Operations are executed when the corresponding register in array 40 is read The registers in array 38 contain the value that is used as the lead interval The register in array 39 contains the input to the operation The result of the lead operation is returned in the corresponding register in array 40 Queue Operations are executed when the corresponding register in array 46 is read The registers in array 42 contain the value that is used as the queue interval The register in array 45 contains the input to the operation The register in array 43 specifies the starting register address for the array The register in array 44 specifies the number of registers in the array The result of the queue operation is returned in the corresponding register in array 46 Ramp Operations are executed when the corresponding register in array 50 is read The registers in array 48 contain the value that is used as the slope The register in array 39 conta
315. t Read Only 6 205 7 XMV 3 Scaled SP Value Float Read Only 6 205 8 XMV 3 Scaled TF Value Float Read Only 6 205 XMV Scaled DP Value Float Read Only 6 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 79 REGISTER DESCRIPTION TYPE ACCESS NOTE 205 X 1 XMV Scaled SP Value Float Read Only 6 205 X 2 Scaled TF Value Float Read Only 6 206 0 XMV 1 Communication Status Byte Read Write 7 206 1 XMV 2 Communication Status Byte Read Write 7 206 2 XMV 3 Communication Status Byte Read Write 7 206 3 XMV 4 Communication Status Byte Read Write 7 206 4 XMV 5 Communication Status Byte Read Write 7 206 5 XMV 6 Communication Status Byte Read Write 7 206 6 XMV 7 Communication Status Byte Read Write 7 206 7 XMV 8 Communication Status Byte Read Write 7 206 8 XMV 9 Communication Status Byte Read Write 7 206 X XMV X 1 Communication Status Byte Read Write 7 207 0 XMV 1 Device Absolute Gauge Byte Read Write 8 207 1 XMV 2 Device Type Absolute Gauge Byte Read Write 8 207 2 XMV 3 Device Type Absolute Gauge Byte Read Write 8 207 3 XMV 4 Device Type Absolute Gauge Byte Read Write 8 207 4 XMV 5 Device Type Absolute Gauge Byte Read Write 8 207 5 XMV 6 Device Type Absolute Gauge Byte Read Write 8 207 6 XMV 7 Device Type Absolute Gauge Byte Read Write 8 207 7 XMV 8 Device Type Absolute Gauge Byte Read Write 8 207 8 XMV 9 Devi
316. t Read Write 17 48 1 Ramp Operation 2 Slope Float Read Write 17 48 2 Ramp Operation 3 Slope Float Read Write 17 48 X Ramp Operation X Slope Float Read Write 17 49 0 Ramp Operation 1 Input Register Register Read Write 17 49 1 Ramp Operation 2 Input Register Register Read Write 17 49 2 Ramp Operation 3 Input Register Register Read Write 17 49 X Ramp Operation X Input Register Register Read Write 17 50 0 Ramp Operation 1 Output Float Read Write 17 50 1 Ramp Operation 2 Output Float Read Write 17 50 2 Ramp Operation 3 Output Float Read Write 17 50 X Ramp Operation X Output Float Read Write 17 51 0 Pulse Operation 1 Descriptor String Read Write 12 51 1 Pulse Operation 2 Descriptor String Read Write 12 512 Pulse Operation 3 Descriptor String Read Write 12 51 X Pulse Operation X Descriptor String Read Write 12 52 0 Pulse Operation 1 Interval Uint32 Read Write 18 52 1 Pulse Operation 2 Interval Uint32 Read Write 18 52 2 Pulse Operation 3 Interval Uint32 Read Write 18 52 X Pulse Operation X Interval Uint32 Read Write 18 53 0 Pulse Operation 1 Trigger Register Register Read Write 18 53 1 Pulse Operation 2 Trigger Register Register Read Write 18 53 2 Pulse Operation 3 Trigger Register Register Read Write 18 53 X Pulse Operation X Trigger Register Register Read Write 18 54 0 Pulse Operation 1 Trigger Flags Byte Read Only 18 54 1 Pulse Operation 2 Trigger Flags Byte Read Only 1
317. t be consistent with the user s company policy 1 Attach the pole mount bracket to the top of the 2 pipe with the U bolts Use the provided hex nuts flat washers and spring lock washers to tighten the pole mount bracket to the 2 pipe MA Position the mounting bracket high enough on the pipe to FYI n allow slope from the externally mounted manifold to the tap valves 2 Position the provided back clamp on the pole mount bracket and align the mounting holes between the two pieces 3 Upon alignment take the G4 EX and its attached transducer and set it within the recessed groove on the back clamp 4 Once the G4 EX and its transducer have been properly positioned attach the device to the brackets using the provided U bolt Use the hex nuts flat washers and spring lock washers to tighten the device to the mounting brackets see Figure 2 1 Page 2 2 2104349 001 rev AB Back Clamp Pole Mount Bracket Figure 2 1 Type Installation Configuration 2 2 2 Type B XL The Type installation configuration comes from the FYI z factory with the transducer already enclosed two attached mounting brackets 2 2 2 1 Materials Supplied e G4 EX mounting kit assembly and associated hardware 2 2 2 2 Materials Not Supplied e One 2 x 40 pipe e Standard 3 or 5 valve manifold e Stainless steel tubing 2 2 2 3 Step by Step Instructions To install the G4 EX it is recommended that
318. te 100 43 STREAM TIME Read Write C 15 2 Therms Slave String Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 101 0 String formatted stream time Read C 15 3 Therms Slave Int32 Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 102 0 New Data flag Stream1 Read 102 1 New Data flag Stream2 Read 102 2 New Data flag Stream3 Read 102 3 New Data flag Stream4 Read C 15 4 Therms Slave Stream 1 Float Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 251 0 N2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 1 CO2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 2 H2S Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 3 H20 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 4 HE Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 5 C1 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 6 C2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 7 C3 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 8 NC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 9 IC4 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 10 NC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 11 IC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 12 NC6 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 13 NC7 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 14 NC8 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 15 NC9 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 16 NC10 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 17 O2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 251 18 CO Btu Stream Component Read Write 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 109
319. te 8 1 23 Ext Status Flags Read Only see note 9 C 10 2 1 Tube 16 Bit Integer Register Usage Notes Primary Element Mask 1 Orifice Square Root Calculation Method Mask 2 AGA 3 1985 4 AGA 3 1992 The sum of these values 6 indicates 2 and 4 are valid choices Super Compressibility Method Mask 1 NX19 with FIXED FT AND FP VALUES 2 NX19 AUTO 4 19 GRAVITY 2 amp 2 8 NX19 2 amp 2 amp 1 2048 AGA8 Gross 4096 AGA8 Detail The sum of these values 6159 indicates all of the choices listed above are valid Aux Contact Select Bits 1 trip contact on low charger 2 trip contact on Dp low 4 trip contact on Dp high 8 trip contact on Ap low 16 trip contact on Ap high 32 trip contact on Remote Sense 64 auto re open 128 trip contact on volume set point 256 trip contact on tf low 512 trip contact on tf high 1024 trip contact on flow rate low 2048 trip contact on flow rate high 16384 reverse contact logic Dp Status Flags 1 low limit exceeded 2 high limit exceeded 4 over range 8 zero flow 16 back flow Status Flags 1 low limit exceeded 2 high limit exceeded 4 over range 8 zero flow 32768 gauge pressure device Tf Status Flags 1 low limit exceeded 2 high limit exceeded 4 over range PI Status Flags 1 low limit exceeded 2 high limit exceeded 8 zero flow Ext Status Flags 1 low limit exceeded 2 high limit exceeded 8 zero flow C 10 3 Tube 32 Bit Integer Registers 2 0
320. ted Volume Units String C 11 13 1 AGA 7 String Register Usage Notes 1 These strings vary per Units scale selection See 6 2 6 3 and 6 4 C 11 14 AGA 7 Int32 Registers ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 9 0 Tube Current Alarm Bits Read Only See note 1 C 11 14 1 AGA 7 Int32 Register Usage Notes 1 Tube Alarm Bits 0x00080000 524288 0x00040000 262144 0x00020000 0x00010000 0x00008000 0x00004000 0x00002000 0x00001000 0x00000800 0x00000400 0x00000200 0x00000100 0x00000080 0x00000040 0x00000020 0x00000010 Flow rate high limit Flow rate low limit 131072 Temperature high limit 65536 Temperature low limit 32768 Static pressure high limit 16384 Static pressure low limit 8192 Acf high limit 4096 Acf low limit 2048 Zero flow 1024 Back flow 512 Remote sense DI 256 contact out DO 128 temperature channel A D over range 64 static pressure channel A D over range 32 differential pressure channel A D over range 16 low charger 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 77 0x00000008 8 low lithium battery 0x00000004 4 AIU analyzer data not received 0x00000002 2 NX19 methane 1 gravity 0 method 0x00000001 1 calculation error C 12 XMV Interface Application Registers Format for the register list is array register be instantiated in any application slot The XMV Interface application can
321. temperature F YEST VOL NNNN N MCF Yesterday s volume programmable SCF MCF or MMCF PERIOD VOL NNNN N SCE Previous period volume last volume calculation period volume Orifice Diameter N NNNN INCHES Diameter of installed orifice STATION ID XXXXXXXXXX 10 character alphanumeric identifier DEVICE ID XXXXXXXXXX 10 character alphanumeric application or tube identifier Page 3 34 2104349 001 rev AB 4 0 G4 EX MAINTENANCE 4 1 Overview The following chapter will provide the user with standard maintenance information and instructions on how to remove and install G4 EX components 4 1 1 Maintenance Support If installation calibration and maintenance assistance is required the user can contact the Totalflow Service Department USA 800 442 3097 International 001 918 338 4888 4 1 2 How to Use This Chapter It is recommended that the user develop regularly scheduled maintenance program By establishing a maintenance program the G4 EX downtime can be minimized Record all items within this chapter in the maintenance practice procedures Practical experience permits updating this schedule over period of time This results in many maintenance items being handled on a routine basis before potential problems result in a failure 4 1 3 Cleanliness Because G4 EX installation is primarily exposed to external environmental conditions it is important that it be regularly in
322. ter Register Read Write 19 60 1 Limit Operation 2 Input Register Register Read Write 19 60 2 Limit Operation 3 Input Register Register Read Write 19 60 X Limit Operation X Input Register Register Read Write 19 61 0 Limit Operation 1 Output Float Read Write 19 61 1 Limit Operation 2 Output Float Read Write 19 61 2 Limit Operation 3 Output Float Read Write 19 61 X Limit Operation X Output Float Read Write 19 62 0 Scale Operation 1 Descriptor String Read Write 12 62 1 Scale Operation 2 Descriptor String Read Write 12 62 2 Scale Operation 3 Descriptor String Read Write 12 62 X Scale Operation X Descriptor String Read Write 12 63 0 Scale Operation 1 Input High Limit Float Read Write 20 63 1 Scale Operation 2 Input High Limit Float Read Write 20 63 2 Scale Operation 3 Input High Limit Float Read Write 20 63 X Scale Operation X Input High Limit Float Read Write 20 64 0 Scale Operation 1 Input Low Limit Float Read Write 20 64 1 Scale Operation 2 Input Low Limit Float Read Write 20 64 2 Scale Operation 3 Input Low Limit Float Read Write 20 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 21 Register Description Type Access Note 64 X Scale Operation X Input Low Limit Float Read Write 20 65 0 Scale Operation 1 Output High Limit Float Read Write 20 65 1 Scale Operation 2 Output Hig
323. ters Uint16 Ary Reg Description Usage Note 10 0 AI 2 Raw Count Read Only 10 1 Battery Raw Count Read Only 10 2 Al 1 Raw Count Read Only C 9 7 Engine EEProm Registers 16 Bytes per page Strings Ary Reg Description Usage Note 11 x EEProm Page x Read Only 2 X 0 15 16 pages and 16 bytes per page C 9 8 Term Board FE Ram Registers 64 Bytes Per Page Strings Ary Reg Description Usage Note 12 x FE Ram Page Read Only 3 0 7 8 Pages and 64 bytes per page C 9 9 IOS II2C Descriptor Registers Strings Ary Reg Description Usage Note 13 x Port Descriptor Read Only 4 X II2c Port Descriptor provides information about the port The port is determined by the order in which it was created C 9 10 IOS SPI Port Data Registers 5 Ary Reg Description Usage Note 14 0 SPI Counter Scans Read Only 14 1 SPI Channel 0 Data Read Only 14 2 SPI Channel 1 Data Read Only 14 3 SPI Channel 2 Data Read Only 14 4 SPI Channel 3 Data Read Only 14 5 SPI Channel 4 Data Read Only 14 6 SPI Channel 5 Data Read Only 14 7 SPI Channel 6 Data Read Only 14 8 SPI Channel 7 Data Read Only The register s data variable is determined by the index ID from the Factory Table Chanlnfo 9 11105 SPI Port Statistics Registers Uint 32 Ary Reg Description Usage Note
324. the System Setup dialog box the user needs to select the TCP IP radio button Move to the Network ID or IP parameter field and type in the IP address that was established in step 4 Click the Close button Reconnect to PCCU32 and move back into Entry mode This establishes the Ethernet connection 2104349 001 rev AB Page 3 11 llli System Setup E X Setup Directory Paths Mise Communications M Toolbar Buttons PCEL Connect Method C Serial port C ActiveSync NGC Bluetooth Connection parameters Level 1 2 Security Code 0000 Network ID or IP 10 127 174 219 M Connect MI Disconnect NGC Operate Entry Monitor Terminal Calibrate Collect File Transfer Valve Control Remote Protocol Remote Communications TFModbus 32 Bit X Series Loader NGC Startup Wizard KC lt lt I I f 118455141 ivi Laptop File Utilities Show Comm Stats on Status Bar RA Archive Utiities i Auto Connect None C Entry Collect C Initial Connect Use default Role Based Access Control credentials Default Role Based amp ccess Control Username Default Role Based Access Control Password Close Help Figure 3 13 System Setup 3 4 Setting Up the G4 EX 3 4 1 Once the user has physically connected to the G4 EX they must then instruct the software of the programming device to connect to At this
325. the available selections In the Amount field set the number of credits to transfer Upon completion click the Transfer button The transferred credits will display to the left of the screen Key Credits Used Surplus Deficit to 3 vani Supported Applications Application Credit Type SAP Serial ti 10 Interface 1 General Credit Key Serial tt 12 Transferto Device LMY Interface 1 General Client 1 General Amount TransfertoKey AGA 3 Measurement 1 General AGA 7 Measurement 1 General IEC Type Trend System 0 1 CO2 NIST General Alarm System 1 General Hydrocarbon DP 2 Pulse Accumulator General A Valve Control M General mount ur Safety 1 General p sji Device Credits Contact Hour Figure 3 32 Transfer to Credit Key The user can program the G4 EX to begin the contact day based on their contract or company standards When the G4 EX first powers up the contract is preset to begin at midnight FYI Xs Midnight is 00 o clock If any value entered is greater than 23 the user will receive an error message and the G4 EX forces the value to 00 midnight Page 3 28 2104349 001 rev AB 3 6 2 Log Period The Log Period is the specified length of time between writing the calculated accumulated volume to record The user
326. the equipment the instructions that are presented in this manual should be read carefully prior to their execution As it is impossible to cover every installation scenario that exists for a given device the instructions do not contain all possible details and do not take into account every conceivable scenario What is presented represents the most common scenarios that a user will find in the field If the information here does not cover the user s specific site scenario call Totalflow Technical Support for further help in implementing the installation Additionally it should be pointed out that the following instructions are neither part of nor provided for changing a previous existing agreement promise or legal relationship The obligations adhered to by ABB Totalflow result from the respective sales contract which also comprises the complete and solely valid warranty clauses These contractual warranty clauses will not be limited or extended by the content of this manual xii Safety Guidelines Safety First DO NOT open the equipment to perform any adjustments measurements maintenance parts replacement or repairs until all external power supplies have been disconnected For assembly electrical connection installation and maintenance of the device only qualified and authorized specialist should attempt these tasks specialist would be one who is experienced in either assembly electrical connection installation or maintena
327. the user attempted to change will v simply remain unchanged Page 3 14 2104349 001 rev AB System Setup E Setup Directory Paths Mise Communications Toolbar Buttons PCCU Connect Method v Connect uc Serial port C C ActiveSync NGC Bluetooth Level 1 2 Security Code NGC Operate M Entry PCCU Com Port jv Monitor Terminal Initial Baud 2400 ivi Calibrate Collect Max Baud 3600 x iviFile Transfer Stop Bits jv Valve Control M Remote Protocol Timeout ms mo re en O n IV Show Comm Stats on Status Bar en a P Auto Connect None C Entry Collect iiid mad Use default Role Based Access Control credentials Default Role Based Access Control Username Default Role Based Access Control Password Figure 3 15 Security Setup Dialog Box WinCCU32 Security WinCCU32 also requires the appropriate security codes see Figure 3 16 Highlight the appropriate meter and click Edit ID Edit a Device ID 2005 11111 Device App ID zoom Title Description OK SYSTEM i Tub Location Gas Tube STATE Station Unit ID FIELD 1 LEASE amp Help OBUCE Security Code E OPERATOR Phone No BUYER Device Type rcu 7 Comm Type 48004 7 v Options Comm Pott PORT Z
328. they are connecting Once this has been accomplished the screen will populate with the relevant fields that pertain to the Bluetooth connection method If the Bluetooth adapter is supported by the G4 EX the Search for Bluetooth Devices button is activated along with a drop down list of Bluetooth devices that have previously been selected see Figure 3 5 The user may select a previous Bluetooth device in the drop down list or search for a device see Figure 3 6 If the user searches for a Bluetooth device the list will contain previously paired devices and not just the devices in range The user may select the preferred Totalflow Bluetooth device or if that one was not found after the search the user can initiate another search Upon selection the device will be populated in the drop down list in the System Setup dialog box The user must provide the Bluetooth pairing code to automate the connection This is typically a 4 digit authentication code set in the device and is defaulted to 0000 2104349 001 rev AB Page 3 5 System Setup X Setup Directory Paths Mise Communications M Toolbar Buttons PCCU Connect Method C Serial port C ActiveSync NGC Connection parameters gt Level 1 2 Security Code 0000 Bluetooth Device EXFCPAU OB CE I Bluetooth Code 0000 Search for Bluetooth Devices Connect Disconnect NGC Operate Entry Monitor
329. tion These codes are location dependent and may mean different things based upon which character space the code appears in These are also user configurable G4 EX Main Processor Board Display Assembly Figure 1 15 Liquid Crystal Display LCD Assembly Page 1 20 2104349 001 rev AB 1 2 6 Resistive Temperature Detector RTD Totalflow offers a choice of two RTD options The 100 OHM Platinum RTD measures real time flowing temperature of the gas 1 2 6 1 Standard RTD The standard RTD is not DIV 1 approved therefore this RTD may only be installed and used in general purpose areas 1 2 6 2 Explosion Proof RTD The Explosion Proof RTD is available for use in DIV 1 areas see Figure 1 16 Two probe lengths are available 10 and 16 See Table 1 7 for standard probes based on Thermowell U lengths and Table 1 8 for standard Thermowells that are based on thread diameter Connection Head J Union Conduit 2c Certification uui RTD Probe Model 312 Spring Loaded 4 Wire 100 OHM EXPLOSDN PROF LL I 1 GP CD SEAL WITHIN 18 DF CONDUIT ENTRY Figure 1 16 Explosion Proof Resistive Temperature Detector Table 1 7 Standard RTD Probes U Length Part Number U Length Part Number 2 00 2101691 020 6 00 2101691 060 2 50 2101691 025 7 00 2101691 070 3 00 2101691 030 8 00 2101691 080 4 00 2101691 040 9 00 2101691 090 5 0
330. tions protocols e Storage of data records and operational events is determined by user based on available memory 1 1 3 1 Additional Features Additional features of the Totalflow system s flexibility include the following e Programmable differential pressure zero cutoff e Programmable bi level security codes to prevent unauthorized access to and configuration of the G4 EX or user configurable Role Based Security Access RBAC e Internal 100 Ohm platinum RTD resistance curve fit with user programmable single point offset or 3 5 point user calibration of the RTD input e Quick simple calibration procedures for transducer Real time clock providing a highly stable time base for the system e Proper battery and solar sizing is determined by geographic location of the unit and total power consumption of the system Totalflow project engineers can select the appropriate battery and solar requirements for the user s specific application Larger capacity batteries are available to increase autonomy if required e Three available power sources External solar panel standard External AC or AC to DC power External 24 12 VDC power e Liquid crystal display LCD programmable to allow monitoring of the G4 operations and can display any variable that has a register for example displays current static pressure e Three serial communication ports are available on the G4 EX 1 dedicated RS 232 Local and 2 user programmable
331. tream Component Read Write 110 13 NC7 Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 14 NC8 Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 15 NC9 Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 16 NC10 Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 17 O2 Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 18 CO Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 19 H2 Btu Stream Component Read Write Page C 96 2104349 001 rev AB ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 110 20 AR Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 21 AIR Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 22 C6PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 23 BTU Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 24 GF Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 25 SGF Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 26 CPCV Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 27 VISCOSITY Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 28 DENSITY Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 29 FT Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 30 FP Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 31 C7PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 32 C8PLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 33 H2OCONTENT Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 34 H2OBIAS Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 35 EOAXMAP Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 36 NEOC5 Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 37 C3PRIME Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 38 CAPLUS Btu Stream Component Read Write 110 39
332. tring Read Write 3 1 Report Port Name String Read Write 4 0 0 Float Registers Float 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 13 REGISTER DESCRIPTION TYPE ACCESS NOTE 4 0 Float Accumulator Float Read 5 0 5 31 Output Files String Read Write 6 0 6 31 Template Files String Read Write 7 0 X BTU Apps Trigger Registers String Read Write 8 0 8 31 Header Files String Read Write 9 0 9 31 Report Modes Byte Read Write 1 10 0 10 31 Analysis Times Int32 Read Write C 5 1 Reports Register Notes 1 Auto Manual Disabled Triggered C 6 Operations Application Registers Format for the register list is app array register The Operations application can be instantiated in any application slot Register Description Type Access Note 0 0 Periodic Operations 1 Trigger Register Register Read Write 1 0 1 Periodic Operations 2 Trigger Register Register Read Write 1 0 2 Periodic Operations 3 Trigger Register Register Read Write 1 0 X Periodic Operations X Trigger Register Register Read Write 1 1 0 Periodic Operations 1 Trigger Type Byte Read Write 1 1 1 Periodic Operations 2 Trigger Type Byte Read Write 1 1 2 Periodic Operations 3 Trigger Type Byte Read Write 1 1 X Periodic Operations X Trigger Type Byte Read Write 1 2 0 Periodic Operations 1 Trigger Interval Uint32 Read Write 1 2 1 Peri
333. uble Figure 5 1 Troubleshooting Flowchart 5 2 Troubleshooting Visual Alarm Codes When visual indicator is present see Figure 5 2 the following section will assist in determining the probable cause and the steps required to correct the condition For the purposes of troubleshooting only those codes considered alarms or codes used to assist troubleshooting are discussed here The entire list of status and alarm codes can be found in Chapter 1 Table 5 1 contains description of each G4 EX alarm code An alarm can be word character letter or symbol Page 5 2 2104349 001 rev AB An application can be assigned to an annunciator and any alarms or status codes associated with that application will be displayed 14 characters across 4 characters high 5 2 Liquid Crystal Display Indicators Table 5 1 Visual Alarm Codes Indicator Description Alarm I O Subsystem Low Lithium Battery Alarm When low lithium is displayed the lithium battery L voltage is below 2 5 VDC If battery voltage is above 2 5 VDC A1 appears Y shaded A new lithium battery measures approximately 3 6 VDC Low Charger This is displayed if the G4 EX battery charging voltage is less than C 0 4 VDC higher than the battery voltage If charging voltage is 0 4 VDC Y greater than the battery voltage the annunciator is shaded Measurement Application A to D Failure Displayed if the
334. ue Operation X Interval Uint32 Read Write 16 43 0 Queue Operation 1 Array Register Register Read Write 16 43 1 Queue Operation 2 Array Register Register Read Write 16 43 2 Queue Operation 3 Array Register Register Read Write 16 43 X Queue Operation X Array Register Register Read Write 16 44 0 Queue Operation 1 Array Size Uint 16 Read Write 16 44 1 Queue Operation 2 Array Size Uint16 Read Write 16 44 2 Queue Operation 3 Array Size Uint16 Read Write 16 44 X Queue Operation X Array Size Uint16 Read Write 16 45 0 Queue Operation 1 Input Register Register Read Write 16 45 1 Queue Operation 2 Input Register Register Read Write 16 45 2 Queue Operation 3 Input Register Register Read Write 16 45 X Queue Operation X Input Register Register Read Write 16 46 0 Queue Operation 1 Output Float Read Write 16 46 1 Queue Operation 2 Output Float Read Write 16 46 2 Queue Operation 3 Output Float Read Write 16 46 X Queue Operation X Output Float Read Write 16 47 0 Ramp Operation 1 Descriptor String Read Write 12 47 1 Ramp Operation 2 Descriptor String Read Write 12 47 2 Ramp Operation 3 Descriptor String Read Write 12 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 19 Register Description Type Access Note 47 X Ramp Operation X Descriptor String Read Write 12 48 0 Ramp Operation 1 Slope Floa
335. ue is above the Data High Limit value specified on the display Item Setup screen The displayed item s value is below the Data Low Limit value specified on the display Item Setup screen Communications gt Transmitting Data Sending a response lt Receiving Data Processing request Negative Acknowledgement Nak w packet list Positive Acknowledge Ack of receipt of request Waiting for Positive Acknowledgement Waiting for response after transmission Exception Alarm Processing ID Recognized Recognized and receiving request Listen Cycle Flashes if this remote port is active and running Totalflow Remote Protocol Flashes in sync with listening cycle that occurs at 1 2 or 4 second intervals May not be visible if baud rate is faster than 2400 Annunciator will remain on if listen cycle is set to zero MODBUS ASCII MODBUS ASCII protocol selected for the port assigned to this annunciator MODBUS RTU MODBUS RTU protocol is selected for the port assigned to this annunciator Local Protocol Displayed when PCCU32 port is active and running Totalflow Local Protocol Network Ethernet iX USB Measurement Application Br Back Flow Condition Visible only when DP variable displayed 7 Zero Flow Condition Visible only when Flow Rate displayed H Hold Displayed when PCCU32 has entered Calibration mode Measurement Application A Alarm Condition Need to view alarm The user may need t
336. unger 4 31 0 x Unsigned byte 8 bits Well x State 0 6 4 7 32 0 x Unsigned byte 8 bits Well x Status Enable 4 8 33 0 x Boolean 8 bits Well x Option Shutdown 4 10 Page C 32 2104349 001 rev AB Ary Reg Type Size Description Note 34 0 x Boolean 8 bits Well x Option Schedule 4 10 35 0 x Boolean 8 bits Well x Adr State 4 36 0 x Register Address 32 bits Well x Adr Status 4 5 37 0 x Register Address 32 bits Well x Adr Hold DO 4 5 38 0 x Register Address 32 bits Well x Adr Fail Reason DO 4 5 39 0 x Register Address 32 bits Well x Adr Reset DO 4 5 C 8 2 General Registers C 8 2 1 String Registers x 0 x 25 Characters Ary Reg Description Usage Note 0 0 Program Name R W 0 1 Program Revision Read 0 2 State String Read C 8 2 2 Byte Registers x 1 x 8 Bits Ary Reg Description Usage Note 1 0 n u R W 1 1 Option Safety R W 8 1 2 Clear Log R W 10 1 3 Size R W 1 4 DI Size R W 1 5 Well Size R W 1 6 Manual Timer Read 1 7 Manual Limit secs R W 1 8 Option Well Schedule R W 10 1 9 Well Open Max R W 1 10 Well Open Current R W 1 11 Well Schedule Algorithm R W 11 1 12 Well Next to Open or last opened R W C 8 2 3 Register Addresses 2 32 Bits Ary Reg Description Usage Note 2 0 Safety Reset Button R W 2 1 Power Monitor Al R W 2 2 Shutdown Status DO R W 2 3
337. ure low limit 8192 Dphigh limit 4096 Dp low limit 2048 Zeroflow 4 AIU analyzer data not received 2 NX19 methane 1 gravity 0 method 1 calculation error 2 Daily Record definition typedef struct unsigned long date unsigned int sn unsigned int event unsigned int firstlog unsigned int lastlog unsigned char c hr Julian Date Time Sequence Number Last Event Log Seq Num First Log Period Seq Num Last Log Period Seq Num Contract Hour float ext float vol float btu unsigned long ftime unsigned long btime unsigned long ptime unsigned char aflags 3 float ap float minap float maxap float aplpct float aphpct float dp float mindp float maxdp Daily Extension Daily Volume Daily Energy Daily Flowtime Daily Back flowtime period TIME period ALARMS Daily Avg AP Daily Minimum AP Daily Maximum AP Daily AP LO per cent Daily AP HI per cent Daily Avg DP Daily Minimum DP Daily Maximum DP Page C 56 2104349 001 rev AB float Daily DP LO per cent float dphpct Daily DP HI per cent float tf Daily Avg Temp float Daily Minimum TF float maxtf Daily Maximum TF float tflpct Daily DP LO per cent float tfhpct Daily DP HI per cent unsigned char vcode Verification
338. ured up during SP calibration Page 4 18 2104349 001 rev AB 4 13 2 Hold Mode When calibrating the transducer or setting up a fixed temperature PCCU32 will instruct the G4 EX to ignore live values for the flow calculations for the period of time that the G4 EX is being calibrated During this time the G4 EX uses SP DP and temperature captured at the time that calibration mode was entered This is referred to as the HOLD mode To exit HOLD mode 1 Exit Calibration mode 2 Unplug the PCCU cable at the G4 EX connector Totalflow recommends performing a five point check before TIP and after calibration The host software WinCCU is capable of recalculating the volume based on the differences between the previous five point check and the current five point check After a secure audit trail is archived WinCCU recalculates the flow volumes based on the previous and current markers This allows more accurate results of the flow volume 4 13 3 Static Pressure SP Calibration Checks The G4 EX allows the user to check the static pressure calibration and log pressure marker check points The user should perform this check prior to and directly following the calibration During normal operation of the G4 EX the display provides continuous SP readouts however during this procedure the G4 EX is placed in a temporary Hold mode A minimum of three SP markers should be set however the user can enter as many SP marker
339. verify that all the supplied materials are present If parts are missing contact Totalflow Customer Service at 800 442 3097 or 1918 338 4880 2 Screw the nipple fitting into the thermowell and tighten see Figure 2 8 3 Separate the top and bottom of the union Screw the union bottom onto the nipple fitting Be aware that the union nut is on the union bottom Tighten BOTTOM OF PROBE AND ELEMENT N 1 2 NIPPLE FITTING 1 2 CONDUIT UNION Figure 2 8 Explosion Proof RTD Disassembled 4 Screw the union top into the bottom of the connection head and tighten 5 Unscrew and remove the cap from the Explosion Proof Connection Head 6 Insert the RTD probe through the opening in the head Holding the probe from underneath screw the spring clockwise down into the center of the wiring block Stop when the top edge of the spring is flush with the top of the wiring block 7 Insert probe and head assembly through the bottom half of the union that was previously installed into the thermowell As the union halves meet the user should encounter some resistance As the probe contacts the bottom of the thermowell the user should see the top of the probe rise 3 4 max TIP If the probe assembly is too long or too short the user may need to change nipple lengths 8 Lift the union nut up to the union top Screw together 9 Align the RTD head to the correct position for the conduit and wiring Tighten the union nut 1
340. ves Using the orifice tap valves close off both upstream and downstream These two valves connect the meter run high low output lines to the transducer Open the vent valve to atmosphere Completely disconnect the high low manifold lines from the transducer If the user is able to do so at this point remove the external power that is feeding the unit If this can be done skip to step 10 otherwise continue to the next step Page 4 16 2104349 001 rev AB I IJ HIGH SIDE LOW SIDE EQUALIZER VALVE EQUALIZER VALVE 200 900 VENT TO ATMOSPHERE 4 11 G4 EX with Block Manifold be non hazardous before removing any enclosure cover For further information refer to the certification drawing indicated on the device s nametag and national and local electrical codes Remove power from the device or insure the area is known to WARNING 8 Gain access to the rear Termination board by loosening the countersunk hex socket locking set screw in the rear end cap Use 1 16 hex wrench to perform this task Upon completion unscrew the end cap 9 Disconnect the power connection J16 from the Termination board mounted connector be non hazardous before removing any enclosure cover For further in
341. voltage on the G4 EX side of the OEU Termination strip between GND and RRTS When the data in the G4 EX is sending communication data to WinCCU the voltage should be 5 VDC for the duration of the transmission 3 Using an oscilloscope measure the transmitting data voltage on the G4 EX side of the OEU Termination strip between GND and BUS And GND and Bus When data is being transmitted from the G4 EX unit the voltage should vary between 2 VDC and 5 VDC 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 on the transceiver side of the Termination strip 5 inaccuracy exists investigate the wiring errors Page 5 22 2104349 001 rev AB APPENDIXA DAUGHTER CARD The following information provides an outline for the installation and application of the I O daughter card within the G4 EX The daughter card may already be installed in new units if configured or can be added as an upgrade kit to pre existing units The following information will address the installation for the upgrade kit Do not install the I O daughter card until told to do so in caution these instructions Installation prior to flashing the unit may cause some older models units to not boot A 1 Materials Supplied in the Upgrade Kit e 1 each I O Daughter Card 4 each 6 25 OD Flat Washer 4 each 6 Flat Washer 4 each 6 32 x 625 Hex Female Spacer 4 each 6 32 x 75 LG M F Standoff e 1 each I O Daughter Card Generic Wiring Diagr
342. w attention to useful information or to clarify a lt Statement made earlier TIP 0 Intended to draw attention to a fact that may be useful or helpful in understanding concept Intended to draw attention to a statement that might keep the user from making a mistake keep the user from destroying could cause personal injury if caution is not used Please refer to equipment or parts or keep the user from creating situation that the Safety Practices and Precautions section for additional information Intended to draw attention to a statement regarding the likelihood of personal injury or fatality that could result from improper WARNING access or techniques used while working in hazardous locations Please refer to the Safety Practices and Precautions section for additional information Safety Practices and Precautions This manual contains information and warnings which have to be followed by the user to ensure safe operation and to retain the product in a safe condition Installation maintenance and repairs should only be performed by a trained and qualified technician Please refer to the certification drawings shipped with this unit for specific guidelines Extra copies of the certification drawings referenced on the unit s name tag can be obtained free of charge by contacting Totalflow Technical Support at the number listed in the Getting Help section To ensure safe installation and operation of
343. w calibration markers should be set 22 Return the manifold to service before exiting Calibration mode 4 13 6 Calibrating Differential Pressure DP A three or five point pressure method is used to calibrate the G4 EX differential pressure cell These different pressures are applied to the cell from a known traceable source The resultant pressure values are then entered in the G4 EX using PCCU32 software During factory calibration any differential pressure DP shift due to static pressure effect is corrected This is not user configurable and will not be modified due to field or user calibration This ensures that the readings received in the field are accurate The user may not change the factory set shift If readings appear incorrect the user may need to check for leaks and then recalibrate the DP When calibrating wait for the readings to stabilize before entering the new values 4 13 6 1 Step by Step Instructions 1 Enter the Calibration menu s Calibration screen This places the G4 EX in HOLD 2 Select DP from the Calibration drop down box to the left of the Pressure Marker table Select 3 or 5 Point Calibration 3 Set the Transducer DP Pressure Range in the Calibration window before proceeding This should match the range reading from the tag or label attached to the transducer Target values based on the selected range will display in the Calibration table 4 Verify that the vent valve is closed see Figure 4
344. xt Register 2 Uint16 Read Only 14 218 2 XMV 1 Scroll Text Register 3 Uint16 Read Only 14 218 3 XMV 1 Scroll Text Register 4 Uint16 Read Only 14 218 4 XMV 1 Scroll Text Register 5 Uint16 Read Only 14 218 5 XMV 1 Scroll Text Register 6 Uint16 Read Only 14 218 6 XMV 1 Scroll Text Register 7 Uint16 Read Only 14 218 7 XMV 2 Scroll Text Register 1 Uint16 Read Only 14 218 8 XMV 2 Scroll Text Register 2 Uint16 Read Only 14 218 9 XMV 2 Scroll Text Register 3 Uint16 Read Only 14 218 10 XMV 2 Scroll Text Register 4 Uint16 Read Only 14 218 11 XMV 2 Scroll Text Register 5 Uint16 Read Only 14 218 12 XMV 2 Scroll Text Register 6 Uint16 Read Only 14 218 13 XMV 2 Scroll Text Register 7 Uint16 Read Only 14 218 14 XMV 3 Scroll Text Register 1 Uint16 Read Only 14 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 83 REGISTER DESCRIPTION TYPE ACCESS NOTE 218 15 XMV 3 Scroll Text Register 2 Uint16 Read Only 14 218 16 XMV 3 Scroll Text Register 3 Uint16 Read Only 14 218 17 XMV 3 Scroll Text Register 4 Uint16 Read Only 14 218 18 XMV 3 Scroll Text Register 5 Uint16 Read Only 14 218 19 XMV 3 Scroll Text Register 6 Uint16 Read Only 14 218 20 XMV 3 Scroll Text Register 7 Uint16 Read Only 14 218 XMV Scroll Text Register 1 Uint16 Read Only 14 218 X 1 XMV Scroll Text Register 2 Uint16 Read Only 14 218 X 2 XMV Scroll Text Reg
345. y Avg ACF Daily Minimum Daily Maximum Daily LO per cent Daily ACF HI per cent Daily Avg Temp Daily Minimum TF Daily Maximum TF Daily LO per cent Daily ACF HI per cent I Verification Code DAYRECORD C 11 10 Tube Event Registers ARRAY DESCRIPTION USAGE 252 Event Log Record See note 1 C 11 10 1 Tube Event Registers Usage Notes Tube Event Log Record definition typedef struct unsigned long date unsigned char flags unsigned int sn Julian Date Time Event Flags Sequence Number 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 73 unsigned int code Event Code unsigned char oldval 4 Previous Value unsigned char newval 4 Current Value unsigned char vcode Verification Code EVTRECORD C 11 11 AGA 7 Tube Byte Registers The following register tables describe registers unique to AGA 7 measurement tubes ARRAY REGISTER DESCRIPTION USAGE 6 0 AGA 7 Factor Select Bits Read Write See note 1 6 1 Misc Select Bits Read Write See note 2 6 2 ale scale selection for uncorrected vol Read Write See note 3 6 3 oe scale selection for corrected volume Read Write See note 4 6 4 Units scale selection for flow rate units Read Write See note 5 6 5 AGA7 test Calculations Write 6 6 Meter factor units vol pulse pulses vol Read Write C 11 11 1 AGA 7 Byte Reg
346. y Byte Read Write 3 0 4 Display Lock Byte Read Write 3 0 5 Display Clear Byte Read Write 4 0 6 Display Save Byte Read Write 5 0 7 Restore Factory Default Display Byte Read Write 6 1 0 File Name 12 Characters String Read Write 1 1 Display Name 24 Characters String Read Write 1 2 Display Units 14 Characters String Read Write 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 5 REGISTER DESCRIPTION TYPE ACCESS NOTE 1 3 Display Format Width dec String Read Write 1 4 Group Description 24 Characters String Read Write 2 0 Display Interval Seconds Byte Read Write 2 1 Name X Location 0 23 Byte Read Write 2 2 Name Y Location 0 1 Byte Read Write 2 3 Units X Location 0 23 Byte Read Write 2 4 Units Y Location 0 1 Byte Read Write 2 5 Data X Location 0 23 Byte Read Write 2 6 Data Y Location 0 1 Byte Read Write 2 7 Annunciator Plot X Location 0 23 Byte Read Write 2 8 Annunciator Plot Y Location 0 1 Byte Read Write 2 9 Plot Type Byte Read Write 7 2 10 Plot Direction Byte Read Write 8 2 12 Plot Line Width Byte Read Write 2 13 Plot Border Byte Read Write 9 2 14 Display Attributes Byte Read Write 10 2 15 File Attributes Byte Read Write 11 3 0 Data Scale Factor Float Read Write 3 1 Data High Limit Float Read Write 3 2 Data Low Limit Float Read Write 4 0 Data Register Register Read Write 4 1 Plot Array Register Register R
347. y that the vent valve is closed see Figure 4 12 7 Open both the high and low equalizer valves 8 Close both the downstream and upstream tap valves 9 Open the atmosphere vent valve 10 Click on the Low Cal Point button Verify the current reading is continuously updated This should represent the lowest calibration point 11 When the current reading stabilizes click the OK button otherwise enter a different value and then click the OK button 12 When the previous reading was accepted notice that the 10096 Cal Point button is activated To select press Enter 13 Connect calibration standard to the calibration test port 14 Close the atmosphere vent valve 15 Pressure to 100 of the transducer range 100 of the target value 16 When the current reading stabilizes accept the target value already showing in the window otherwise enter the pressure value from the calibration source Click the OK button 17 Again notice that the next Cal Point is activated To select press Enter 18 Pressure the transducer to the next target value as shown in the Calibration window 2104349 001 rev AB Page 4 23 19 When the current reading stabilizes accept the target value already showing in the window otherwise enter the pressure value from the calibration source Click the OK button 20 Repeat steps 17 through 19 until all calibration points have been entered 21 Upon completion of the SP calibration ne
348. yte Read Write 0 12 MODBUS Register Format Byte Read Write 10 0 13 Host Retry Limit Byte Read Write 0 14 Communications Task Priority Byte Read Write 1 0 15 Switched V Batt Enable Byte Read Write 0 16 Pager On Off Byte Read Write 0 17 Trailing Pad Characters Byte Read Write 12 0 18 Modem Mode ASCII BINARY Byte Read Write 0 19 Packet Trace Enable Byte Read Write 13 0 20 Interface On Off Byte Read Write 0 21 ISR Thread Priority Byte Read Write 0 22 Port Type Byte Read Write 20 0 23 Port Open Byte Read Write 0 24 Keep Port Open Flag Byte Read Write 0 25 Modbus Host Scan Enabled Byte Read Write 0 40 Port Name Byte Read Write 0 50 1 0 Power Up Delay Milli Seconds Uint16 Read Write 1 1 Transmit Key Delay Milli Seconds Uint16 Read Write 1 2 Transmit Unkey Delay ms Uint16 Read Write 1 3 Timeout Milli Seconds Uint16 Read Write 1 4 Modem Inactivity Timeout Minutes Uint 16 Read Write 1 5 Modem Connect Timeout Seconds Uint16 Read Write 1 6 Modem Disconnect Timeout Seconds Uint16 Read Write 1 7 MODBUS Group Assigned Uint16 Read Write 14 1 8 MODBUS Group Current Uint 16 Read Write 14 1 9 TCP Port Socket Uint16 Read Write 1 10 Response Delay Before Raising RTS Uint16 Read Write 1 11 Record Number Uint16 Read Write 2104349 001 rev AB Page C 29 REGISTER DESCRIPTION TYPE ACCESS NOTE 2 0 Schedule Start Time Uint32 Re
349. zardous location must follow guidelines stipulated in the certification drawings shipped with this unit Connecting or disconnecting equipment in hazardous location for installation or maintenance of electric components must follow guidelines stipulated in the certification drawings shipped with this unit WARNING indicates personal injury hazard immediately accessible as one reads the markings CAUTION indicates personal injury hazard not immediately accessible as one reads the markings or hazard to property to include the equipment itself xiii Equipment Markings D Protective ground earth terminal Grounding the Product If a grounding conductor is required it should be connected to the grounding terminal before any other connections are made Operating Voltage Before switching on the power check that the operating voltage listed on the equipment agrees with the power being connected to the equipment Danger From Loss of Ground A grounding conductor may or may not be required depending on the hazardous classification If required any interruption of the grounding conductor inside or outside the equipment or loose connection of the grounding conductor can result in a dangerous unit Intentional interruption of the grounding conductor is not permitted Safe Equipment If it is determined that the equipment cannot be operated safety it should be taken out of operation and secured against unintentional

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

取扱説明書 保管用一 (ぐ〇い リニア調光LEDぺンダン卜  ZyXEL G-202 User's Manual  IPMI: Freight Train to Hell  SERVICE DATA  DD 350/DD 500 Sistema de perforación con diamante  Model 34788-H  MATRIX TRADER Androidアプリ取扱説明書  Precauzioni relative alla Sicurezza  取扱説明書（1.49MB）  CAPSPrAy 8500 - Westco Sanitary Fittings  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file